RESEARCH - WordPress.com

RESEARCH AND REVIEW

AAnn IInntteerrnnaattiioonnaall RReesseeaarrcchh JJoouurrnnaall ooff HHuummaanniittiieess && SScciieenncceess

ISSN : 2349-4301

Impact Factor: 2.38

Vol. 003, No. 002, December 2016

RREESSEEAARRCCHH AANNDD RREEVVIIEEWW ((AA BBiiaannnnuuaall && BBiilliinngguuaall RReesseeaarrcchh JJoouurrnnaall ooff HHuummaanniittiieess aanndd SScciieenncceess))

AA PPeeeerr RReevviieewweedd//RReeffeerreeeedd RReesseeaarrcchh JJoouurrnnaall

EEddiittoorr iinn CChhiieeff

PPrrooff.. SSuuggaamm AAnnaanndd

EEddiittoorr

DDrr.. AAnniill KKuummaarr VVeerrmmaa

MMaannaaggiinngg EEddiittoorr

DDrr.. JJaaii PP.. SShhaarrmmaa

EEddiitteedd aanndd PPuubblliisshheedd

IInnnnoovvaattiivvee GGrroouupp ooff HHiigghheerr LLeeaarrnniinngg && RReesseeaarrcchh HHeeaadd OOffffiiccee CC--9911,, GGaannppaattii CCiittyy,, BBaaiinnppuurr,, BBeehhiinndd SSiikkaannddrraa,, AAggrraa--0077 ((UU..PP..)),, IINNDDIIAA

WWeebbssiittee –– rreesseeaarrcchhaannddrreevviieewwbblloogg..wwoorrddpprreessss..ccoomm EEmmaaiill:: rreesseeaarrcchhrreevviieeww22001144@@ggmmaaiill..ccoomm

EDITORIAL NOTE

This research journal publishes high quality research papers and articles on

various areas of humanities & Sciences. The Journal aims at scientists, academicians,

research scholars and students working & studying in various International

universities, Research Institutions, Governmental and Non-Governmental

organizations. The main objective is to create an environment of learning & fruitful

academic interactions on various aspects of humanities & Sciences with the

attainment of scientific productivity in all these areas.

All the research paper /articles are peer reviewed by the editorial board

consisted of eminent academicians. The submitted research papers / articles should

meet internationally accepted criteria and manuscripts should follow the style of the

journal for the purpose of both reviewing and editing.

Prof. Sugam Anand

Editor in Chief

CONTENTS

Sr. No. Part – 1 Page

No. 1 An Empirical Study of Status and Opportunity of Tourism

Business at Ayodhya

- Dr. Lavkush Mishra and Ms. Pragya

1 – 23

2 MSME in India-An Overview

- Dr. Megha Jain

24 – 31

3 Crisis in India Agriculture

-Dr. Shikha Singh

32 – 36

4 Life history of Dayananda Saraswati’s and their contribution with regards to Educational Philosophy, Social and Political Ideas

- Dr. Amit Kumar Sharma

37 – 48

5 Arya Samaj and Dayanand Anglo Vedic movement: with special references to Educational and Social Dimensions

- Dr. Amit Kumar Sharma

48 – 60

6 Levels of Ground water in Mahendergarh District of Haryana

- Dr. Sunita

61 – 69

7 The purpose of this study is to see the “Effect of between Type A Behaviour, Vocational Maturity and Optimism on Vocational Indecision and Vocational Unrealism among XIth grade science boys and girls of Government Schools”.

- Dr. Vandana Singh

70 – 85

8 Relationship Between Selected Physical Fitness Components and Skill Performance of Boxing and Non-Boxing Players

- Dr. Sanjeev Kumar

86 – 89

9 Different Themes in the Plays of Rabindra Nath Tagore

– Manju Singh 90 - 92

10 The Shades of Marital Life with special reference to Morrison’s ‘Sula’

- Dr. Amit Nelson Singh

93 – 100

11 Impact of Various Factors on Land Use in District Aligarh

- Dr. Abha Bashnoi

101 – 104

12 Effect of Health Status during Pregnancy on Pregnant Women in Agra City -Deepti Singh, Prof. Neeta Chopra

105 – 115

13 A Comparative Study of Dietary Practices of Hypertensive and Non-Hypertensive Young Adults in Agra District -Priyanka Sharma, Prof. Neeta Chopra

116 – 125

14 Socio - Political Conditions of Indian Life since the middle of the Twentieth Century

- Dr. Alkesh Singh, Agra.

126 - 137

15 Social Characters in the Poetry of Nissim Ezeikiel

- Dr. Gyanendra Singh Pundhir

138 - 140

16 Shuddhi Movement : A Brief Historical Study with Special Reference to District Moradabad and its Surroundings

-Dr. B.D. Shukla

141 - 146

17 Writing in Indian English Literature -Ritu Yadav

147 - 150

18 Post – Independence Indian Women Novelists -Ritu Yadav

151 – 153

19 Rabindra Nath Tagore and Human Touch in His Writings –Vikash Sharma

154 – 157

20 Evaluative Study of Problems and Opportunities for Domestic Workers in India –Dr. Sunil Kumar

158 – 160

21 Ownership Rights of Women in Early India – Dr. Madhu Vashishtha

161–183

22 Analysis of Crimes against Women as per Indian Penal Code

– Dr. Meenakshi Verma

184 – 185

23 How Social Media has Changed The Mindset of Voters In India – Vaanya Singh

186 – 200

24 Elements of Realism In The Stories of William Dean Howells –Dr. Seema Yadav

201 – 203

25 The Nature and Scope of Consumer Protection Act 1986

– Vatsalya Upadhyay

204 - 208

26 An Overview of Indian Banking System

–Aloukik Upadhyay

209 - 213

27 Electronics in Energy System

– Vinod Kumar

214 - 220

28 A Positive Approach to Physical Education Profession through Health, Fitness and Health Education – Dr. Vijay Singh Chaudhary

221 - 228

29 Impact of Human Resource Development Practices of employee’s Performance in Textile Industry

–Annu Rani

229 – 235

30 A study on Digital Marketing –Annu Rani

236 – 242

31 Various Methods Used In Proteiomic Study of Tinospora cordifolia : A Case Study in Agra, Etah, Firozabad and Mathura Districts –Dr. Yugal Pratap Singh

243 – 245

Editorial Board

Editor in Chief Prof. Sugam Anand

Head, Deptt. of History & Culture, Dr. B.R. Ambedkar University, Agra

Editor Dr. Anil Kumar Verma

Associate Prof., Deptt. of History & Culture,

Dr. B.R. Ambedkar University, Agra

Managing Editor Dr. Jai P. Sharma

Former, Director Anand Bhawan Allahabad, Faculty Member, Deptt. of

History & Culture, Dr. B.R. Ambedkar University, Agra

Sub-Editors

Dr. Anil Kumar Gautam Asstt. Prof. (History)

Govt. P.G. College, Jalesar, Etah

Dr. Hema Pathak Senior Lecturer,

Deptt. of History & Culture, Dr. B.R. Ambedkar University, Agra

Distinguished Members of Editorial Board 1. Dr. Manoj Kumar Rawat

Principal, Agra College, Agra

2. Dr. Anoop Kale

University of Sydney, Australia

3. Dr. Kavita Vachak Navee

DAVSS, United States of America

4. Prof. Subhash Chandra Sharma

Deptt. of Law M.L.B. Collage of Excellence, Gwalior

5. Prof. Shatrughna Prasad Yadav Deptt. of E.E.E., Indus Institute of Technology and Engineering, Indus University,

Ahmedabad

6. Dr. Vibhuti Jain Associate Prof., Deptt. of History & Culture, Dr. B.R. Ambedkar University, Agra

7. Dr. V.P. Singh

Assistant Professor Hindi, Govt. P.G. College, Jalesar, Etah

8. Dr. Bharati Sagar

Sr. Asstt. Prof. & Head Dept.of Sociology, R.C.A. Girls’ (P.G) College, Mathura

9. Dr. Akhilesh Chandra Saxena

Head, Department of Physical Edu., Dr. B.R. Ambedkar University, Agra

10. Dr. Vibha

Asstt. Prof. Sociology, Govt. P.G. College, Jalesar, Etah

11. Dr. Niharika Tiwari Asstt. Prof. Political Science, Govt. P.G. College, Jalesar, Etah

12. Dr. Ranjay Kumar Singh

MCA, Ph.D. in Computer Science, Baroda

13. Dr. Vijay Singh Chaudhary Asstt. Prof. Physical Education, Govt. P.G. College, Jalesar, Etah

14. Dr. Sanjeev Kumar

Asstt. Prof. Physical Education, Govt. Girls P.G. College, Sirsaganj, Firozabad

15. Dr. Anita Asstt. Prof. Political Science, Govt. Girls P.G. College, Sirsaganj, Firozabad

16. Dr. Manish Patel

Asstt. Prof. Sociology, Govt. Girls P.G. College, Sirsaganj, Firozabad

17. Dr. Jay Kiran Associate Prof. Sociology, Govt. P.G. College, Chharra, Aligarh

18. Dr. Yugal Pratap Singh 19. Dr. Pravendra Kumar Sharma

.

Research & Review : An International Research Journal of Humanities And Sciences

Volume :003, No. 002 December 2016 ISSN-2349-4301

[1]

An Empirical Study of Status and Opportunity of Tourism Business at Ayodhya

Ms. Pragya Research Scholar IGNOU, New Delhi Email: [email protected]

Dr. Lavkush Mishra Director

Institute of Tourism & Hotel Management Dr. B.R.Ambedkar University, Agra (UP) 282002,

India Email: [email protected]

Abstract With large number of Indian tourists travelling for ‘’religious tourism‟, the

industry and academia has begun to turn its attention towards studying and analyzing

the issues related to its sustainability. The interest in the domestic religious tourism in

India is one aspect of this phenomenon which covers two kinds of domestic travelers:

those who travel specifically for religious purposes such as a pilgrimage and those who

travel for other purposes but include visits to religious sites as part of their tour. Many

destinations in India , such as Ayodhya, Allahabad and Mathura are already grappling

with issues related to the sustainable development of religious tourism such as the

measurement and the administration of the flow of tourists during events, the

preservation and environmental management of religious and cultural monuments, as

well as health, safety and security of the tourists themselves. Thousands of tourists

throng various temples all round the year. As the religious tourism industry grows in

Ayodhya, Allahabad, and Mathura there is a greater need for the city to incorporate

sustainable environmental practices in its day to day activities. This paper examines

Ayodhya as a religious tourist destination can benefit from sustainable environmental

practices. In-depth interviews were conducted with a convenience sample of tourists,

administrators and local government officials at Ayodhya to solicit their views on

sustainable environmental practices being implemented in the city. This paper explains

and supports the idea that the economic impacts of religious tourism should not be

neglected or underestimated, although religious institutions have traditionally attempted

to downplay this in the past.

Key Word:- Preservation, Environmental, Security, Administration, Practices etc.



[2]

Introduction Tourism as a business is getting popularity in all across the world. Many

countries are focusing on tourism because they are future oriented with actual social

and economic dynamics of the destination. Travel and tourism is the fastest growing

industry in India. Tourism is a growing market and is showing terrific growth in the

current scenario. Tourism makes a massive contribution to local economies through job

creation and sustainable development. Tourism in Ayodhya is one of the most

important sectors of the economy. Being the largest service industry, tourism is a

significant contributor to the state GDP, earns foreign exchange for the country,

provides universal employment, yields tax revenue etc. Ayodhya has huge potential for

Pilgrimage tourism. Therefore, it attracts large number of pilgrims from various parts of

India. Pilgrimage tourism thus provides an extra boost to the state’s economy.

Ayodhya circuit covers a distance of approximately 206km with Lucknow as an

entry/exit point. The circuit is well connected by National and State highways. It can be

covered in duration of two days. Lucknow has good rail and air connectivity with all

parts of the country. Hindus believe the birthplace of Rama to be in Ayodhya at the

place called Ram Janmabhoomi, the site of the demolished Babri Mosque.

Ayodhya is also the birthplace of five Tirthankars, including the

first Tirthankar of Jainism, Shri Rishabh Dev. He is known as the father of Jain

religion. The city is also important in the history and heritage of Buddhism in India,

with several Buddhist temples, monuments and centers of learning having been

established here during the age of the Mauryan Empire and the Gupta Dynasty.

Ayodhya reached its glorious peak as known to history during the reign of the Guptas

over India.

Swaminarayan led the Swaminarayan Sampraday sect of Hinduism and lived

here during his childhood years. It was from Ayodhya that Swaminarayan started his

seven-year journey across India as Neelkanth.

Tulsidas is said to have begun the writing of his famous Ramayana poem

Shri Ramacharitamanas in Ayodhya in 1574 CE. Several Tamil Alwar mention the city

of Ayodhya. Ayodhya is also said to be the birthplace of Bhahubali, Brahmi, Sundari,

King Dasaratha, Acharya Padaliptasurisvarji, King Harishchandra, Shri Rama

, Achalbhrata, and the ninthGandhara of Mahavir Swami.



[3]

The Atharva Veda called Ayodhya "a city built by gods and being as prosperous

as paradise itself".

Objectives of the study The objectives of the present study are: empirical

1. To study and evaluate the tourist circuits/destinations in Uttar Pradesh.

2. To analyse the potential and carrying capacity of the identified tourist

circuits/destinations.

3. Assess the existing commercial study – basic and tourism related - for the

circuits/destinations.

4. To assess the interventions for improving the quantity and quality of basic and

tourism commercial for circuits/destinations.

5. Identify commercial and infrastructural projects to be initiated by

Centre/State/Private sector.

Research Methodology The present study is based on survey. The data for this study was collected from

the host population engaged in pilgrimage tourism activities in the religious site of

Ayodhya. Pilgrimage tourists were identified as playing a key role in developing

pilgrimage tourism among local communities. Primary data collected from (200)

samples (questionnaire) collected from this place. As the study investigates into the rise

and growth of pilgrimage tourism in Ayodhya. Historical method is applied to collect

Primary and Secondary sources from various repositories. The research approach takes

the paper through empirical literature review which follows Government

Publications/Records in State Central Library- Census Reports, District Gazetteers,

State Tourism Department Statistical Report, periodicals, Press Reports on Ayodhya

district Temples, which are covered by UP Tourism Publication was consulted for

this study. This research is mainly based on secondary data derived from sources such

as government publications, PR Department, brochures, Internet; etc. The data for this

study were collected from local residents which engaged in pilgrimage tourism

activities. Pilgrimage tourists were identified as a key factor in developing pilgrimage

tourism in local communities. This research is mainly based on secondary data. The

sample for the preset study consists of the tourists visiting Uttar Pradesh. The process

of selecting the sample evolves multistage in nature. At the first stage, district namely;



[4]

Ayodhya have been selected with the help of convenience sample. At the second stage,

9 tourism spots have been selected from this district. For collecting the data, a

questionnaire was prepared and administered to the tourists. Some certain information

was gathered through observation. Consistent with the objectives of the study different

techniques like simple percentage methods, bar diagrams and averages have been used

for the analysis of data.

Discussion Town-wise Carrying Capacity Assessment

The table given below shows the Carrying Capacity of the tourist destinations

covered under the Ayodhya circuit.

Up gradation of tourist infrastructure, solid waste management and drinking

water facilities are required in all these religious spots :-

A. Lack of direction signage in the city to reach various tourist spot

B. Up gradation of approach road and crowd management measures is required in

all the destinations

C. Lack of public conveniences near these destinations

D. Need renovation and conservation measures in these religious spots

E. Up gradation of parking areas is required in all the religious spots

Ayodhya Circuit - Project Identification, Block Cost Estimates,

Implementation Agencies and Funding

Destinations Project Indicative Cost (Rs.

Cr.)

Implementing Agency

Mode of Funding

Existing Schemes

Ram ki Paidi Up gradation of Parking

(50 cars ) 0.87 PWD Public UIDSSMT

Light and Night

Illumination

0.6 Uttar Pradesh Jal

Nigam Public PIDDC

Solid Waste Management 0.3 Uttar Pradesh Jal

Nigam Public UIDSSMT

Drinking Water Facility 0.3

Uttar Pradesh Jal Nigam

Public UIDSSMT

Up gradation of Public Conveniences

0.3 Uttar Pradesh Jal

Nigam Public UIDSSMT

Revitalization of Pond

0.75 Uttar Pradesh Jal Nigam

Public PIDDC



[5]

Information and Directional Signage 0.3 Uttar Pradesh Jal

Nigam Public

PIDDC Kiosks and Restaurants 0.6 Uttar Pradesh Jal

Nigam PPP PIDDC

Landscaping 0.5 Uttar Pradesh Jal Nigam

Public PIDDC

Redevelopment of Ghats 1.5 Uttar Pradesh Jal

Nigam Public PIDDC

Shading and benches 0.08 Uttar Pradesh Jal Nigam Public PIDDC

Changing Rooms (35) 0.1 Uttar Pradesh Jal Nigam Public UIDSSMT

Crowd, Security and Disaster management.

(Security barriers, Watchtowers, Public

address system, proper signage’s markings and

signages)

0.25 Ayodhya Police

Department

Public

PIDDC

Tourist Information Centre 0.1 UPSTDC Public PIDDC

Parking (50 Cars) 0.87 PWD Public UIDSSMT

Light and Sound Show 2 UPSTDC PPP PIDDC

Revitalization of façade at Raam-ki-Paidi (0.6

km)

1 UPSTDC PPP PIDDC

Laxman Ghat

Redevelopment of Ghats

0.75 PWD

Shading and benches 0.05 UPSTDC Changing Rooms (20) 0.06 UPSTDC Crowd, Security and

Disaster management. (Security barriers, Watchtowers, Public address system, proper signage’s markings and signages)

0.15

Ayodhya Police Department

Solid Waste Management

0.2

UPSTDC

Drinking Water Facility

0.2

UPSTDC

Public Conveniences

0.2

UPSTDC

Boating Facilities

0.27

UPSTDC

Street lighting (solar lighting with backup) of Ghats

0.35

P.W.D



[6]

Destination Project

Indicative Cost(Rs. Cr.)

Implementing Agency

Mode of Funding

Existing Schemes

Ram Janam Bhumi


0.2

PWD

Public

UIDSSMT

Drinking Water Facility

0.2

PWD

Public

UIDSSMT


0.2

PWD

Public

UIDSSMT

Signage’s

0.25

UPSTDC

Public

PIDDC

Hanuman Garhi

Solid

0.2

UPSTDC Public Management

UIDSSMT

Drinking water

0.2

UIDSSMT Public Management

UIDSSMT

Signages 0.2 UIDSSMT Parking (20 Cars) 0.2 Upgradation of

Public Conveniences

0.2

Fire Safety (Installation of firefighting equipment and display of emergency exit routes

0.25

Light and Night Illumination

0.5

Crowd, Security and Disaster management. (Security barriers, Watchtowers, Public address system, proper signages markings and signages)

0.35



[7]

Destination Project

Indicative Cost(Rs. Cr.)

Implementing Agency

Mode of Funding

Existing Schemes

Kanak Bhawan

Solid

0.2 UPSTDC

Public

UIDSSMT

Drinking water

0.2 UPSTDC

Public

UIDSSMT

Signages

0.2 UPSTDC

Public

PIDDC

Parking(20 Cars)

0.2 UPSTDC

Public

UIDSSMT


0.25

Ayodhya Police

Department

Public

PIDDC

Fire Safety (Installation of fire fighting equipment and display of emergency exit routes)

0.15 Ayodhya Fire Department

Public

PIDDC

Destination Project

Indicative Cost (Rs. Cr.)

Implementing Agency

Mode of Funding

Existing Schemes

Guptaar Ghat


0.2

UPSTDC

Public UIDSSMT

Up gradation of Drinking Water Facility

0.3

UPSTDC

Public UIDSSMT



[8]

Up gradation of

Public Conveniences

0.2

UPSTDC

Public UIDSSMT


0.25

Ayodhya Fire Department

Public PIDDC

Boating Facilities

2 UPSTDC

PPP PIDDC

Street lighting (solar lighting with backup) of Ghats

0.4

PWD

Public PIDDC

Redevelopment of Ghat

1

PWD

Public PIDDC

Destination Project


Implementing Agency

Mode of Funding

Existing Schemes

Tretake Thakur


0.2 UPSTDC

Public

UIDSSMT


0.2 UPSTDC

Public

UIDSSMT

Up gradation of Drinking Water Facility

0.2 UPSTDC

Public

PIDDC

Light and Night 0.35 UPSTDC

Public

UIDSSMT

Crowd, Security 0.35 Ayodhya Public PIDDC



[9]

and Disaster management. (Security barriers, Watchtowers, Public address system, proper signages markings and signages)

Police Department



Public

PIDDC

Destination Project


Implementing Agency

Mode of Funding

Existing Schemes

Nageshwernath Temple


0.2 Temple Trust Public UIDSSMT


0.2 Temple Trust

Public

UIDSSMT

Light and Night

0.35 Temple Trust

Public

UIDSSMT


0.35

Ayodhya Police Department

Public

PIDDC

Fire Safety (Installation of fire fighting equipment and display of


Public

PIDDC



[10]

emergency exit routes)

Destination Project


Implementing Agency

Mode of Funding

Existing Schemes

Nawabganj Bird Sanctuary

Eco- Friendly low sound vehicles for jungle safari with allied facilities(5)

8.3

UPSTDC

PPP

PIDDC

Watch tower(4)

0.97

UPSTDC

Public

PIDDC

Tented Accommodation (15)

0.5

UPSTDC

PPP PIDDC

Eco Tourism Resort (10 Rooms

16.11

UPSTDC

PPP PIDDC

Eco Tourism Resort (10 Rooms

16.11

UPSTDC

Public

PIDDC


0.2

UPSTDC

Public

UIDSSMT

Upgradation of Public Conveniences

0.2

UPSTDC

Public

UIDSSMT

Upgradation of Drinking Water Facility

0.2

UPSTDC

Public

UIDSSMT

Signages

0.3 UPSTDC

Public

UIDSSMT

A. Proposed Breakup of Investments: 75.89

B. Public Sector : 39.14 Crores



[11]

C. Public Private Partnership : 36.75 Crores

Ayodhya Circuit - PPP Projects Bifurcation – Details of Public Funds and Private Investments

Ayodhya Circuit - PPP Bifurcation – Details of public Funds and Private Investments Destination Project


Govt Funding

Private Investment

Ram ki Paidi

Kiosks and Restaurants

0.6

0.15 0.45

Parking (50 Cars)

0.87 0.22 0.65

Light and Sound Show

2 0.50 1.50

Laxman Ghat Boating Facilities 0.27 0.07 0.20

Hanuman

Garhi

Parking (20 Cars)

0.35 0.09 0.26

Guptaar Ghat Boating Facilities 2 0.50 1.50

Nawabganj

Bird

Sanctuary

Eco- Friendly low

sound vehicles for

jungle safari with

allied facilities(5)

8.3 2.08 6.23

Tented

Accommodation

(15)

0.5 0.13 0.38

Eco Tourism

Resort (10

Rooms)

16.11 4.03 12.38

Total 36.75 9.19 27.56

Within the Public Private Partnership projects in the Ayodhya circuit, Rs. 9.19

Crores can be facilitated from public funds and Rs.27.56 Crores from private

investments.



[12]

Ayodhya Circuit - Estimated Employment Generation The proposed investments at the tourist destinations and the circuits are

expected to generate employment the figures of which have been estimated on a

District level because of the direct and indirect nature of employment generation from

these investments. To estimate the number of employment generated an investment

multiplier of 78 jobs per million investments is taken.

Destination Amount Invested Employment Generated

Ayodhya 25.84 20157

Ayodhya is a city of temples about 134 kms from Lucknow. Additionally it

represents contrasting architecture with Faizabad as also the Hub of Lucknow, hence

mutually reinforcing the value of the core attractions of each location. 9.44 Ayodhya

can be effectively linked to the tourist circuit with the proposed Lucknow hub both for

religious and general-interest tourist segments (especially after the currently prevailing

political standoff/controversies are amicably resolved).

Infrastructure Projects Infrastructure projects benefit not only tourism but also the entire local regional

community where undertaken. In principle, the feasibility and option to participate

through structured BOT/BOOT and related models are already available, especially for

road and power projects—however actual implementation in these areas have been very

limited. This is despite a range of incentives being offered for “infrastructure status”

projects. However, it is expected that the government will play the lead role and may

have to continue to be the lead investor in these areas.

The above is the major driver and incentive for private sector participation in

the road and power project infrastructure activities. In this context, if the state

government deems that major industrial development is not feasible in a specific region

or belt and that tourism alone is expected to be the major driver, and hence the govt. is

in a position to offer or facilitate additional fiscal or financial incentives, private sector

participation could be enhanced.

Infrastructure also includes urban municipal services and is especially relevant in the

context of sewerage, sanitation and cleanliness. In the context of post-construction



[13]

maintenance of cleanliness, there are precedents for private participation. For example,

Chennai city has awarded on an experimental basis, garbage collection and disposal

activities to a corporate entity that has introduced modern mechanical methods for such

waste removal, compression and disposal.

Analytical Interpretation Data of Tourist Data was collected from tourist in Ayodhya on their opinions about the

development work that is presently going on at all these sites since these site have Ram

Janam bhoomi,Hanuman Garhi etc.

TABLE- INFORMATION TOTAL SAMPLE- 200

SL No. Information No. of Sample %

A Brochure/ Folder 60 30% B Word of Mouth 60 30% C Magazine 50 25% D Television 20 10% E News paper 10 5% - -

TABLE- TRANSPORT TOTAL SAMPLE- 200

SL No. Information No of Sample %

A Rail 70 35% B Road 100 50% C Nil 30 15%

Opinion Survey shows that out of 200 tourist 35% preferred to the rail because

Lucknow is to the direct link to the Faizabad. So Maximum 50% tourist pefered to the

road Transport.



[14]

TABLE- ACCOMODATION TOTAL SAMPLE- 200

SL No. Accommodation No of Sample %

A 5Star --- 0%

B 3 Star 60 30%

C Budget 50 25%

D Dharamshala 80 40%

- - 200 100

Above table shows that out sample size of 200 tourist 40 % have given to prefer

the Dharamshala. Such duration of stay depends upon two things first the specific

objective such as practices, research, of the visitor and seconds the facilities of

accommodation available in the areas.

0%

20%

40%

60%

80%

100%

NILROAD

RAIL

15% 50%35%

TRANSPORT

TRANSPORT



[15]

TABLE- Facilities and Services TOTAL SAMPLE- 200

SL No. Facilities and Services No. of Sample %

A Strongly Agree 30 15% B Agree 100 50% C Do not agree 70 35% - - 2000 100

50% Tourist agree that facilities and services around the Ayodhya are very good

because maximum development work has been completed through the local govt. while

35% do agree that facilities and services around the monument are not good because

parking facilities, ATM and Tourist Facilitation Centre, Information Centre work has

not fully completed due to fund delay.

0%

30%25%

40%

0%5%

10%15%20%25%30%35%40%45%

ACCOMODATION

ACCOMODATION



[16]

TABLE- Purpose of Visit TOTAL SAMPLE- 200

SL No. Purpose of Visit No of Sample %

A Pilgrimage 90 45%

B Recreation 20 10%

C Sightseeing 30 15%

E Social Religious function 60 30%

45% of the tourists were in fact interested in Ayodhya Ramjanambhoomi and

Hanuman Garhi that’s why they moved to get their holy bath over the land where the

river flow: pilgrimage purpose of the visitor the motivation for travel is the main

driving force that makes tourist move away from their home to destination where they

can get what they want. While30% tourist interested social religious function because

maximum monks participate in Ayodhya. 15% Tourist interested sightseeing around

this place.

15%

50%

35%

FACILITIES & SERVICES

STRONGLY AGREE

AGREE

NOT AGREE



[17]

TABLE- Maintained

TOTAL SAMPLE- 200

SL No. Maintained No of Sample %

A Ramjanam Bhoomi 50 25%

B Hanuman Garhi 90 45%

C Kanak Bhavan 60 30%

- - 200 100%

45% responded said that Hanuman Garhi is the best maintained because A.S.I,

NGO, and Ayodhya Society is projecting and Maintain the site while 45% tourist.

0%5%

10%15%20%25%30%35%40%45%

45%

10% 15%

30%

PURPOSE OF VISIT

FACILITIES & SERVICES



[18]

TABLE- DEVELOPED TOTAL SAMPLE- 200

SL No. DEVELOPED No. of Sample %

A Ramjanam Bhoomi 50 25%

B Hanuman Garhi 80 40%

C Kanakbhavan 70 35%

- - 200 100

25% of the tourist was of the opinion that Ramjanam Bhoomi is the proper

planning and Management while 40% tourist said that Hanuman Garhi is the proper

development and 70% Tourist felt that there were positive impacts of tourism because

Kanakbhavan is in proper development.

0%5%

10%15%20%25%30%35%40%45%

Ramjanam Bhoomi Hanuuman

Garhi Kanak Bhavan

25%

45%

30%

MAINTENED

MAINTENED



[19]

Tourism facilities and services Traditional areas dominated by the private sector include hotel/hospitality,

travel trade, local conveyance, amusement parks and facilities, cultural performances,

sports activities, handicrafts etc (some of these activities and facilities do have a

government presence, however the dominant player is the private sector. For example

handicrafts are also marketed through state government emporiums etc.).

The major incentive or rather requirement for the private sector: is (1) that basic

infrastructure (power, roads etc) be available (2) a range of cost-economic financial

services be available. In this context, the main existing special financing institution

catering to the tourism industry for promotion of tourism facilities is the Tourism

Finance Corporation of India (TFCI). In operations, TFCI has been focused primarily

on the hotels sector and additionally on investment requirements of Rs. 3 crores or

more.

If further incentives are envisaged for the private sector in these areas, the issue

in context is what kind of private sector? These can be major corporate or local

entrepreneurs. The latter would be local community members operating low cost

facilities or offering primarily services (Small wayside amenities, boating clubs, animal

rides, internet cafes, health club, yoga club etc.). They have fewer institutional funding

options for loans etc. This can be addressed, to a certain extent, if national and state

level agencies focused on the SSI sector (e.g.: NSIC, UPFC, PICCUP etc) are able to

give preferential loans /loans at attractive interest rates to small scale entrepreneurs

DEVELOPED0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

Ramjanam Bhoomi Hanuman

Garhi Kanakbhavan

25%

40%35%

DEVELOPED

DEVELOPED



[20]

providing facilities and services for the tourism sector. Presently, these agencies are

focused on SSI industry being defined in terms of factory units or requirement of

industrial manufacturing equipment and not service related entities. In a related

manner, agencies such as UPSIDC can assist entrepreneurs through the legalities of

obtaining or leasing property/land in a simplified manner Any incentives in regard to

the above, can be subject to guidelines of defined quality and safety standards of

providing services, cleanliness maintenance obligations, and can additionally be linked

to skill up gradation efforts of the borrowing SSI entrepreneurs.

Role of Private Sector Tourism has emerged as the largest export industry globally and all over the

globe private sector has played the lead role in this growth. The private sector has to

consider investment in tourism from a long term perspective and create the required

facilities including accommodation, time share, restaurants, entertainment facilities,

shopping complexes, etc. in areas identified for tourism development. Non-core

activities in all airports, major stations and interstate bus terminus such as cleanliness

and maintenance, luggage transportation, vehicles parking facilities, etc. should be

opened up to private operators to increase efficiency and profitability. The specific role

of the Private Sector will be to:-

i. Build and manage the required tourist facilities in all places of tourist interest.

ii. Assume collective responsibility for laying down industry standards, ethics and

fair practices.

iii. Ensure preservation and protection of tourist attractions and give lead in green

practices.

iv. Sponsor maintenance of monuments, museums and parks and provision of

public conveniences and facilities.

v. Involve the local community in tourism projects and ensure that the benefits of

tourism accrue to them in right measure.

vi. Undertake industry training and man-power development to achieve excellence

in quality of services.

vii. Participate in the preparation of investment guidelines and marketing strategies

and assist in database creation and research.

viii. Facilitate safety and security of tourists



[21]

ix . Endeavour to promote tourism on a sustained and long term perspective.

x. Collaborate with Govt. in the promotion and marketing of destinations.

Role of voluntary efforts Voluntary agencies and volunteers have to contribute their expertise and

understanding of local ethos to supplement the efforts of other sectors to provide the

human touch to tourism and foster local initiatives. All such efforts shall be

encouraged.

For the strong study and result,here we discuss the actual value of tourism and

tourist with their right accessibility:-

Tourist arrival in India----6.97 million in 2014

Tourist arrival in Uttar Pradesh in the year 2014

PLACES INDIAN FOREIGNER TOTAL

UTTAR PRADESH (STATE) 1828.20 32.11 1851.31(Lacs)

ALLAHABAD 49610741 134806 49745547

VANARAS 5469131 49618 5518749

MATHURA 7281948 39812 7321760

VRINDAVAN 4751211 21335 4772546

AYODHYA 15896369 16768 15913137

Here we generate the comparison of tourism with actual data Ayodhya is the

place of Rama birth and in India it has not own eminent like Lord Krishna.

SUGGESTIONS 1. Develop Ramayan museum.

2. Establish new circuit including various poets, philosophers, social motivators

during bhakti cult.

3. Focus on small circuit and pilgrim circuit.

4. Develop potential activities like adventure, etc..

5. Organize international event like :

i. Ramlila.

ii. Connected Culture with other state like Kerela and Tamil Nadu

(Rameshwaram).



[22]

6. Security of religious place and tourist improving connectivity to specific

tourism circuit to promote them.

CONCLUSION Along with many Indian native holidaymakers venturing regarding ‘’religious

tourism‟, the industry and academia features started to turn it is focus towards

understanding and inspecting the down sides linked to it is sustainability. The interest

within the domestic strict vacation in of India is actually taking care of in this sensation

that covers a couple of sorts of domestic individuals: people that journey specifically

for strict reasons for example a pilgrimage and people exactly who journey regarding

various other reasons although include visits to strict sites in their excursion. Quite a

few destinations in of India, for example Ayodhya, Allahabad and Mathura were

grappling with issues linked to this environmentally friendly advancement connected

with strict vacation like the way of measuring along with the management of the move

connected with holidaymakers during occasions, this preservation and environmentally

friendly supervision connected with strict and cultural typical monuments, as well as

health and fitness, security and safety of the holidaymakers independently. A huge

number of holidaymaker’s throng several temples complete the year. Because strict

vacation sector expands in Ayodhya, Allahabad, and Mathura you will find there's

increased need for the location to include environmentally friendly environmentally

friendly methods in it is day to day activities. This particular paper looks at Ayodhya

like a strict traveler destination can certainly gain from environmentally friendly

environmentally friendly methods. In-depth interview ended up conducted with a

comfort taste connected with holidaymakers, managers and town officials in Ayodhya

to solicit their opinions on environmentally friendly environmentally friendly methods

getting carried out within the city. This particular paper makes clear and facilitates the

theory the economic influences connected with strict vacation should not be forgotten

as well as underestimated, even though strict corporations include typically

experimented with downplay that during the past.



[23]

REFERENCES A. Asia Pacific Tourism Forecasts 2009–2011. Available at http://www.patastore.

com/products/Asia-Pacific-Tourism-Forecasts-2009percent252d20 11.html.

B. Banker, R. D., A. Charnes, and W. W. Cooper. 1984. “Some Models for Estimation

of Technical and Scale Inefficiencies in Data Envelopment Analysis.” Management

Science, 30 (9): 1078–92.

C. Blanke, Jennifer, and Thea Chiesa, eds. 2009. Travel & Tourism Competitiveness

Report 2009: Managing in a Time of Turbulence. Geneva: World Economic Forum.

D. Boyd, S. W., and D. J. 2001. Timothy. “Developing Partnerships: Tools for

Interpretation and Management of World Heritage Sites.” Tourism Recreation

Research 26 (1): 47– 53.

E. Bramwell, B., and B. Lane. 1999. “Collaboration and Partnerships for Sustainable

Tourism.” Journal of Sustainable Tourism 7 (1): 1–5.



[24]

MSME in India-An Overview

Dr. Megha Jain1

Assistant Professor V.Manogna2

Student T Y BAF KBP College Vashi, Navi Mumbai

ABSTRACT:

Micro and Small Enterprises (MSE’s) have been widely accepted as being vital

to the Indian economy given their role in job creation and their ability to foster

entrepreneurship.

The present paper is an attempt to focus the challenges, the sector is facing, a

growth pattern in the preceeding years , the Key steps taken by the government to

strengthen the MSME sector and its impact and the role of SMEs in the growth of

exports of the country.

Key Words: MSME in India, Indian economy, Strengthen, Challenges,

Introduction:

The manifest capacity of Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises (MSMEs)

around the world for driving economic growth and development at regional, national

and global levels cannot be overemphasized. As India gears up to retrace the high

growth path, the MSME sector assumes a pivotal role in driving the growth engine. The

MSME sector in India continues to demonstrate remarkable resilience in the face of

trialing global and domestic economic circumstances. India’s MSME sector has

recorded more than 10 per cent growth in recent years despite the economic slowdown.

MSMEs contribute nearly eight per cent to the national GDP, employing over eight

crore people in nearly four crore enterprises and accounting for 45 per cent of

manufactured output and 40 per cent of exports from India. Thus, the focus of the

government on MSMEs at this juncture is justified given their potential for providing

growth and employment.

Objectives:

The objective of the present article is to focus on:



[25]

1. The challenges or the hurdles to the MSME sector

2. The growth and performance of MSMEs.

3. The various initiatives taken by the Government to strengthen the MSME sector

and its impact.

4. The contribution of SMEs in the growth of exports of the country.

Research Methodology:

The proposed study is descriptive in nature and only secondary data has been

used in it. The secondary data consists of the information and data collected through

various articles, research papers and web-sites etc.

Challenges to MSME:

Despite of the importance of the MSMEs in Indian economic growth, the sector

is facing challenges and does not get the required support from the concerned

Government Departments, Banks, Financial Institutions and Corporates which is

proving to be a hurdle in the growth path of the MSMEs. The list of the problems that

are faced by existing/new companies in SME sector are as under:

1. Absence of adequate and timely banking finance.

2. Limited capital and knowledge.

3. Non availability of suitable technology.

4. Low production capacity.

5. Ineffective marketing strategy.

6. Constraints on modernization and expansion.

7. Non availability of skilled labour at affordable cost.

8. Follow up with various government agencies to resolve problems due to lack of

man power and knowledge etc.

GROWTH AND PERFORMANCE OF MICRO, SMALL AND MEDIUM

ENTERPRISES (MSMEs):

Performance of Micro, Small & Medium Enterprises (MSME) Sector in the

country is assessed mainly:

a. By conducting of periodic All India Census of the Sector.



[26]

b. By collecting the number of Entrepreneur Memorandum Part-II (EM-II) filled at

DICs. (Replaced with Udyog Aadhaar online filing system since September,

2015).

AN OVERVIEW OF THE GROWTH IN REGISTERED SECTOR AS PER DATASET ON ENTREPRENEURMEMORANDUM (PART-II) 2007-08 TO 2014-15:

1. TRENDS IN MSME GROWTH (Filing of EM-II) DURING 2007-08 to

2014-15

MSME has shown consistent growth in terms of number of EM-II filed 2007-08

with the District Industries Centres across the country was 1.73 lakh which increased to

1.93, 2.13, 2.38, 2.82, 3.23, 3.63 and 4.25 lakh during 2008-09, 2009-10, 2010-11,

2011-12, 2012-13, 2013-14 & 2014-15 respectively. (Chart-1)

Chart 1: Number of EM-II filed by MSME during 2007-08 to 2014-15

2. ANNUAL GROWTH RATE ON PRECEDING YEARS(2007-08 TO 2014-

15)

MSME has shown constant growth rate around 11% every year till 2010-11.

The highest growth in recent time was recorded during 2011-12 (18.45%) whereas



[27]

during year 2012-13and 2013-14 growth rate was around 14% and 12%, respectively.

But it jumped to 17% in2014-15. However, recent data for 2015 i.e., from April-

September, 2015 shown impressive growth of 18.74% (year-on-year growth) (Chart

1.1).

CHART 1.1: ANNUAL GROWTH RATE ON PRECEDING YEARS

SUPPORTIVE ROLE OF GOVERNMENT:

Recognizing the potential of this sector for the nation’s development, the

Government of India, through its various agencies, has taken many key steps to

strengthen the MSME sector and promote innovation and capacity building in this

sector. Regular dialogue is facilitated between various stakeholders through the

constitution of specific task forces and inter-ministerial committees. The Micro and

Small Enterprises-Cluster Development Programme is being implemented by the

government for the holistic and integrated development of these enterprises in clusters

through soft interventions, hard interventions and infrastructure upgradation for

enhancing their productivity and competitiveness. During the year 2014-15, 43 new

clusters have been taken up for various interventions. So far, around 966 clusters and

171 infrastructure development programmes have been initiated by the government.



[28]

NEW INITIATIVES: ASPIRE SCHEME LAUNCHED TO PROMOTE RURAL

ENTREPRENEURSHIP:

During the year 2015, Ministry of MSME launched various initiatives to

improve the ease of doing business and to make Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises

more globally competitive. These initiatives include ease of registration of the business

in the form of Udyog Aadhar Memorandum, Framework to revive sick MSMEs,

promoting innovation in rural entrepreneurship through ASPIRE scheme, fund for

regenerating traditional industries, financial support in the form of credit guarantee and

credit linked capital subsidy. Some of the programmes launched during the year

include:

Udyog Aadhaar Memorandum (UAM)

The Ministry in September-2015 under the MSME Development Act, 2006 has

notified that every MSME unit shall file Udyog Aadhaar Memorandum (UAM). This

is a path breaking step to promote ease-of-doing-business for MSMEs in India as the

UAM replaces the filing of Entrepreneurs’ Memorandum (EM part-I & II) with the

respective States/UTs. While some of the States/UTs had made the process online,

either by themselves or through the portal created by this Ministry, several States/ UTs

were still relying on the manual way of filing EM.

Framework for Revival and Rehabilitation of MSMEs

The most recent Doing Business (DB) Report ranks India 137 out of the 189

economies for resolving insolvencies. It notes that resolving insolvency takes 4.3 years

on average and costs 9.0% of the debtor’s estate, with the most likely outcome being

that the company will be sold as piecemeal sale.

Pending a detailed revision of the legal framework for resolving

insolvency/bankruptcy, there was a felt need for special dispensation for revival and

exit of MSMEs. The MSMEs facing insolvency/bankruptcy need to be provided legal

opportunities to revive their units. This could be through a scheme for re-organization

and rehabilitation, which balances the interests of the creditors and debtors. A

Framework for Revival and Rehabilitation of MSMEs has thus been notified in May-

2015 under section 9 of the Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises Development Act,

2006



[29]

Prime Minister’s Employment Generation Programme (PMEGP)

PMEGP is the flagship programme of the government offering credit linked

subsidy to establish new enterprises for generating continuous and sustainable

employment opportunities in Rural and Urban areas of the country.

1. Rs. 860.51 crore has been released by the Ministry as margin money under

PMEGP out of which Rs. 528.32 crore has already been disbursed by the banks.

2. 24126 new enterprises providing employment to 170983 persons have been

benefited under the Scheme.

3. There is more than 50% increase over the previous year in terms of funds

disbursed by the banks, no of projects with funds disbursed and the employment

generated.

A Scheme for Promotion of Innovation, Rural Industry and Entrepreneurship

(ASPIRE)

ASPIRE has been launched on 16.03.2015 with an objective to set up a network

of technology centers, incubation centres to accelerate entrepreneurship and also to

promote start-ups for innovation and entrepreneurship in rural and agriculture based

industry with a fund of Rs.210 crores.

Scheme of Fund for Regeneration of Traditional Industries (SFURTI)

The objectives SFURTI is to organize the traditional industries and artisans into

clusters to make them competitive and provide support for their long term sustainability

by way of enhancing the marketability of products, improving the skills of artisans,

making provision for common facilities and strengthening the cluster governance

systems.

1. The Scheme guidelines of SFURTI have been revamped in 2015 and the

Scheme has taken giant strides in 2015. Funds to the tune of Rs.62 Crore have

been sanctioned under the Scheme in 2015 as against Nil in 2014.

2. 68 clusters have already been approved in 2015 itself against the target of 71

clusters during 12th Plan period with more than a year of the plan period to

spare.

Lean Manufacturing Competitiveness Scheme (LMCS)

The Objective of the Scheme is to enhance the manufacturing competitiveness

of MSMEs through application of various Lean Manufacturing Techniques (e.g. Total



[30]

Productive Maintenance (TPM), 5S, Visual control, Standard Operation Procedures,

Single Minutes Exchange of Dies or Quick Changeover (SMED), Value Stream

Mapping, Just in Time, Kanban System, Kaizen, Cellular Layout, Poka Yoke).

1. 188 New Clusters identified and selected for LM (Lean manufacturing)

interventions.

2. Lean manufacturing Interventions have been initiated in 359 Units.

3. Organised 63 Awareness Programmes across the country.

Credit Guarantee Trust Fust for Micro and CGTMSE Scheme

CGTMSE was set up to strengthen credit delivery system and facilitate flow of

credit to the MSE sector. The Credit Guarantee under CGTMSE seeks to reassure the

lender that, in the event of a MSE unit, which availed collateral free credit facilities,

fails to discharge its liabilities to the lender; the CGMSE would make good the loss

incurred by the lender up to 85 per cent of the credit facility.

During the current financial year (April to October 2015), total number of

proposals approved under the scheme was 2,31,774 involving a guarantee

amount of Rs.11,446 crore.

Credit Linked Capital Subsidy Scheme (CLCSS) for Technology Upgradation

CLCSS aims at facilitating technology upgradation of Micro and Small

Enterprises (MSEs) by providing 15% capital subsidy (limited to maximum Rs.15

lakhs) for purchase of Plant & Machinery. Maximum limit of eligible loan for

calculation of subsidy under the scheme is Rs.100 lakhs. Presently, more than 1500

well established/improved technologies under 51 sub-sectors have been approved under

the Scheme.

During the current financial year (April to October 2015), 1,195 units

benefitted and total subsidy released to the tune of Rs. 75.57 crore.

SMEs AND EXPORT:

According to Dr. H.P. Kumar, CMD, NSIC, "India's SME sector has the

potential of becoming an important sourcing base for MNCs. But, this requires a

national strategy for the promotion of exports from this sector, including greater

coordination among different wings of the government, identification of sub-sectors

with high export potential and adequate infrastructural support."



[31]

"It is true that SME accounts 35% of country's total exports. However, exports

from the SME sector are just 10% of its total output, which is meagre compared to

figures in other competing countries. There is also a lack of diversification in the SME

export basket, with just five items garments, leather goods, basic chemicals, marine and

processed foods and engineering products forming 3/4 of the total exports from the

sector.

Undoubtedly, the SMEs, need international exposure and outlook, which is

vital for successful market penetration in global markets. A flexible combination of

government policies and market freedom, together with a mix of macro and micro

policies are necessary for the creation of vibrant and dynamic SMEs in the export

sector.

CONCLUSION:

Unhesitatingly, the SME sector is being termed as the backbone of the Indian

economy. This sector accounts for 95% of the industrial units, is contributing around

40% of the value addition in the manufacturing sector, offers nearly 80% of the

manufacturing employment and enjoys around 35% of exports. Over 32 lakhs units are

spread over the country, producing about 7,500 items and providing jobs to more than

178 lakh persons.

To counter the challenges faced by SMEs sector and grab the opportunities in

the market, Various initiatives has been taken by the government.It is very important

to empower the SME sector to utilize the limited resources (human & economic) they

have in an optimum manner. The SMEs need to be educated and informed of the latest

developments taking place globally and helped to acquire skills necessary to keep pace

with the global developments.

REFERENCES:

1. MSME Sector: Epitomizing Vitality-Make in India

www.makeinindia.com/article/-/v/nurturing-a-manufacturing-culture

2. Challenges to MSME, https://www.indiansmechamber.com

3. MSME Annual Report 2015-16, msme.gov.in

4. New initiatives of MSME Industry, Pib.nic.in



[32]

Crisis in Indian Agriculture

Dr. Shikha Singh Lecturer, Department of economics

Govt. P.G. College Chharra, Aligarh (UP)

Introduction :-

Agriculture in India is unique in its characteristics, where over 250 different

crops are cultivated in its varied agro climate region, unlike 25to30 crops grown in

many of the developed nation of the word.

India’s industrial and services are growing by leaps and bounds where growth

rate of agriculture is below 2%the fact remains that India still live in villages. Even

industrial and service sectors are invariably entangled with the fortunes of agriculture

due to various intricate forward and backward linkages:

Agriculture is not merely cultivation it is a social cultural phenomenon which

provides bedrock to the entire process of socio –economic development .Last few

decades have shown strong correlation between agricultural growth and with 65% of

population development for their livelihood on agriculture . Thus, the farmer represent

the backbone of India industry.

The quantum of research outlay for the farming sector is a meagre0.86%of the

GDP as against 23%in developed world. This is a general preception that unbearable

burden of debt and argumented competions from import are indicative of a crisis in

India agriculture. Both these phenomena are real; However suicides are intense mostly

in low rainfall, poorly irrigated regions and among a rather small portion of the

population .On this background, the present paper is an endecueour to analyses the

causes of crisis in Indian agriculture ,its effect and conclusion .

Causes of crisis in Indian agriculture

Agriculture is pacing a serious crisis in our Indian economy at present time.

Multiple factors are responsible for the present agriculture is from quite a long period.

Agriculture is the period on which whole economy of India revolves.

The root cause of the crisis is the income deficit of the sector this may sound

too simple, or even simplistic, put most seemingly complex situations do have a simple



[33]

causation at their core . Import of wheat by government in the era when there is a talk

about green revolution in the country, high prices of vegetables and pulses, stagnation

in while ,blue and yellow revolution setbacks caused by avian influenza to poultry

farmers ,inability of peasants and farmers to withstand the competition from globalize

market, unmistakably show the state of India or agriculture . The problem of income

deficit crisis from three basic causes, first, adverse terms of trade(which means farmers

pay more in real exchanges turns for the goods and services they buy than wheat they

get for those that they sell ); second, low productivity of resources engaged in

agriculture , and third and possibly most important, the disproportionately large

dependence of population on agriculture for its livelihood.

OCED in its 2007 agriculture policy monitoring report notes that Indian

agriculture is dominated by a large number of small scales holding that are

predominantly owner occupied. The average size of holdings in the late nineties was

about 1.4hectares and continues to decline as farms are usually divided on inheritance.

The share of medium to large forms (about 4hectares)is very small at just over7%of all

holding , but these farms account for about 40%of the land . The implication is that

many of the very small farms are subsistence holding with low investment and little

productivity .Apart from these important causes observed are as follows:-

Low level of income of small farmers:- Over all there is not much

diversification and the income of an average farmers household from cultivation

would hardly suffice to meet some basic day -to-day requirements .

Declining growth in agriculture:-The slowing down of agricultural growth is

widely attributed to the slowing down of investment, especially pubic

investment.

Reduced in agriculture subsidies:-Cutback in subsidy and control of fertilizers

over the last few years has adversely affected the agriculture sector. It has

increased the input cost and made agriculture less profitable.

Comparison of country regarding subsidies to agriculture –



[34]

Country Subsidy per Hectare

%of population depending on agriculture

USA

Japan

China

India

$ 32

$35

$30

$14

5

4

24

59

Source WTO report

Decline in government investment in the agricultural sector:- Studied show that

after the economic reforms stauted, the government expenditure and investment

in the agricultural sector have been drastically reduced. This is based on the

policy of minimum intervention by the government due to policy of

globalization. When the economic reforms stauted, the annual rate of irrigate

and was2.62% later it got reduced came down and the agricultural growth was

also reduced.

Effects of crisis of Indian agriculture

Agriculture is the most important sector of the Indian economy from the

prospective of poverty alleriation and employment generation. But today it is poised at

a crossroad with distress looming large and farmers net income nearly stagnated.

There has been a loss of dynamism (state of the economy: economy

survey,2008). The growth rate of food and non food crops have fallen remarkably.

Farmer’s today is surely at disadvantage position both as consumer as well as producer.

All these inflicted a tering effect on the real net income of the farmer, which stagnated

over the last decade and at the same time the consumer price indices are rising at faster

rate .As a result immiseration in the farm sector is increasing.

The economic contribution of agriculture to India’s GDP is steadily declining

with the country’s broad-base economic growth .Still, agriculture is demographically

the broadest economic sector and plays a significant role in the overall socio-economic

fabric of India. Despite these recent accomplishments, agriculture in India has the

potential for major productivity and total output grains, because crop yield in India are

still just 30%to60% of best sustainable crop yields achievable in the farms of

developed as well as other developing countries . Additionally, losses after harvest due

to poor infrastructure and unorganized retail causes India to experience some of the



[35]

highest food losses in the world. During 1996-97to2005-06, growth rates of “total

cropped area, net sown area and electricity consumed in agriculture” became negative

which is the cause of concern and need quick attention.

A comparison of indices of agriculture and non-agriculture sector also reveal a

clear cut picture that after reform initiation in economy , industrial sector jumped up

pushing back agriculture sector.

Result of the study reveal that in the last decade high growth rate of economy

and its non-agriculture part was on the cost of negligence of agriculture So, it has a

adverse affects on food supply , prices of food grain, cost of living, health and nutrition,

poverty, employment, labor market, land loss form agriculture and foreign exchange

earnings an economy.

Conclusion:-

We should do efforts to introduce new varieties of crop, better seed, the

production of powerful cattle breed, better implements construction of the

canals and consolidation of holding in some areas had changed the agriculture.

Concerted and focused efforts are required for addressing the challenge of

stagnating productivity levels in agriculture.

For the integrated development of the rural area there should be a investment in

agriculture and its allied sectors, including irrigation, transport, communication,

rural markets, rural infrastructure and farm research.

India should generate agricultural surplus to meet the domestic demand as well

as foreign requirements.

Indian agriculture must ensure sustainable and productive employment with

adequate income to the large number of household directly and indirectly on

this sector.

The agricultural sector must arrange safety to the vulnerable classes of farmers

who have been still leading a low level of living even more than sir decades of

independence the govt. should also take steps as may reduce the widening gulf

of disparities between regional farmers of northern western areas and eastern

and north eastern areas.

Reference:-

Agriculture crisis (2014) Government of India



[36]

Crisis of India, 2011

Indian economy survey, 2014-15

EGA1(2007): Report of the Expert Group on Agricultural Indebtedness, New

Delhi –

Government of India, Ministry of finance

Mishra’s (2007): “Agrarian scenario in post reform

India: a story of Distress, Despair

NABARD (2014-15):Annual Report

NCRB(2014) : Government of India.

NSSO 70th Round.

Patel, A. (2014): “Issues facing Agricultural credit in India” Agri. Business

Swaminathan M.S. (2015): “Farmer’s Suicide nobody’s case.” HANS India



[37]

Life history of Dayananda Saraswati’s and their contribution with regards to Educational Philosophy, Social and Political Ideas

Dr. Amit Kumar Sharma Lecturer in ITHM Khandari,

Agra

Abstract Dayanand Saraswati was born on (12 February 1824 – 30 October 1883) was

a Hindu religious leader and founder of the Arya Samaj, a Hindu reform movements of

the Vedic tradition. He was also a renowned scholar of the Vedic lore

and Sanskrit language. Dayanand is noted to have been active since he was 14, by this

time he was able to recite religious verses and teach about them. He is highly applauded

for taking parts in religious debates. His debates were attended by relatively high

amount of public. He was the first to give the call for Swaraj as "Indian for India" in

1876, a call later taken up by Lokmanya Tilak.

Swami Dayananda was a great educationist, social reformer and also a cultural

nationalist. He was a great soldier of light, a warrior in God’s world, a sculptor of men

and institution. Dayananda Saraswati’s greatest contribution was the foundation of

Arya Samaj which brought a revolution in the field of education and religion. The

philosophy of Dayananda Saraswati can be known from his three famous contributions

namely “Satyartha Prakash”, ”Veda Bhashya Bhumika” and “Veda Bhashya Bhumika”

and Veda Bhashya. Further the journal “Arya Patrika’ edited by him also reflects his

thought. Swami Dayanand the great founder of Arya Samaj occupies a unique position

in the history of political ideas of modern India.

Swami Dayanand, the greatest apostle of the indo-Aryan culture and civilization

also proved to be greatest exponent of the most advanced ideas in politics in India. He

was against idol worship, caste system, ritualism, fatalism, infanticide, sale of grooms

etc. he also stood for the liberation of women and upliftment of depressed class.

Keeping in mind the supremacy of Vedas and Hindus, he opposed Islam and

Christianity and advocated for Suddhi movement to reconvert the other sects to Hindu

order. Dayananda expressed political ideas too when described theory of state, forms of

Governments, three- cameral legislation, functions of Government, rule of Law etc.



[38]

Keywords: Dayananda, Sanskrit language, Sanskrit language, Veda Bhashya Bhumika,

Veda Bhashya, civilization.

Introduction:

Swami Dayananda was a great educationist, social reformer and also a cultural

nationalist. He was a great soldier of light, a warrior in God’s world, a sculptor of men

and institution. Dayananda Saraswati’s greatest contribution was the foundation of

Arya Samaj which brought a revolution in the field of education and religion. Swami

Dayananda Saraswati is one the most important reformers and spiritual forces India has

known in recent times. The dominant personality of Dayananda Saraswati had found

extraordinary reflection in the virility of the Arya Samaj movement, and in almost

every one of its adherents. The contribution of Arya Samaj in the field of education is

commendable. According to Dr. S. Radhakrishna, “among the markers of modern India

who had played an important role in the spiritual uplift of people and kindled the fire of

patriotism, in me, among them Swami Dayananda has occupied the chief place.”

Life Sketch: Dayananda was born in an orthodox Brahman family at Tankara

in the Morvi state in Kathiawar in 1824. The name of his father was Karsamji Tiwari

who served as a priest in a Shiva temple. The childhood name of Dayananda was

Mulasi Dayaram or Mulasankar. Under the loving care of his father Dayananda had

acquired proficiency in Veda, Sanskrit grammar and Sanskrit language from childhood.

Like Gautama became Buddha after witnessing four ordinary scenes of life,

Dayananda’s life style changed after a single incident. When he was fourteen years of

age he kept fast on the Shivaratri day with the other members of the family. At night

other members of the family after worshipping Shiva began to sleep but Mulaji

remained vigilant. He saw a rat eating the offering made to Shiva by the Devotees. This

incident led him to think that the idol of Shiva could not be real God. When the idol

could not protect the offering made to it, it could never protect the whole world. He

became convinced about the futility of idol worship. This experience aroused his

conscience and Dayananda became a staunch crusader against the vices of Hinduism.

His father tried to involve him in family life through marriage with a view to put

restriction on his independent mind. Dayananda was not willing to enter into the

bondage of family life. In 1861, at Mathura, Dayananda came in contact with Swami

Brijananda. This contact is decisive point in his career. He became his disciple and



[39]

studied the ancient religious literature, various mythological books and Sanskrit

grammar text. The philosophical foundation of Dayananda took concrete shape at

Mathura. He got knowledge and realization. Mulasankara became Dayananda Sarswati

and by the instruction of his guru Vrijananda dedicated himself to spread the message

of Veda and to fight against the conservative Hindu religion and wrong traditions.

Dayananda though had contact with Brahmo Samaj; they were not prepared to

accept the supremacy of the Vedas and transmigration of soul. To fulfill the mission of

his life, he founded Arya Samaj at Bombay on 10th April, 1875 and passed the rest of

his life in establishing Arya Samaj branches at different places. The reformative zeal of

Dayananda irritated the orthodox Hindus. Dayananda stood firm and resolute in the

face of criticisms. He died of food poisoning on 30th October, 1883.

Educational Philosophy: The philosophy of Dayananda Saraswati can be

known from his three famous contributions namely “Satyartha Prakash”, ”Veda

Bhashya Bhumika” and “Veda Bhashya Bhumika” and Veda Bhashya. Further the

journal “Arya Patrika’ edited by him also reflects his thought. Dayandanda has devoted

two chapters (2nd and 3rd) of the “Satyarth Prakash” to the subject of education for the

infants as well as the adolescents.i besides establishing his reputation as a prolific

writer; above works indicate his role as an educational and religious reformer. Swami

Dayananda Saraswati also criticizes the present education system. He said this system

failed to deliver. It is not producing good student. An educated person was supposed to

be modest and bear good character. He was required to have control over speech and

mind, be energetic, respectful to parents, teachers, Elders and guest, to follow the Nobel

path and to shun evil ways, to enjoy the company of the learned people and to liberal in

making gifts. He wrote booklet called as “Vyavharbhanu”. In this book he delineated

the qualities of a Pandit learned person who was entitled to teach and contrasted them

with the character of a fool who should not to be entrusted with the education of the

children. Swami Dayananda is not composed of a superficial knowledge of three of

four subjects as unfortunately it happens to be the case at present, but it covers a wide

range of subjects beginning with grammar, literature, the Vedas, Upanishads,

Ramayana, Mahabharat and Ayurveda, the Science of health; Dhanurveda, the Science

of war; Gandharvaveda, Aesthetic arts; Arthaveda, Vocational training, Astronomy,

Algebra, Arithmetic, Geology, Space science etc. His was certainly a scheme of broad-



[40]

based foundational education. As for the medium of education, both of this personality

have different idea Dayananda, chose to write his works in the lingua franca of India,

which he termed as the Aryabhasha, so that his message could reach the masses.

Language, apparently, to him was the medium, the vehicle of communication of

knowledge and principles of healthy and Dharmic. Same time he also advocacy of

Sanskrit but did not supported the English while Swamiji is put great emphasis on

mother tongue is the right medium for social or mass education; he prescribes the

learning of English and Sanskrit also. While English is necessary for mastering

Western science and technology, Sanskrit leads one into the depths of our vast store of

classics. The implication is that if language does not remain the privilege of a small

class of people, social unity will March forward unhampered.

To him Veda is rock-bed of Hindu culture and infallible, being the inspired one

of God. He tried to purge Hinduism from its vices and to provide it a rational basis. He

gave the clarion call “Goods Back to Vedas”. As a social reformer Dayananda was not

influenced by western culture but was a true symbol of Hinduism. His approach was

reformative to strengthen the fighting spirit of Hinduism. The gurukulas, Girl’s

Gurukulas and DAV colleges were the most significant contribution of Dayananda. In

fact the efforts of Swami Dayanananda freed the people from the clutches of western

education. Dayananda Saraswati also contributed to the growth of democracy and

national awakening. It is said that “political independence was one of the first

objectives of Dayananda. Indeed he was the first man to use the term Swaraj. ”

Swami Dayananda Saraswati is one the most important reformers and spiritual

forces India has known in recent times. The dominant personality of Dayananda

Saraswati had found extraordinary reflection in the virility of the Arya Samaj

movement, and in almost every one of its adherents. The contribution of Arya Samaj in

the field of education is commendable. The establishment of education institutions,

particularly in the northern and eastern parts of India, and the formation of the

Gurukula Academy at Hardwar exemplify the very rightful eagerness of many

Samajists to revive the ancient ideal and traditions of Hindu education. The members of

Arya Samaj movement are also in the forefront of other.

Swami Dayanand the great founder of Arya Samaj occupies a unique position in

the history of political ideas of modern India. When the educated young men of India



[41]

were slavishly copying the superficial aspects of European civilization and were

making agitation for transplanting the political institutions of England in Indian soil

without paying any head to the genius and culture of the Indian people, swami

Dayanand boldly hurled India’s defiance against the social, cultural and political

domination of the west. Swami Dayanand, the greatest apostle of the indo-Aryan

culture and civilization also proved to be greatest exponent of the most advanced ideas

in politics in India. Swami Ji succeeded in carrying his ideas of liberalism and

nationalism to the very heart of rural India and to the masses tied down to age long

ignorance and superstition. Like a skilled physician he diagnosed correctly the maladies

from which India was suffering and prescribed remedies, which being properly

administrated, would make her strong, vigorous and self confident again.

Swami Dayananda education philosophy, we can say that his scheme of

education brings to light its constructive, comprehensive character. He realizes that it is

only through education that the upliftment of masses and regeneration of society was

possible. The sense of dignity rises in man when he becomes conscious of his inner

spirit, and that is the very purpose of education. He tried to harmonize the traditional

values of India with the new values brought through the progress of science and

technology. It is in the transformation of man through moral and spiritual education

that he finds the solution for all social evils. Founding education on the firm ground of

our own philosophy and culture, he shows the best of remedies for today’s social and

global illness. Through his scheme of education, he tries to materialize the moral and

spiritual welfare and upliftment of humanity, irrespective of caste, creed, nationality or

time.

Social Ideas: He was against idol worship, caste system, ritualism, fatalism,

infanticide, sale of grooms etc. he also stood for the liberation of women and upliftment

of expressed class. Keeping in mind the supremacy of Vedas and Hindus, he opposed

Islam and Christianity and advocated for Suddhi movement to reconvert the other sects

to Hindu order. Swami Dayananda Saraswati sincerely believed that through the spread

of Vedic education the urge of regeneration of Indian society could be met.

The gurukulas, Girl’s Gurukulas and DAV colleges were the most significant

contribution of Dayananda. In fact the efforts of Swami Dayanananda freed the people

from the clutches of western education. Dayananda Saraswati also contributed to the



[42]

growth of democracy and national awakening. It is said that “political independence

was one of the first objectives of Dayananda. Indeed he was the first man to use the

term Swaraj. ”

He was the first to insist on people to use only swadeshi things manufactured in

India and to discard the foreign things. He was the first to recognize Hindi as national

language of India.” Dayananda Saraswati was the strong votary of democracy and self

government.

He declared that good Government was no substitute for self-government. He

paid utmost attention to the regeneration of rural India. In many ways Dayananda

anticipated Mahatma Gandhi in his constructive programme. His Arya Samaj was

constituted through the procedure of democratic election from the below to bottom.

Swami Dayananda represented a transitional stage and inaugurated future

developments with his vision of a complete overhaul of Hindu Society through

education.

Dayananda founded the first Arya Samaj at Bombay in 1875 and another at

Lahore in 1877. The Arya Samaj was the institutional symbol of Dayananda’s

philosophy. The Samaj had done splendid work in social and educational field.

The success of this Samaj has been greatly due to commendable contribution of

three gifted successors of Dayananda-Lala Hansaraj, Pandit Guru Dutt and Lala Lajpat

Rai.

The objectives of Arya Samaj was to recover and revive the forgotten values of

Aryan culture, to inspire the Indians with the great Aryan ideal of the past and to re-

establish the greatness of India by responding to internal as well as external challenges.

The members of Arya Samaj were guided by “Ten Principles” of which the first one

was to study and realize the importance of Veda. The other principles provide emphasis

on leading a moral and virtuous life. The Arya Samajists believe in one Supreme

Being, who is omnipotent, eternal and maker of all. Dayananda believed in God alone

and difference did not want the people to mistake shadow for the substance. Arya

Samjists also emphasized on the expansion of education and abolition of illiteracy.

They also believed in karma and rebirth pursued path for the well being of the

world. The Arya Samajists were opposed to idolatry, ritual and priesthood, and



[43]

particularly to the prevalent caste system and popular Hinduism as preached by

orthodox Brahmins.

They were also the ardent advocate of social reform, enlistment of women and

depressed class and spread of education. The Arya Samajists stood for social equality

and championed social solidarity and consolidation. One of the objectives of Arya

Samaj was to prevent conversion of Hindus to other religions and to reconvert those

Hindus who had been converted to other religions like Islam and Christianity through a

pacificator ceremony called Shuddhi.

The Arya Samaj movement through its multi-dimensional activities weakened

the hold of orthodox and conservative elements. It also contributed more than the

rational movement of Brahmo Samaj to the development of a new national

consciousness in India.

To conclude with the observation of cultural Heritage of India Series “The Arya

Samaj is Dayananda writ large, and it reflects his versatile personality. It has in it

saints, philosophers, organizers, scholars, thinkers and the laity-all reflecting in

different prisms, in potent ways, the light of the brilliant son of lofty moral and spiritual

ideals that Dayananda embodied. There is no doubt that his personality will leave its

impress on humanity, and will influence, in an increasing measure, the religious history

of India and the world.”

Although a sanyasi, Dayananda had a sensitive and compassionate heart that

melted at the sufferings of the poor. 'To love the creation of God is to love God

Himself' - so he taught people. To awaken people from lethargy, the Swamiji travelled

all over India Wherever he went, he roundly condemned the caste system, idol worship,

child marriage and other harmful customs and traditions. He preached that women

should have equal rights with men and laid stress on pure conduct in life. This created a

stir among the people. Over the centuries, with the passing of time some wicked

customs had crept into Hinduism. These customs stood out prominently and therefore

the real power and greatness of Hinduism were dimmed. With the teachings of Swamy

Dayananda true Hinduism came to shine forth. Thousands of young people who had

been influenced by Western Culture and were about to accept Christianity turned back

and became the staunch followers of Vedic religion. Some time Hindus who had gone

over to other religions wished to come back. But the Hindus would not permit this.



[44]

Swamy Dayananda took the Christian and Muslim converts back into the Hindu fold by

performing purification rites for them. So it may be said that Dayananda brought about

a revolution in the social life of Indians.

He laid particular emphasis on the equality of women. He used to say that India

had fallen to such a miserable condition precisely because women were not given

education but were kept in ignorance. As long as women were prisoners of foolish

customs like the purdah, progress was beyond reach like the reflection of a bundle of

jewels in a mirror.

They should throw away their purdahs. Seetha and Savithri are remembered not

because they were behind the purdah, but because of their chastity and virtue. So he

went on preaching.

Dayananda was bitterly opposed to un-touchability. "Un-touch ability is a

dreadful curse of our society. Every living being has a soul which deserves affection; in

every human being there is a soul worthy of respect. Anyone who does not know this

basic principle cannot understand the true meaning of the Vedic religion." So he

preached.

Dayananda was fully convinced that the nation cannot prosper unless education

spreads. But our education system should not be a mere carbon copy of the western

type of education. There should be a law to compel the parents to send every boy or girl

who is eight years old to school. Every boy and every girl should be sent to Gurukulas

where they stay with their gurus. There should be separate Gurukulas for boys and

girls. The King's son and the farmer's son should be equals in a Gurukula. They should

all be made to work alike. The Gurukula should be situated far from the town and the

city, and should enjoy calm and serenity. Our culture and our great books like the

Vedas should be introduced to our students. Side by side, mathematics, geology,

astronomy and other sciences which are important in modern life should also be taught.

Swamy Dayananda founded gurukulas at various places to fulfil these objects. Among

them Kangadi is famous even to this day.

Swami Dayananda Saraswati is one the most important reformers and spiritual

forces India has known in recent times. The dominant personality of Dayananda

Saraswati had found extraordinary reflection in the virility of the Arya Samaj

movement, and in almost every one of its adherents. The contribution of Arya Samaj in



[45]

the field of education is commendable. The establishment of education institutions,

particularly in the northern and eastern parts of India, and the formation of the

Gurukula Academy at Hardwar exemplify the very rightful eagerness of many

Samajists to revive the ancient ideal and traditions of Hindu education. The members of

Arya Samaj movement are also in the forefront of other public services of the country.

This is evident from the number of members of the Samaj who have attained public

eminence and have won the gratitude of the Indian nation. The contribution and

importance of Swami Dayananda will remain alive in the country so long as the Arya

Samaj exists and continues its activities of religious and social reforms.

The 10 principles of Arya Samaj

God is the efficient cause of all true knowledge and all that is known through

knowledge.

God is existent, intelligent and blissful. He is formless, omniscient, just, merciful,

unborn, endless, unchangeable, beginning-less, unequalled, the support of all, the

master of all, omnipresent, immanent, un-aging, immortal, fearless, eternal and

holy, and the maker of all. He alone is worthy of being worshiped.

The Vedas are the scriptures of all true knowledge. It is the paramount duty of all

Aryas to read them, teach them, recite them and to hear them being read.

One should always be ready to accept truth and to renounce untruth.

All acts should be performed in accordance with Dharma that is, after deliberating

what is right and wrong.

The prime object of the Arya Samaj is to do well to the world, that is, to promote

physical, spiritual and social good of everyone.

Our conduct towards all should be guided by love, righteousness and justice.

We should dispel Avidya (ignorance) and promote Vidya (knowledge).

No one should be content with promoting his/her good only; on the contrary, one

should look for his/her good in promoting the good of all.

One should regard oneself under restriction to follow the rules of society calculated

to promote the well being of all, while in following the rules of individual welfare

all should be free.



[46]

Political Ideas: The political ideas of Dayananda are as under:

Swami Dayanand was an idealist in politics and he found his inspiration from

the study of Vedas. His method of interpreting the Vedas was quite different from the

traditional method of sayana and mahidhar. He started with the age-long tradition that

the Vedas contain truths which are universal in their application and which can stand

the test of acute reason and searching science. The Indian tradition is that even sciences

like medicine, mathematics, music, astronomy, politics and economics are based on

Vedas.

Theory of state: Swami Dayanand does not make any inquiry about the origin

of the state. He concentrates his attention on the discussion of the character of a fully

organized state with all its organs of administration. According to him, the state stands

for the realization of the highest objects of life. The objective of state is not just to look

to the secular and material welfare of the citizens but to promise the four fold objects of

human life, namely religion, material prosperity, enjoyment and salvation. He wants

state to direct its activities in such a way that these may be conducive to the securing of

freedom from the bondage of the world.

The form of government: Swami Dayanand is dead against the rule by one

man. In his Satyartha Prakash he says that absolute power should not be entrusted to

one man. An autocratic king never allows others to be equal to him. His own

personality may over shadow that of others. He declares that an autocrat is sure to be

partial in order to fulfil his own selfish ends. Swami Dayanand admitted the necessity

of having a president for representing the unity of the state. The right of ruling the

people is to be conferred by the people themselves. Dayanand fit in his theory of

republicanism with the divine right of kingship theory, which is palpable in the dharma

shastras. He observes that if the persons entrusted with state affairs are men of learning

and if they would be able to secure great power for the state.

The Three Assemblies: Swami Dayanand states “let the three assemblies

harmoniously work together, and make good laws, and let all abide by those laws. Let

them all be of one mind in affairs that promote the happiness of all”. Swami Dayanand

allows autonomy to educational and religious bodies. Normally the political or

legislative assembly should not interfere with the decision arrived at the educational



[47]

and religious assemblies. But the legislative assembly cannot hold itself totally aloof in

educational and religious matters.

Rule of law: Swami Dayanand held the law alone as the real king. He exhorts

all to remember the teaching of the Vedic text which says “verily the just law alone is

the true king, yes; the just law is the true religion.” He places the law above the king in

a panegyric over the impersonal law he writes:”the law alone is the true governor that

maintains order among the people. The law alone is their protector. The law keeps

awake whilst all the people are fast asleep, the wise, therefore, look upon the law alone

as Dharma or Right. When rightly administrated the law makes all men happy but when

administrated wrongly, without due consideration as to the requirements of justice it

ruins the king. Rightly administrated law promotes the practice of virtue, acquisition of

wealth and secures the attainment of the heart-felt desires of his people. Swami

Dayanand does not like to provide even a separate set of judicial courts for the trials of

king and other high officers. He upholds this dictum and elaborates it by stating that

while the punishment inflicted on the king should be thousand times heavier than on an

ordinary person.

Functions of government: To swami Dayanand, government is the agent of the

community. It has not only to provide security against internal and external dangers,

but also to promote the highest aims of human life. He admits the need of allowing the

citizens to hold private property. He believes in the inequality of division of wealth but

at the same time apprehends that the rich might give trouble to the government. He also

lays great emphasis on the maintenance of a strong army. He describes that there is no

other way of maintaining independence of the state than the raising up of a strong

defensive force within the country. The government according to him is the guardian

and protector of those who are not able to earn their livelihood either because of

decades’ and infirmity or because they are too young to take care of themselves, swami

ji clearly mentions the case of the wife and minor children of the deceased officers who

are entitled to the support of the government. If, however, any of them takes to vicious

life, he or she should not receive any help.

References

Swami Dayanand Saraswati: A study of his life and work, 1987

The autobiography of Dayananda sarswati, 1987



[48]

M. Ruthven, Fundamentalism: A Very Short Introduction, Oxford University

Press, USA (2007), ISBN 978-0-19-921270-5.

N. A. Salmond, Hindu Iconoclasts: Rammohun Roy, Dayananda Sarasvati and

nineteenth-century polemics against Idolatry (2004).

Swami Dayanand Saraswati through non-Arya Samajist eyes, 1990

Bhagwan Dayal: the development of modern education, bomaby, 1955

Chaube, S.P: some great Indian educators, Agra, 1957

RV.I.104.3; 105.8. Ait. Brah. VII.3; Tait.Sam.III.9.4.49. Sat. Barah.V.3.4.

Chhaju Singh, Bawa:The life and teachings of Dayanand Saraswati.lahore,1903

Glorious Thoughts of Swami Dayananda. ed. New Book Society of India,

1966 Dayananda Saraswati at Google Books

An introduction to the commentary on the Vedas. Jan Gyan-Prakashan, 1973. An

Introduction To The Commentary On The VEDAS: Dayananda Flipkart.com

review

Autobiography, ed. Kripal Chandra Yadav, New Delhi: Manohar,

1978. Autobiography of dayanand saraswati ISBN 0685196682

The philosophy of religion in India, Delhi : Bharatiya Kala Prakashan, 2005, ISBN

81-8090-079-7

Krant Swadhinta Sangram Ke Krantikari Sahitya Ka Itihas (2006) Delhi: Pravina

Prakasana ISBN 81-7783-122-4 (3 vol. set)

Prem Lata, Swami Dayananda Sarasvati (1990)

Autobiography of Swami Dayanand Saraswati (1976) [5]



[49]

Arya Samaj and Dayanand Anglo Vedic movement: with special

references to Educational and Social Dimensions

Dr. Amit Kumar Sharma Lecturer in ITHM Khandari,

Agra

Abstract

Arya Samaj (Sanskrit ārya samāja आय समाज) "Noble Society" is an Indian

religious movement that promotes values and practices based on the infallibility of

the Vedas. The samaj was founded by Swami Dayananda Saraswati, a sannyasi, on 7

April 1875 (141 years ago). Swami Dayananda was to the Indian Renaissance in the

19th century. He founded the first Aria Samar at Bombay in 1875 nearly twenty-two

years before Swami Vivekananda established the Ramakrishna Mission and forty seven

years after Raja Ramona Roy formed the Brahma Sabah which subsequently grew into

the Brahma Samar. If the Brahma Samar ignited the spark of social reform in Bengal,

the Aria Samar stirred the Punjab and parts of northern and western India with its social

commitment, benevolent work, nationalistic activity and sense of pride in the Vedic

heritage.

Between 1869 and 1873, Swamy Dayanand Saraswati (originally called Mul

Shankar), a native of Gujarat from the Kathiawar region, made his first attempt at

reform in India towards orthodox Hinduism. This attempt took the form of the

establishment of "Vedic Schools" or "Gurukuls" which put an emphasis on Vedic

values, culture, and religion or satya sanatan Dharma to its students including boys and

girls separately as on ancient Vedic pattern. The first was established at Farrukhabad in

1869 with 50 students enrolled in its first year. This initial success led to the founding

of four additional gurukuls in rapid succession at Mirzapur (1870),

Kasganj (1870), Chhalesar (Aligarh) (1870) and Varanasi (1873) - all now in Uttar

Pradesh.

Keywords: - Noble Society, Bombay, Mul Shankar, Indian Renaissance, Farrukhabad

Introduction:



[50]

Arya Samaj (Sanskrit ārya samāja आय समाज) "Noble Society" is an Indian

religious movement that promotes values and practices based on the infallibility of

the Vedas. The samaj was founded by Swami Dayananda Saraswati, a sannyasi, on 7

April 1875 (141 years ago).

Swami Dayananda was to the Indian Renaissance in the 19th century. He

founded the first Aria Samar at Bombay in 1875 nearly twenty-two years before Swami

Vivekananda established the Ramakrishna Mission and forty seven years after Raja

Ramona Roy formed the Brahma Sabah which subsequently grew into the Brahma

Samar. If the Brahma Samar ignited the spark of social reform in Bengal, the Aria

Samar stirred the Punjab and parts of northern and western India with its social

commitment, benevolent work, nationalistic activity and sense of pride in the Vedic

heritage. The Aria Samar brought about a resurgence of Vedic values castigating

religious and social evils ranging from idolatry, superstition, rigidity of caste and

untouchability to polygamy, child marriage, ill-treatment of widows, custom of Purda,

and general inequality between the sexes. Considering education to be a catalyst of

social transformation he laid emphasis on teaching both boys and girls in the art and

science of life, and in technical skills so as to broaden their mental horizons, unfold

their innate abilities, and cultivate virtue.









Kasganj (1870), Chhalesar (Aligarh) (1870) and Varanasi (1873) - all now in Uttar

Pradesh.

Dayanand Anglo Vedic movement

After the demise of Swami Dayananda (October 30,1883) it became imperative

to continue his legacy not by constructing a memorial in stone and mortar but

by venturing into the domain of education to root out illiteracy of mind and soul as



[51]

per the 8th commandment of the Arya Samaj which says: ‘We should aim at

dispelling ignorance and promoting knowledge.’ The establishment of Dayanand

Anglo Vedic College Trust and Management Society (popularly DAV) three years

after his death marked the beginning of DAV movement aimed at crystallizing his

social and educational ideas. The DAV movement grew out of the dialectical interplay

between the forces of orthodoxy and heterodoxy, revivalism and reform, faith and

reason. It gushed forth with a new sense of purpose and direction in response to the

western challenge, emergence of new socio-economic milieu and rise of new middle

classes, and converged the quintessential aspects of the Vedic tradition with the

prevailing spirit of science, rationality and humanism. The fact that Lala Sain Das, a

science teacher, was sent to England to do advanced study in his subject shows the

progressive outlook of DAV in its formative years, a tradition which continues to this

day.

Following an integrated approach to divinity (devas), belief in the cosmic law of

unity and harmony which must prevail at social level and as per the Rigvedic hymn

(X.191.2-3), DAV has all along kept itself away from sectarianism, caste distinctions,

regionalism or parochialism. It is as much an instrument of the Arya Samaj as an

independent organization with a cluster of educational, social and humanitarian

institutions, involved in the task of man-making (to borrow Swami Vivekananda

expression) and nation building. The aim of DAV is to establish knowledge as value,

prepare students for living, life, and lace national feelings with global outlook.

The DAV movement was nurtured by puissant souls like Rai Bahadur Lala

Lal Chand (1852-1912), Mahatma Hans Raj (1864-1938), Pt. Guru Dutt Vidyarthi

(1864-1890), Lala Lajpat Rai ( 1865-1928), Bhai Parmanand (1874-1947), Lala Durga

Das, Principal Sain Das (1840-1890), Bakshi Ram Rattan, Dr Mukund Lal Puri, Bakshi

Tek Chand and Mehar Chand among others. It sought inspiration from many Arya

revolutionaries and martyrs like Pandit Lekh Ram (1857-1897), Swami Shraddhananda

(1857-1926), Ram Prasad Bismil (1897-1927), Shahid Rajpal (1884-1929) and others.

The vivisection of India gave DAV movement a temporary setback as majority of

institutions were in Pakistan. But it resurrected itself with the dynamic work of

stalwarts like Principal Mehar Chand, Lala Balraj, Dr Justice Mehar Chand Mahajan,



[52]

Dr G.L.Datta, Lala Suraj Bhan, Prof. Ved Vyasa,Darbari Lal, Tirth Ram

Tuli and G.P.Chopra (b. 1920), the current President of DAV family.

Vedic schools









Kasganj (1870), Chhalesar (Aligarh) (1870) and Varanasi (1873)-all now in Uttar

Pradesh.

The Vedic Schools represented the first practical application of Dayanand's

vision of religious and social reform which was based on Vedic tradition. They enjoyed

a mixed reception. On the one hand, students were not allowed to perform traditional

idol worship of stone sculpture (murti puja in Hindi) at the Gurukul, and were instead

expected to perform sandhya (a form of meditative prayer using Vedic mantras with

divine sound and pronunciation from the Vedas) and participate in agnihotra twice

daily in morning. Disciplinary action was swift and not infrequently severe. On the

other hand, all meals, lodging, clothing and books were given to the students free of

charge, and the study of Sanskrit Holy books like Vedas, Upanishads, Aranyakas,

Kashika, Nirukta, Mahabhashya, Ashtadhyayi, Darshanas were opened to non-

Brahmins and also for women. The most noteworthy feature of the Gurukuls was that

only those texts which accepted the authority of the Vedas were to be taught. This was

critical for the spiritual and social regeneration of Vedic culture in India.

The Vedic Schools soon ran into difficulties. Dayanand had trouble finding

qualified teachers who agreed with his views on religious reform, and there existed a

paucity of textbooks which he considered suitable for instruction in Vedic culture.

Funding was sporadic, attendance fluctuated considerably, and tangible results in the

way of noteworthy student achievement were not forthcoming.



[53]

Consequentially, some of the schools were forced to close shortly after opening.

As early as 1874, it had become clear to Dayanand that, without a wide and solid base

of support among the public, setting up schools with the goal of imparting a Vedic

education would prove to be an impossible task. He therefore decided to invest the

greater part of his resources in the formulation and propagation of his ideology of

reform. Deprived of the full attention of Dayanand, the Gurukul/Vedic School system

collapsed and the last of the schools (Farrukhabad) was closed down in 1876.

After the spread of Arya Samaj in the twentieth century, more than 200 Vedic

schools are currently run by DAV organization.

Educational work

The first DAV High School was established at Lahore on June 1 1886 with Lela

Hans Raj (1864-1938) as its headmaster. Hans Raj, called the father of DAV

movement, became known as Mahatma, due to his honesty, integrity and selflessness as

also his futuristic vision and wisdom. He served with missionary zeal without drawing

any salary. The School grew into a College as per resolution no 3 dated April 28 1888

of the DAV management and Hans Raj became its first Principal.

What started as a small educational venture with a group of only 505 students in

the first session has now assumed vast dimensions. In its 125 years history DAV has

proliferated into rural, urban, semi-urban, slum and tribal areas in almost all parts of the

country except Kerala. Its network of 715 institutions include schools (government-

aided, public, model, international and non-formal), colleges of arts, science, law,

education, agriculture, engineering and technology, commerce and management,

medical and paramedical institutions relating to Ayurveda, dentistry, nursing and

health-care; a Vedic research institute (Hoshiarpur), and a recently established

University in Jalandhar (Punjab). DAV has also associated with government and

private sector to expand its activities. At Solapur, Centre for the Preservation of the

Heritage of Maharashtra and Centre for the promotion of classical Sanskrit and (the

dying) Modi and Brahmi scripts, were established by this author, and a historical

museum created to connect students with their cultural past.

Social Work

The spirit behind any social activity determines its range and quality as also its

continuity. The social programs of



[54]

DAV have been both preventive and ameliorative, deriving sustenance from

the sixth and ninth commandments of the Arya Samaj which say: ‘do good for

all’ promote ‘physical, spiritual and social well-being’ of all, avoid being self centric

and work for ‘welfare of others.’ Yajna which forms the substratum of Arya

metaphysics and ethics is not a mere fire ritual but a benevolent institution which

involves every living being and even primeval elements. In its social meaning, it

envelopes all humanitarian activities undertaken without selfish motive.

Preventive Programs

As social problems can be best handled socially by changing the mental

environment of people, and creating awareness in them, DAV institutions endeavor to

inculcate a sense of responsibility amongst the youth by educating and involving them

in purposeful activities so that they can become catalysts of change. The youth are

helped in building correct social attitudes by inculcating Vedic values, applicable

universally, and are galvanized against such evils as gender bias, child abuse,

dowry, alcoholism, drug addiction, gambling, environmental pollution, corruption,

black money, communalism, population explosion, violence against women, AIDS,

beggary, etc.

This is done through seminars, symposia, workshops, declamation contests,

guest lectures, courses in righteousness (dharma shiksha), social awareness camps,

character-building camps (charitra nirman shivirs), Vedic awareness camps

(Vedic chetana Shivirs), public rallies or processions and signature campaigns.

Students are sometime asked to take an oath against the menace of dowry, drinking or

smoking.

As per the Annual Report of DAV College Managing Committee (2008-2009),

United Nations Office for Drugs and Crime (UNODC) School-based programme was

implemented in 40 DAV Public Schools of Delhi and Jharkhand. Arya Yuvak Samaj

(estd.1896) has been particularly active in the task of restoring social health.

Innovative social programmes like ‘say no to poly-bags’, ‘say no to fire-

crackers’, ‘say no to dowry‘, ‘say no to drugs’, ‘donate eyes’, ‘plant and maintain a

tree’, ‘ clean surroundings’, ‘save water’, ‘keep smiling’ etc., have been a popular

feature of DAV institutions. They have received public acclaim and support. Blood

donation camps, mass immunization camps, medical relief camps, dental check-ups,



[55]

blood group check-ups etc, are organized at regular intervals, sometime in association

with Red Cross Society of India or other NGO’s. Students are encouraged to

visit residential social welfare institutions meant for children and women, the aged

and physically and mentally retarded persons, public hospitals to donate food, money

etc on their birthdays or some special day. It is on record that some students collect

funds for the charitable work of social organizations like National Association of Blind,

Spastic Society of India, Help-Age and Tuberculosis Association of Bihar.

The concept of Wall Magazine, where students pour out their literary output or

express views on important social matters in a free and frank way, is fast gaining

ground in some institutions.

Ameliorative Programs

In pursuance of the Vedic ideal of universal kinship which expresses itself in

the phrase, vasudhaiva kutumbhakam, (‘the world is one family’), DAV has launched a

diverse range of ameliorative programmes relating to children and women, the victims

of natural calamities, and the subaltern classes, in rural, urban, semi-urban, tribal and

hilly areas, without any distinction of caste, colour or creed.

As per Annual Report of DAVCMC, published on the occasion of completion

of 125 years of its service to society, and earlier reports, more than 47,000

underprivileged children from economically backward /tribal classes have been

receiving assistance from DAV institutions in the form of free education, free text

books, free mid-day meals and even free uniforms.

Statistics show that 9,664 students from slum areas (jhuggi –jhonparis) of Delhi

are being given free education by DAV schools of Delhi by running evening classes.

Further 550 students from economically backward groups, including 300 students

fromjhuggi-jhonparis, are provided free uniform, and study material by DAV Public

School, Gurgaon. Also 70 children in Jammu have been adopted for philanthropic

purposes by Maharaja Hari Singh DAV Public School.

Arya Anathalaya,Pherozpur (Punjab) founded by Swami Dayananda in 1877

and run by Arya Pradeshik Pratinidhi Sabha, New Delhi, a religious wing of DAV

Society, furnishes free residential and other facilities to 200 destitute boys and girls

and trains them in vocational courses so that they may stand on their feet. DAV

establishment is spending about Rs 21.93 lakhs annually to run an orphanage in Jammu



[56]

and Kashmir. A Children Home (Bal Ashrama) for orphans and destitute of Bihar and

Jharkhand is being established at Kanke on a 2-acre piece of land in DAV Public

School.

In Bihar, free education is being provided to 11500 students which include 500

students belonging to war victims’ families. An innovative program, ‘Project Candle’ is

run by S L DAV Public School Khagaria, to wipe out illiteracy from nearby villages.

The literate child, symbolizing a candle, is given the task to light up the life of an

illiterate child.

In Jharkhand, 12000 students, nearly half of them Adivasis, and Chakma

refugees of Arunachal Pradesh, are given free education in DAV public schools at

Hehal and Giridih. In Ranchi and Khunti, DAV provides free education to more than

5000 poor and Adivasi students. The residential school in Bundu is meant exclusively

for Adivasi children, and is run with the financial support of the Welfare Department of

government.

Taking cognizance of the magnitude of illiteracy and population

growth in some segments of the Hindi belt, DAV institutions have started non-

formal educational centers (Anaupacharik Shiksha Kendras) by involving the

faculty and tapping the student power. At present 31 non-formal centres of education

are functioning in Bihar and Jharkhand. Two of them are being run for the inmates of

Jail in Giridih, numbering about 775. Special attention is being paid towards literacy of

the fast vanishing Birhor tribe with its sub-divisions, Jaghis and Uthalu, in and around

Dhanbad. In Khunti and its suburbs, free eye operation camps have been organized

under the auspices of Dayanand Foundation for the last about three decades. As per

Annual Report, 976 cataract patients were treated during the year 2010-11.

A DAV official, Mahatma Narayan Das Grover (1923-2008), who worked for

the poor and tribals in eastern, western and central India, Sikkim, Nepal was so imbued

with the Arya spirit to serve the Adivasis of Khunti (one of the 24 districts in south

Chhotanagpur division of Jharkhand) that he carried an inscription on his arm which

read, ‘Jeevan ka hare ek pal Khunti ke liye.’- ‘Each moment of life for Khunti’. He

adopted the photograph of a destitute Adivasi child as the emblem of non-formal

schools and became popular as ‘Jhole Wala Baba’, ‘Man with a hanging bag’, or ‘the

Gandhi of Bihar’.



[57]

In the north-eastern region, DAV has set up a cluster of Ashrama schools and

vocational centres with the support of Social Welfare Department of Government of

India. Free ship is given to tribal students in job-oriented professional courses in DAV

Colleges in Punjab and Haryana. In Dayanand Law College Solapur, free legal-aid

clinics and legal literacy camps have been organized since 1989.

As Villages constitute the life-line of India, DAV has established about 50

schools in rural areas of Punjab, Haryana, Himachal Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh, Orissa and

Bihar where population is less than 5000. DAV has also mooted the setting up of model

villages in association with public and private sector in the state of Haryana.

Some DAV schools particularly in Delhi, Punjab and Haryana cater to nearly

2700 children with physical or mental disabilities. Mental development centres (Mano

Vikas Kendras) in Delhi run by Kulachi Hansraj Model School and Ved Vyas DAV

Public School, Vikaspuri are pioneers in this respect. Koshish Red Cross School for

Special Children in Amritsar (taken over by DAV management in 2008) provides

training, education and a caring environment to both intellectually challenged and

Hearing-impaired children. Two schools for special children are also being run in

Gurgaon (Haryana) and Ballabhgarh, Faridabad.

DAV has remained in the forefront in providing relief and rehabilitation to the

victims of natural calamities or war. As per data available DAV has contributed Rs

6,77,58,536/- in relief funds in times of national crisis. When earthquakes hit Latur

(Maharashtra) in 1993 and Bhuj (Gujarat) in 2001, cyclones hit Orissa in 1999,

earthquakes-induced tidal waves traversed Vishakhapatnam in 2004 or floods ravaged

Bihar in 2008 villages were adopted for physical support and children homes (Arya

Bal Sadan, Bal Ashrama) and schools established in Solapur (Maharashtra), Bhuj,

Rajayyapet (Vishakhapatnam, Andhra Pradesh) and Narktiaganj, a subdivision of west

Champaran in Bihar.

To empower women from the lower strata of society DAV runs crafts and

vocational centres in slum areas of Delhi, Faridabad and Yamunanagar (Haryana),

Ranchi ( Jharkhand ), Imphal (Manipur)and other places. Women are given free

training in cutting, stiching, embroidery, doll-making etc. and sometime offered sewing

machines or other material after they complete their course. Some centres like that of

Yamunanagar, also provide training in computers, food preservation etc. Occasionally,



[58]

mass marriage projects are undertaken in which a couple is given clothes, articles and

other useful goods worth Rs 20,000. As per DAV records, 1000 girls have been helped

to enter the household life (Grihastha Ashrama).

DAV has a trifoiliate character – it stands for an educational organization,

for a convergence of noble souls (arya) involved in the task of nation-building

and for a progressive movement dexterously involved in maintaining social health.

Khushwant Singh wrote: “The more I hear of the DAV set-up, the more I admire the

way it functions. It is probably among the very few educational organizations in the

world which is free of ego clashes of the people who run it. (Hindustan Times, April 17

2011).

Dayanand died in 1883. Arya Samaj grew after his death, mainly in Punjab.

Early leaders of the Samaj were Pandit Lekh Ram and Lala Munshi Ram (better known

as Swami Shraddhanand after his Sanyas). The activities and the opposition Arya

Samaj encountered in Punjab were credited with the formation of the rival Sikh

dominated Singh Sabha, the forerunner of the Akali Dal. Some authors also claim that

the activities of Samaj led to increased antagonism between Muslims and Hindus.

Shraddhanand led the Shuddhi movement that worked towards bringing Converted

Hindus back into the fold.

Arya Samaj split into two in Punjab after 1893 on the question of eating meat.

The group that refrained from meat was called the Mahatma group and the one favoring

consumption of meat as the "Cultured Party".

During the early part of the 20th century, the Samaj or organizations inspired by

it such as Jat Pat Today Mandal were active in campaigning against caste

discrimination. Other activities the samaj engaged in were that of widow

remarriage and women's education.

During the early parts of the 20th century, the Samaj established chapters

in British colonies where there was a sizeable Indian diaspora such as South

Africa, Fiji, Mauritius, Surinam and Guyana.

Prominent Indian Nationalists such as Lala Lajpat Rai belonged to Arya Samaj

and were active in propagating the message of Samaj

Pandit Lekh Ram and Arya Samaj in Punjab

Arya Samaj was and is an important sect amongst Punjabi Hindus.



[59]

Pandit Lekh Ram (1858 – 6 March 1897) was an important Arya Samaj Hindu

leader. He is famous for his encounters with the founder of the Ahmadiyya Muslim

CommunityMirza Ghulam Ahmad. He also wrote a book in falsification of

Ahmad's Barahin-e-Ahmadiyya and named it Taken e Barahin Ahmadiyya (A

falsification of the Barahin e Ahmadiyya). He was assassinated on March 6, 1897.

Members of the Ahmadiyya Muslim Community claim that this was in accordance with

the prophecies of Mirza Ghulam Ahmad.

Language Issue

Arya Samaj promoted the use of Hindi and discouraged the use of Punjabi

language in Punjab. This was a serious point of difference between the Sikhs

represented by the Akalis and the Arya samaj during the period immediately following

Indian independence and the demand for a Punjabi speaking state.

Humanitarian efforts

Arya Samaj was notable for its donation. After the 1905 Kangra earthquake,

large amount of donations had been made by Arya Samaj in relatively small period,

which was largely appreciated by the afflicted population. Other humanitarian missions

of the organization included the support for women's right to vote, and protection for

widows.

References

Kishwar, Madhu (April 26, 1986). "Arya Samaj and Women's Education:

Kanya Mahavidyalaya, Jalandhar".Economic and Political 21 (17):

doi:10.2307/4375593.

Swami Dayanand Saraswati: A study of his life and work, 1987

Vertovec, Steven (2000). The hindu diaspora: comparative patterns (1. publ.

ed.). London: Routledge. pp. 29, 54, 69. ISBN 9780415238939.

Rai, L. L. (1915). The Arya Samaj: An Account of its Aims, Doctrine and

Activities, with a Biographical Sketch of the Founder. London:

Longman. ISBN 978-81-85047-77-5.

Pandit Lekh Ram (1858-1897)

he Origin, Scope and Mission of the Arya Samaj, by Ganga Prasad Upadhyaya.

Published by Arya Samaj, 1954.



[60]

The Arya Samaj: , by Vaidyanath Shastri. Published by Sarvadeshik Arya

Pratinidhi Sabha, 1967.

The Arya Samaj and Indian Nationalism, 1875–1920, by Dhanpati Pandey.

Published by S. Chand, 1972.

A Critical Study of the Contribution of the Arya Samaj to Indian Education, by

Saraswati Shantipriya Pandit. Published by Sarvadeshik Arya, Pratinidhi Sabha,

1975.

Arya Samaj and Indians Abroad, by Nardev Vedalankar, Manohar Somera.

Published by Sarvadeshik Arya Pratinidhi Sabha, 1975.

The Arya Samaj: Hindu Without Hinduism, by D. Vable. Published by Vikas,

1983. ISBN 0-7069-2131-3.

Social Movements and Social Change: A Study of Arya Samaj and

Untouchables in Punjab, by Satish Kumar Sharma. Published by B.R.

Publishing, 1985.

Arya Samaj and the Freedom Movement: 1875–1918, by Kripal Chandra

Yadav, Krishan Singh Arya. Manohar Publications, 1988. ISBN 81-85054-42-8.

M. Ruthven, Fundamentalism: A Very Short Introduction, Oxford University

Press, USA (2007), ISBN 978-0-19-921270-5.

J.M. Sharma, Swami Dayanand: A Biography, USB Publishers Distributors

Ltd., India (1998), ISBN 81-7476-212-4.

Rajender Sethi, "Rashtra Pitamah Swami Dayanand Saraswati" published by M

R Sethi Educational Trust Chandigarh.



[61]

Levels of Ground water in Mahendergarh District of Haryana

Dr. Sunita Department of Geography

Government College for Women, Narnaul

Abstract

Water resource is source of water that is potentially useful. Uses of water

include agricultural, industrial, household, recreational and environmental activities.

The majority of human uses requires fresh water. 97% of the water on the earth is salt

water and only 3 % is fresh water, slightly over two thirds of this is frozen in glaciers

and polar ice caps (69%). The remaining unfrozen fresh water is found mainly as

ground water (30%), with only a small fraction present above ground or in the air.

Ground water is fresh water located in the surface pure space of soil and rocks. It is also

water that is flowing within aquifers below the water table. Sometimes it is useful to

make a distinction between groundwater that is closely associated with surface water

and deep ground water in an aquifer (sometimes called “fossil water”). Water is a

precious and basic requirement of human being. A systematic physio-chemical analysis

of ground water at Mahendergarh district in Haryana. India has been carried out to

evaluate its suitability for domestic purpose. The data revealed considerable variation in

the ground water with chemical composition. In order to assess the ground water

analysed for different physio-chemical parameter. E.g. pH, EC, Na, K, Ca, Mg, CO3,

HCO3 and Cl. Ground water levels in Haryana are depleting very fast, threatening the

future of agricultural productivity in one of the largest farming states of the country.

While Mahendergarh district has recorded the biggest fall of 19.45 meters. The

temporal changes in ground water quality are studied by considering important

parameters such as salinity (Ec), chloride, nitrate and floride contents of waters, the

percent well waters falling in desirable, permissible and unsuitable classes of BIS-2012

standards during 2014 are compared with percent well water in same classes during

2010.



[62]

Introduction

In the contemporary times, industrialisation and urbanisation is growing with a

rapid speed, during this growth, the natural facilities like water, rain, seasons and

weather are affected. Water is a precious and most commonly used resource. It is one

of the basic requirements of human beings. Water is available as surface and

groundwater. Groundwater is the water which occurs below the surface of the earth.

Groundwater is a replenish able source of human water supply and it is estimated that

approximately one third of world’s population use groundwater for drinking (United

Nations Programme,1999). Groundwater serves as a major source for drinking,

irrigation and industrial used in Haryana, which is dominantly an agricultural state.

Groundwater is generally considered to be cleaner than the surface water (Kaushik et.

al.,2002)

Due to Rapid growth of population, industrialization and urbanization, there

have been intense human activities and interference into nature leading to hell over

exploitation and serve population stress on natural water bodies. Improper waste

disposal and unscientific anthropogenic practices over the years have adversely affected

the surface and groundwater quality the major problem with the ground water is that

once contaminated it is difficult to restore its quality (Kumar et. al.,2012). The scenario

in developing countries like India is likely to grimmer with more population pressure

and inadequate waste disposal facilities. The sample registration scheme in its recent

survey attributed to 30 to 40% deaths in India due to contaminated drinking water

(Roy, 1994). As per World Health Organisation report in developing countries,

pollution of water has been reported to cause 80% of human diseases and 30% infant

mortality (Chakroborty, 1999). However there is a need of information regarding the

status of drinking water quality for the state of Haryana where there has been rapid

industrial growth in the past decades. The present paper examines the differential study

of groundwater quality of slums in Mahendergarh district. This study is based on

various physio-chemical parameters of water samples taken from slum area of

Mahendergarh district.

The Study Area



[63]

Mahendergarh district is one of the dry districts. The district has an area of

about 1859 km2 with a population of 8,12,022 according to census of India 2011. It lies

between north latitude 27047’ to 28026’ and east longitude 75056’ to 76051’. It is

bounded on the north by Bhiwani and Rohtak districts, on the east by Rewari district

and Alwar district of Rajasthan, on the south by Alwar, Jaipur and Sikar districts of

Rajasthan and on the west by Sikar and Jhunjhunu districts of Rajasthan.

Ground Water Level Brief

The water table varies from 6.23 m. In the east and 35.56 m. In the west. The

main streams in the district are Dohan, Krishnawati and Sahibi which are non-perennial

and carry water during S.W. monsoon period only. The ground water moves along a

gradient from S.W. to N.E. In this district 87% of the area is having fresh to marginal

quality of ground water. According to assessment of ground water potential approved

by NABARD, the total useable recharge in 379.70 m.cu.m. and out of it 451.78

m.cu.m. is being utilized as on 1.4.78. Central ground water board, north weatern

region, Chandigarh has established ground water observation well (GWOW) in

Haryana state for monitoring the ground water. Climate and mainly rainfall is a primary

factor for lower level of ground water.

The climate of Mahendergarh district can be classified as tropical steppe,

semi-arid and hot which is mainly dry with very hot summer and cold winter except

during monsoon season when moist air of oceanic origin penetrates into the district.

The normal annual rainfall of the district is 500 mm which is unevenly distributed for

about 26 days.

Ground water Quality in Mahendergarh District

Natural quality of ground water is dependent on geological characteristics and

climatic conditions. It is further influenced and generally degraded by human activities.

Indiscriminate extraction of groundwater for day to day uses, application of fertilizers

in agriculture and unscientific disposal of industrial waste have great impact on ground

water quality. The quality of ground water is normally ascertained through

concentration values of number of physical, chemical and biological parameters present

in it. Concentration of these parameters affects its acceptability and usefulness for



[64]

domestic, agriculture, industrial and other purposes. It is, therefore, essential to know

the chemical composition of ground water to determine its suitability for the intended

use. Knowledge of quality of ground water not only helps in finding its suitability for

various purposes, but it also helps in taking effective remedial measures for its

improvement on scientific lines. In rural as well as in urban area of Mahendergarh

district, ground water is a major resource for drinking and other uses. Wherever surface

water is inadequate or unavailable, ground water is exploited for drinking and irrigation

purposes. In the backdrop of various uses of ground water, its quality is monitored

annually by CGWB, NWR Chandigarh through dedicated ground water monitoring

stations (GWMS) of dug wells and/or hand pumps of shallow depth.

The shallow ground water of the district is alkaline in nature (pH 7.46 to 8.40)

and is fresh to highly saline. Among anions, bicarbonate as well as chloride dominates

in 40% samples and in the remaining samples, none of the anion dominates. Among cat

ions, sodium dominates in about 60% of the samples whereas calcium and magnesium

dominates in the remaining 40% samples. Comparing the concentration values of major

ions with recommended desirable and permissible concentration limits for drinking

purposes either due to high nitrate or due to high fluoride which exceeds the

recommended limit of 45mg/l and 1.5 mg/l respectively. High nitrate has been found in

Buchawas (250 mg/l), kheri (210 mg/l) and Narnaul (1270 mg/l). Salinity(EC), Sodium

Adsorption Ratio (SAR) and Residual Sodium Carbonate (RSC) are the parameters for

ascertaining the suitability of ground water for irrigational uses. These parameters

range from 608 to 6330 µS/cm at 250C, 1.78 to 11.18 and -23.30 to 9.46 mill

equivalents respectively. From RSC values it is concluded that ground water of the

district is suitable for irrigation.

Ground Water Related Issues

Ground water level decline is the major problem in the district. The ground

water quality is not a major problem in the area. The declining water level is imposing

a major problem in the district. In the absence of any major canal network in the district

almost complete dependence on ground water needs is a major concern.

Data Collection and Analysis



[65]

The present paper is based on secondary data. The data is collected from the

central ground water board. The primary concerns about the change in quality of water.

The major quality checks for water taken are for major cations (Ca, Mg, Na, K) and

anions (CO3, HCO3, Cl, NO3, SO4 F,PO4) in addition to pH, EC, SiO2 and TH as

CaCO3.

Composition of waters

Chemical analysis shows that ground water is slightly moderate alkaline with

pH ranging between 7.96 to 8.76 pH units. EC (salinity) is found to vary widely with a

minimum value of 414µS/cm to 4510 µS/cm at 25°C. Among anions, carbonate though

generally absent in ground water samples is found in significant number of water

samples and it varies from nil to 48 mg/l. Bicarbonate varies from 192 to 752 mg/l,

chloride varies from 14.0 mg/l to 1276 mg/l and sulphate varies from 30 to 684 mg/l.

Nitrate, an indicator of domestic, irrigation and industrial contamination, is found at

many locations. Its concentration in district varies from 1.09 to 693mg/l. Fluoride is

found to be present in all the water samples and it varies from 0.21 to 14 mg/l.

Phosphate has not been detected in most of the locations but the highest concentration

of 1.60 mg/l has been observed in well water.

Among cat ions, calcium is found to vary from 10 mg/l to 204 mg/l whereas

magnesium generally varies from 5 to 108mg/l. Sodium is found to range between 45

mg/l and 800 mg/l. Potassium in ground waters is found in the rage of 10 mg/l to 82

mg/l. Silica determined as SiO2 varied from 10 to 39 mg/l. Hardness reported as

CaCO3 varies between 55 mg/l and 691 mg/l.

Declination of Water Quality

The quality of ground water is diminishing. The components of cat ions are

increasing with a very high rate is a serious matter of attention. It is a very drastic

situation that the ground water level as well as its quality in decreasing day by day.

Table 1 shows the minimum chemical constituents of ground water of the district. The

minimum pH value of ground water decreased from 8.69 to 7.96 from 2013-14 to



[66]

2015-16. The minimum EC concentration of ground water increased from 255 to 414

from 2013-14 to 2015-16. However the minimum concentration of CO3 still negligible

from last 3 years. The minimum concentration of HCO3 increased from 106 mg/l to 192

mg/l in last three years. The minimum concentration of Cl increased from 5.3 mg/l to

11 mg/l in last three years. However the minimum concentration of ‘F’ still remains

constant at about 0.25 mg/l from last 3 years. The minimum concentration of PO4 is

still negligible from last 3 years. The minimum concentration of Mg improved from 12

mg/l to 5 mg/l from last 3 years. However the minimum concentration of Na rapidly

increased from 16 mg/l to 45 mg/l. However the minimum concentration of ‘K’

decreased from 2.9 mg/l to 0.6 mg/l. The minimum concentration of ‘SIO2’ slightly

decreased from 13 mg/l to 10 mg/l. The minimum concentration of CaCO3 is also

decreased from 97 mg/l to 55 mg/l.

Table 2 shows the maximum chemical constituents of ground water of the

district. The maximum pH value of ground water increased from 8.08 to 8.76 from

2013-14 to 2015-16. The maximum EC concentration of ground water increased from

1246 mg/l to 4510 mg/l from 2013-14 to 2015-16. However the maximum

concentration of CO3 still about 50 mg/l from last 3 years. The maximum concentration

of HCO3 increased from 442 mg/l to 752 mg/l in last three years. The maximum

concentration of Cl increased from 216 mg/l to 1276 mg/l in last three years. The

maximum concentration of SO4 increased from 170 mg/l to 684 mg/l in last three years.

The maximum concentration of NO3 increased from 18 mg/l to 693 mg/l in last three

years. However the maximum concentration of ‘F’ increased from 1.43 mg/l to 14 mg/l

from last 3 years. The maximum concentration of PO4 is increased from negligible to

1.6 mg/l from last 3 years. The maximum concentration of Mg is increased from 46

mg/l to

Table 1

Year wise Minimum Chemical Constituents in Ground Water in Mahendergarh District

Chemical Impurities 2013-14 2014-15 2015-16 pH 8.69 8.04 7.96 EC 255 250 414 CO3 - - -



[67]

HCO3 106 108 192 Cl 5.3 11 14

SO4 - 40 30 NO3 - 1.7 1.09

F 0.27 0.3 0.21 PO4 - 0.004 - Ca 10 20 10 Mg 12 14 5 Na 16 7.5 45 K 2.9 2.6 0.6

SIO2 13 8 10 TH as CaCO3 97 118 55

Source: Ground Water Year Books of Haryana State

Fig. 2

108 mg/l from last 3 years. However the maximum concentration of Na rapidly

increased from 176 mg/l to 800 mg/l. However the maximum concentration of ‘K’

increased from 37 mg/l to 82 mg/l. The maximum concentration of ‘SIO2’ increased

from 27 mg/l to 39 mg/l. The maximum concentration of CaCO3 is also increased from

276 mg/l to 691 mg/l.

Table 2

0

50

100

150

200

250

2013-14

2014-15

2015-16



[68]

Year wise Maximum Chemical Constituents in Ground

Water in Mahendergarh District

Chemical Impurities 2013-14 2014-15 2015-16 pH 8.08 8.57 8.76 EC 1246 2185 4510 CO3 49 59 48

HCO3 442 359 752 Cl 216 435 1276

SO4 170 210 684 NO3 18 68 693

F 1.43 2.01 14 PO4 - 0.022 1.6 Ca 53 63 204 Mg 46 43 108 Na 176 373 800 K 37 6.5 82

SIO2 27 22 39 TH as CaCO3 276 333 691

Source: Ground Water Year Books of Haryana State

Fig. 3

Conclusion

It is concluded that Mahendergarh district in on a critical zone not only in terms

of the level of ground water but also for the quality of ground water. The ground water

0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

2013-14

2014-15

2015-16



[69]

of Mahendergarh district is poisoned with polluted chemical concentration mainly cat

ions pollutants. There is a need to take proper attention regarding the protection of

ground water level as well as for maintain the water quality. With due witness of water

ground level and its quality from near past, the district may be punished by nature with

drought if proper measures are not taken for protection and taking care of ground water

References

Central Ground Water Board (2013), Mahendragarh District Haryana

Central Ground Water Board (2014), Groundwater Year Book of Haryana State (2013-

14):34


15):48


16):49

Chakroborty,P.K.(1999), Need of applied research on water quality management,

Indian J. Environ.Prot.,19(8):595-597.

Manasa, J.,and Shivashankara,G.P. (2014), Groundwater quality of Mandya Urban

City. J. Emerging Tech. And Advance Engg.,4(6):296-301.

Roy, B.K., Gupta, N.L. and Shukla, L. (1994), Water availability in India:An Analysis

of current setting and future needs, in Water Environment in India,192.

WHO. (2006), Guidelines for drinking water quality, Geneva, Report No:

WHO/SDE/WSH06.07



[70]

The purpose of this study is to see the “Effect of between Type A Behaviour, Vocational Maturity and Optimism on Vocational

Indecision and Vocational Unrealism among XIth grade science boys and girls of Government Schools”.

Dr. Vandana Kumari Lecturer in Deptt. of Psychology

Government College For Women Narnaul

Abstract An adequate philosophy of vocational guidance must be grounded in the

developmental history of the individual. Vocational adjustment is a mark of maturity,

the mature individual contributes to society through the economic process and the

contribution is reasonably related to the ability of the individual and to the needs of the

social group and the result brings the individual or the home unit to economic

independence and offers other satisfaction.

In a complex society, such a development is in itself an achievement. It is

possible only when maturation has brought many of the marks of adulthood. It requires

physical development, mental growth, social development and emotional maturation at

least on a minimum level.

Vocational planning precedes vocational experience, but competence in

planning also requires abilities, which come with maturation. A vocational choice is in

itself a process of growth, reflecting other phases of development. It requires sufficient

maturity that the influences of adulthood are operative and consideration of adult life is

vivid.

“One’s job is the watershed down which the rest of one’s life tends to flow” has

been so well said by Robert S. Lynd and Helen M. Lynd. Great is the importance of

vocation in the life of an individual. Let us try to study in detail about the vocational

choice, vocational development, vocational adjustment and vocational maturity.

The choice of vocation is one of the very important decisions a person must

make for himself and this choice is a long process rather than a simple incident.



[71]

Vocational interests and choice don’t appear all of a sudden during adolescence, they

appear as a result of developmental process.

The purpose of the present study is to see the “Effect of between Type A

Behaviour, Vocational Maturity and Optimism on Vocational Indecision and

Vocational Unrealism among XIth grade science boys and girls of Government

Schools”. The following hypotheses were raised in conformity with the objectives of

the present study.

Hypothesis

1. There will be significant difference between boys and girls on the factor of

Type A Behaviour along with its dimensions.


Vocational Maturity along with its dimensions.


Optimism.


Vocational Indecision.


Vocational Unrealism along with its dimensions.

6. There will be significant relationship between Type A Behaviour along with its

dimensions: (Tenseness, Impatience, Restlessness, Achievement Orientation,

Domineering, Workaholic) and Vocational Indecision among boys, girls and

total group of subjects.

7. There will be significant relationship between Vocational Maturity along with

its dimensions: (Vocational Aspiration, Influence and money in job choice,

Altruism and passivity in job choice, Lack of job awareness and change in job

performance, Indecisiveness in vocational choice, Vocational understanding,

Lack of Independence, Chance factor in vocational choice) and Vocational

Indecision among boys, girls and total group of subjects.

8. There will be significant relationship between Optimism and Vocational

Indecision among boys, girls and total group of subjects.

9. There will be significant relationship between Type A Behaviour along with its

dimensions: (Tenseness, Impatience, Restlessness, Achievement Orientation,



[72]

Domineering, and Workaholic) and Vocational Unrealism along with its

dimensions among boys, girls and total group of subjects.

10. There will be significant relationship between Vocational Maturity along with

its dimensions: (Vocational Aspiration, Influence and money in job choice,

Altruism and passivity in job choice, Lack of job awareness and change in job

performance, Indecisiveness in vocational choice, Vocational understanding,

Lack of Independence, Chance factor in vocational choice) and Vocational

Unrealism along with its dimensions among boys, girls and total group of

subjects.

11. There will be significant relationship between Optimism and Vocational

Unrealism along with its dimension among boys, girls and total group of

subjects.

Sample

Initially the study was conducted on 700 students. Around 100 students were

dropped because they had not completed the response sheets. The final Study was

conducted on 600 students of the XIth standard from the faculty of Science

(Mathematics & Biology) group. Student who had cleared the Xth from the Board of

Secondary Education, Rajasthan were included in study. The schools covered during

the research work were as follows:-

(i) Raja Ramdev Poddar, Multi-purpose Higher Secondary School, Jaipur.

(ii) Shahid Amit Bhardwaj Higher Secondary School, Jaipur.

(iii) Government Higher Secondary School, Gandhi Nagar, Jaipur.

(iv) Government Balika Higher Secondary School, Malviya Nagar, Jaipur

The investigation was conducted with the help of the following tests :-

1. Type A behaviour pattern scale (ABBPS) developed by Upinder Dhar and

Manisha Jain (2001).

2. Optimism scale by Scheier and Carver Bridges (1994).

3. Vocational attitude maturity scale (VAMS) by Dr. (Mrs.) Manju Mahta

(1987).

4. Vocational indecision scale by Kathuria (1974).



[73]

5. Vocational unrealism was measured by method adopted by Mahon and

Nijhawan and Choudhary (1970).

Results were as follows:-

1. Adolescent boys and girls have been found different from each other in terms of

their level of Type A Behaviour (along with its dimensions), Vocational

Maturity (along with its dimensions), Vocational Indecision and Vocational

Unrealism (along with its dimensions). Boys and girls did not differ in terms of

their level of Optimism.

2. Among total sample of subjects, there was significant correlation between Type

A Behaviour in terms of Restlessness and Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic

Choice, Unrealistic Preference, Domineering and Aggregate Unrealism, Total

Type A Behaviour and Unrealistic Choice. There was no significant relationship

between Type A Behaviour in terms of the dimensions of Tenseness,

Impatience, Achievement Orientation, Workaholic and Vocational Indecision,

Unrealistic Choice, Unrealistic Preference, Unrealistic Aspiration and

Aggregate Unrealism.

3. Among total sample of subjects, there was significant correlation between

Vocational Maturity in terms of Vocational Aspiration and Vocational

Indecision, Altruism and passivity in job choice and Vocational Indecision,


Aggregate Unrealism, Lack of job awareness and change in job performance

and Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic Choice, Unrealistic Preference,

Unrealistic Aspiration and Aggregate Unrealism, Indecisiveness in vocational

choice and Vocational Indecision , Unrealistic Choice, Unrealistic Preference,

Unrealistic Aspiration, and Aggregate Unrealism, Vocational understanding and

Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic Preference, Unrealistic Aspiration and

Aggregate Unrealism, Total Vocational Maturity and Vocational Indecision,


Aggregate Unrealism. For rest of the dimensions of vocational maturity there



[74]

was no significant correlation with Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic Choice,

Unrealistic Preference, Unrealistic Aspiration and Aggregate Unrealism.

4. Among total sample of subjects, there was no significant relationship between

Optimism and Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic Choice, Unrealistic

Preference, Unrealistic Aspiration & Aggregate Unrealism.

5. Among adolescent boys there was significant relationship between Type A

Behaviour in terms of the dimensions of Tenseness and Vocational Indecision

and also with Aggregate Unrealism, Restlessness and Vocational Indecision and

Unrealistic Preference, Achievement Orientation and Unrealistic Aspiration,

Domineering and Vocational Indecision and Unrealistic Aspiration, Total Type

A Behaviour and Unrealistic Choice, Unrealistic Preference and Unrealistic

Aspiration. Among adolescent girls there was significant correlation between

Type A Behaviour in terms of Tenseness and Unrealistic Aspiration,

Restlessness and Unrealistic Choice, Unrealistic Preference, Unrealistic

Aspiration, and Aggregate Unrealism, Achievement Orientation and Unrealistic

Choice, Unrealistic Preference, Unrealistic Aspiration and Aggregate

Unrealism, Domineering and Unrealistic Aspiration, Aggregate Unrealism,

Workaholic and Unrealistic Preference, Total Type A Behaviour and Unrealistic

Aspiration. For rest of the dimension of Type A behaviour there was no

significant correlation with Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic Choice,

Unrealistic Preference, Unrealistic Aspiration, Aggregate Unrealism among

both boys and girls.

6. Among adolescent boys, there was significant correlation between Vocational

Maturity in terms of the dimension of Vocational Aspiration and Vocational

Indecision, Influence and money in job choice and Unrealistic Aspiration,

Altruism and passivity in job choice and Vocational Indecision and Aggregate

Unrealism, Lack of job awareness and change in job performance and

Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic Preference and Aggregate Unrealism,

Indecisiveness in vocational choice and Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic


Unrealism, Vocational understanding and Vocational Indecision, Aggregate



[75]

Unrealism, Lack of Independence and Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic

Choice & Aggregate Unrealism, Chance factor in vocational choice and

Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic Aspiration, Total Vocational Maturity and

Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic Choice, Unrealistic Preference, and

Aggregate Unrealism. Among adolescent girls there was significant correlation

between vocational maturity in terms of the dimensions of Vocational

Aspiration and Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic Aspiration, Influence and

money in job choice and Vocational Indecision, Altruism and passivity in job

choice and Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic Choice, Unrealistic Preference,

Unrealistic Aspiration and Aggregate Unrealism, Lack of job awareness and

change in job performance and Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic Choice,

Unrealistic Preference, Unrealistic Aspiration and Aggregate Unrealism,

Indecisiveness in vocational choice and Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic


Unrealism, Vocational understanding and Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic


Unrealism, Lack of Independence and Unrealistic Choice, Unrealistic

Preference and Aggregate Unrealism, Chance factor in vocational choice and

Unrealistic Choice and Unrealistic Aspiration, Total Vocational Maturity and

Vocational Indecision, Unrealistic Choice, Unrealistic Preference, Unrealistic

Aspiration and Aggregate Unrealism. For rest of the dimensions of Vocational

Maturity there was no significant correlation with Vocational Indecision,


Aggregate Unrealism among boys and girls.

7. Among adolescent boys there was significant correlation between Optimism

and Vocational Indecision and Aggregate Unrealism among boys. Among

adolescent girls, there was significant correlation between Optimism and

Unrealistic Choice. For rest of the dimensions there was no significant

correlation.

Bibliography



[76]

Ahluwalia, S.P., & Sindhu, N. (1969). A study of personal problems of some

adolescent girls and their effect on academic achievement. Journal of

Psychological Researches, 13, 56-57.

Amadi, C.C. (2007). Vocational maturity and occupational Preferences of Adolescent,

Adolescents in Owerri Educational Zone of Lmo State, Nigeria, Unpublished

M.Ed. Thesis, Faculty of Education, University of Calabar, Nigeria.

Asagwara, A.H. (1980). Sex differences in vocational attitudes and maturity among

university undergraduates in Calabar. Unpublished M.Ed. Thesis, University of

Ibadan, Nigeria.

Arnmold, J. (1989). Career decidedness and psychological well being. A two cohort

longitudinal study of undergraduate students and recent graduates. Journal of

Occupational Psychology, 163-176.

Asakawa, K. (1998). The quality of experience of Asians American adolescents in

activities selected to future goals. Journal of Youth and Adolescence, 27(2),

141-165.

Aspel, E. M., & Haak, J. C. (1970). Pattern of Vocations development of urban youth.

Journal of Counseling Psychology, 186, 505-508.

Atkinson, J. M. (1988). Are you Type-A. Handbook of coping with Stress at work.

Axelard, S. & Herma, J. L. (1951). Occupational Choice. New York: Columbia

University: Press.

Barlett, W. E. (1971). Vocational Maturity; Its past present and future development.

Journal of vocational behaviour, 1 (3) 217 – 229.

Bartelt, W. E. (1971). Vocational maturity: its past, present and future development.

Journal of Vocational Behaviour, 1(3), 217-229.

Bell, H. M. (1960). Ego involvement in vocational decisions. Personnel and Guidance

Journal, 28,732-736.

Bergamn, L. R., & Magnusson, D. (1986). Type A behaviour: A longitudinal study

from childhood to adulthood, Psychosomatic Medicain, 48(112), 134-142.

Blau, P. M. (1956). Occupational Choice a conceptual framework. Industrial Labour

Ratings Review. (9), 531-543.

Bortner, R. W., & Rosenman, R. H. (1976). The measurement of pattern a behaviour.

Journal of chronic diseases, 20, 525-533.



[77]

Brotner, R W., & Rosenman, R. S. H. (1967). The measurement of Pattern A

behaviour. Journal of Chronic Disorders, 20, 525-33.

Burke, R. J., & Weir, T. (1980). The Type A Experience; Occupational and life

demands, satisfaction and well-being. Journal of human stress, 6, 18-38.

Burnnam; M. A. Pennebaker, J. W., & Glass, D. C. (1975). “Time consciousness,

achievement striving and the type A behaviour pattern.” Journal of Abnormal

Psychology, (84), 76-79.

Burton, K. (1966). Personality and I.Q. measures as predictors of school achievement.

The Journal of Educational Psychology, 63, 107-110.

Byrne, D. G., & Rosenman, R. H. (1986). Type A behaviour and the experience of

affective discomfort. Journal of psycho somatic research, 30, 663-672.

Caplan, E., & Jones, M. (1975). Personality traits in adolescence and predictors in

adulthood. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 29(8), 980-991.

Chartrand, J. M., & Robbins, S. B. (1997). Career factors inventory: Applications and

technical guide. Paloalto, CA: Consulting Psychologists Press.

Chaudhary, N. (1971). The relationship between achievement, motivational, anxiety,

intelligence, social class and vocational aspiration. A Survey of Research in

Education. New Delhi: I.C.S.S.R, 45-46.

Chesney, AM. A., Black, G. W., Chadwick, J. H., & Rosenmasn, R. H. (1981).

Psychological correlates of the type-A behaviour pattern. Journal of Behavioral

Medicine, 4,217-229.

Cleas, R. (1998). Influence of early career experience occupational group and National

culture on proactive career behaviour. Journal of Vocational Behaviour, 37,

357-358.

Cooper, S. E., & Van Matre. G. (1986). The effect of group and individual vocational

counseling on career indecision and personal indecisiveness. Journal of College

Student Personnel, 39-42.

Crites, J. O. (1961). A Model for the Measurement of Vocational Maturity, Journal of

Counseling Psychology, 8, 225-259.

Crites, J. O. (1965). Measurement of Vocational Maturity in Adolescence; Attitude Test

of the Vocational Development Inventory Psychological Monographs, 79 (2

Whole No. 595) (A).



[78]

Crites, J. O. (1971) The Maturity Of Vocational Attitudes In Adolescence; A. P.G.A.

Inquiry Series No. 2 American Personal And Guidance Association. New

Hameshire Avenue, Washington Dc.

Crites, J. O. (1971). Adolescence response style and the vocational development

inventory. Journal of Vocational Behaviour, 189200.

Crites, J. O. (1969). Vocational Psychology. The Study of Vocational Behaviour and

Development. New York: Mc Graw Hill.

Darely, J. G., & Hagenah, T. (1955). Vocational interest measurement, theory and

practice. University of Minnesota Press.

Denga, Daniel, I. (1988). Influence of traditional factors on career choice among

Nigerian secondary school youth: Cross cultural counseling. Journal of

Multicultural Counseling & Development, 16(1), 30-35.

Denga, D. I. (1986). The relationship between realism of Vocational preferences and

Vocational Maturity among Nigerian Secondary School Youths. Alvan School

of Educational Journal, 11(2), 118-128.

Dennis, K. W. (1988). Consistent occupational preferences, Vocational Maturity and

academic achievement. Journal of Vocational Behaviour, 7, 89-97.

Dick, Thomas, P., & Rallis, F. (1991). Factors and influences on high school students

career choices. Journal for Research in Mathematics Education, 10(1),53-60.

Dick, Thomas, P., & Rallis, F. (1991). Factors and influences on high school students

career choices. Journal for Research in Mathematics Education, 10(1), 53-60.

Dysinger, W. S. (1950). Maturation and Vocational guidance Occupations, 29, 198-

201.

Emmett Judith, D., & Carole, W. (1993). Career decision making factors in gifted

adults. Career Development Quarterly, 4(4), 350-366.

Etton, C. F., & Rose, F. A. (1967). Significance of personality in vocational choice of

college women. Journal of Counseling psychology, 14, 293-298.

Evans, P. D., & Moran, P. (1987b). Cardiovascular unwinding. Type A behaviour

pattern and locus of control. British Journal of Medical Psychology, 60, 261-5.

Farnham, Marynia F. (1951). The Adolescent; Harper & Brother; New York.



[79]

Festen, Arkin, R. M. Kolditz, T. A., Zoller, U., & Ben-Chaim, & Kolditz, K. K. (1999).

Adolescents emotional and behavioural correlates of type A behaviour, Anxiety,

Stress & Coping. An International Journal, 5(3), 205-215.

Forer, B. R. (1953). Personality Factor in occupational Choice. Educational and

Psychological Measurement, 13, 316-366.

Frank, J. D. (1935). Some Psychological determinants of the level of aspiration. Journal

of Psychology, 47, 34-38.

Freshmeet, G. R. (2005). Personality characteristics associated with academic

achievement among Adolescents (Doctoral Dissertation, The fielding Institute,

2000), Dissertation abstract International, 60, 3288.

Friedman H., & Both-Kewey, S.C. (1988). Validity of the Type A construct: A reprise

Psychological Bulletin, 104,381-384.

Friedman, M. D., & Rosenman, R. H. (1974). Type A behaviour and your heart, New

York: Knopf, Greewich, C. T. Fewcett Publication.

Frydenberg. E., & Lewis, R. (2002). Adolescent well-being : Building young people’s

resources. In E. Frydenberg (Ed.), Beyond coping, Meeting goals, vision, and

challenges. (pp.175-194)/New York: Oxford University Press.

Furnham, A., & linforrt, J. (1987). The Type A behaviour pattern and need to prove

oneself: a correlated study. Current Psychological Reviews an Research, 6, 125-

35.

Fvancevich, J. M., Mattesm, M. T., & Preston, C. (1982). Occupational stress Type A

behaviour and physical well being. Academy Management Journal, 25 (2), 313-

391.

Ganster, D. C., & Lovell, J. E. (1978). An evaluation of career development seminar

using Crites career maturity Inventory Journal of Vocational behaviour. 13, 172

– 180.

Garrison, Karl C. (1975) Psychology of adolescence; VIII edition, prentice Hall;

Englewood cliffs, New Jersey, 3-14.

Germeijsand, V. (2006). High School adolescents career decision making process:

Consequences for choice, implementation in higher education Department of

Psychology, Tiensestraat, Belgium.

Ginzber, E. (1951). Occupational choice, New York, Columbia University Press.



[80]

Gokhale, T. M. (1995). Vocational Maturity in teens. Available at:

WWW.artscounic.org.UK/Publications/docs/social exclusion review. doc.

Accessed, 23 November, 2003.

Grewal, J. S. (1980). Vocational Environment And Educational And Occupational

Choices; Agra, national psychological corporation.

Gribbons, W. D. (1966). Occupational Preferences And Measured Intelligence;

Vocational guidance quarterly, 14.

Grotvert, H. D., & Durrent, M. E. (1980). Occupational knowledge and career

development in adolescence. Journal of Vocational Behaviour, 17, 171-182.

Gruen, E. W., (1945). Level of aspiration in relation to personality factors in

adolescents child development, 16, 181-188.

Hartman, B. (1985). A path analytic model of career indecision. Vocational Guidance

Quarterly, 33, 231-240.

Heft, L., Toresen, C. E., Gray, K. K. & Widengeld, S. A. (1998). Emotional Correlated

of Type-A Behaviour in children and adolescents. Journal of Personality, 461-

675.

Heilburn, A. B. (1988). Personality underlying Motivation for Type-A Behaviour in

adolescence, 18(4), 435-450.

Henley, S., & Furnam, A. (1989). The Type A behaviour pattern and self-evaluation.

British Journal of Medical Psychology, 62, 51-59.

Holland, J. L. (1959). A Theory of Vocational Choice. Journal of counselling

psychology, 6, 35-44.

Holland, J. L., & Holland, J. E. (1977). Vocational indecision: more evidence and

speculation. Journal of Counseling Psychology, 24, 404-414.

Holland, J. L. (1963). Explorations of a theory of Vocational Choice. A four year

predication study. Psychological Report, 12, 537-594.

Hood, R. C. (1998). Identity, authenticity and Maturity. In T. R. Sarbin and K. E.

Scheibe (Eds.) studies in Social identity, New York, 339-357.

Horlock, J. E. (1954). The Psychology of Adolescence: Behaviour and Development,

London: Harper.

Jainins, I., & Mann, C. (1977). Decision Making: A Psychological Analysis of Conflict,

Choice and Commitment, New York: The Free Press.



[81]

Josselyn, Irene M. (1971). Adolescence; Harper & Row, New York.

Kaplan, D. M., and Brown, (1987). “The role of anxiety in career indecisiveness”.

Career Development Quarterly (Dec), 148-62.

Kathuria, M. (1974). An investigation of some personality determinants of vocational

maturity and career indecisiveness. Doctoral Dissertation, University of

Rajasthan.

Kaur, J. (2001). Mental health as related to Vocational Maturity of Male and Female.

Ph.D. (Edu.), Punjab University.

Kim, Eun, Young (1993). Career Choice among second generation Korean Americans:

Reflectors of cultural model of success. Anthropology and Education Quarterly,

24(3), 224-248.

Korner, A. G. (1946). Origin of impractical or unrealistic vocational goals. Journal of

Counseling Psychology, 10, 328-331.

Krishna, B. (1958) “Vocational and education ambitions of high school students, Vol.

3, 1.

Landis, P. H. (1952). Adolescence and youth: The process of Maturity. New York :MC

Graw Hill.

Lim, S. (1989). Career Maturity of adolescent, Journal of Education, 10(2).

Lockwood, W. V. (1958). Realism of Vocational preference. Personnel and Guidance

Journal, 37, 98-106.

Lopez, F. G., & Anderews, S. (1987). “Career Indecision: A family systems

perspective”. Journal of Counseling and Development (Feb): 304-7.

Lozzo, D. (1995). The relationship between Career aspiration and Career maturity of

undergraduate. Journal of Employment Counseling, 32(3), 132-140.

Mahone, C. H. (1960). Fear of failure and unrealistic vocational aspiration. Journal of

Abnormal and Social Psychology, 60, 253-261.

Maier, D., & Herman, A. (1974). The relationship of vocational decidedness and

satisfaction with dogmatism and self esteem. Journal of Vocational Behaviour,

8, 95-102.

Mangat, D. (1998). Relationship of Vocational Maturity with intelligence, Socio-

economic status and academic Achievement. Ph.D. Education Unpublished.



[82]

Maslach, J. (1996). Gender difference in type-A behaviour pattern. Psychological

Studies, 41.

Mathews, K. A., & Seigal, J. M. (1982). The Type A behaviour pattern in children and

adolescents: Assessment, development and associate coronary risk. In A Baum

and J. E. Singer (Eds). Handbook of Psychology and Health, 2, Issues in child

health and adolescent health (pp, 99-116). Hillsdale, N. J: Erlbaum.

Mehta, M. (1987). The Vocational Attitude Maturity Scale. An Unpublished Ph. D

Thesis Submitted to The University of Rajasthan, Jaipur 1977.

Mehta, M. (1987). Managing Vocational Information; Rupa Printers: Jaipur, 13-20.

Mehta, M. (2000). Adolescent Psychology: 1-4, Jaipur, Pointer Publishers.

Mehta, M. (1987). Manual For Vocational Attitude maturity Scale, National

Psychological Corporation, Agra.

Methew, E. (1971). Vocational Environment and Educational and Occupational

Choices, Agra: National Psychological.

Mojorbonks, K. (1993). Perceived parents Support for learning and aspirations for

Australian adolescents. Perceptual and Motor Skill, 77(3), 840-842.

Mukherjee, M., & Chatarjee, S. (1993). A comparative study of the factors affecting

academic achievement among four group of adolescents. Indian Journal of

Applied Psychology, 30(1), 30-38.

Nayak, T. W. (2002). What so unhealthy about personality Type-A? Can Type A to be

related with Vocational Maturity Progress and Prospects. Journal of Health

Psychology, 8, 349-86.

Nijahawan, H. K., & Choudhary, N. (1970). Anxiety achievement and Vocational

aspiration. Indian Journal of Psychology, 3, 211-217.

Omvig, C. P. (1995). The effect of Career education on career Maturity. Journal of

Vocational Behaviour, 7, 265-273.

Orcharchyn, C. A., Johsson, H., & Petzel, T. P. (1981). “Type A behaviour, academic

aspiration and academic success.” Journal of Personality; (49), 248-256.

Osipow, S. S. (1968). Theories of Career development, New York: Appleton Century.

Pasricha, P. (1976). Guidance and Counseling in Indian Education; NCERT

Publication, Publication Secretary.



[83]

Patton, W., & Creed, P. A. (2001). Developmental Issues in Career Maturity and

Career Decision Status. Career Development Quarterly. (More @ extropy.org)

Perron, J. et. al. (1998). A Longitudinal Study of Vocational Maturity and Ethnic

Identity Development; Journal of vocational behavior, 52,

409-424.

Price, V. A. (1982). Type A Behaviour Pattern; A model of research and practice:

New York academic press.

Ramalingm, P. (1998). Comparison of decision making styles among higher secondary

students. Indian Journal of Applied Psychology, 32 (1&2), 67-73.

Rana, R. (2000). Counseling Adolescents: A Psychodynamic Perspective Basingstok,

Macmillan.

Rao, K. N. (1985). Factors influencing the choice of courses at the higher Secondary

level, Indian Education Review, 74-77.

Roe, A. (1957). Early Determinant of Vocational Choice. Journal of Counseling

Psychology, 41, 212–217.

Roker, Michal, H. (1993). Adolescent identity and schools type. British Journal of

Psychology, 84(3), 297-300.

Sabbourin, S., & Coallier, J. (1991). The relationship between response style and

reports of career indecision. Measurement and Evaluation in Counseling

Development, 24(2), 69-79.

Schmieding, T. D., & Jwnson, M. L. (1996). Characteristics of Vocational Maturity in

the 21st century. Academy of Management Executive, 10(4), 17-27.

Sears, P. S. (1940). Level of aspiration in academically successful and unsuccessful

adolescents. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 35, 498-536.

Shalon, M. (1988). Type A behaviour and emotional responses to uncertainty.

Motivation and Emotion, 12(4), 385-398.

Sharma, P. (2003). Type A behavior: Time Urgency and Impatience can get-out of

hand. Dissertation, Mind Publication.

Sheppard, D. I. (1971). The measurement of vocational maturity in adults. Journal of

Vocational Behaviour, 1(4), 399-406.

Siegel, J. M. and Leitch, C. J. (1981). Assessment of The Type A behaviour pattern in

adolescents. Psychosomatic Medicine, 43(1), 45-56.



[84]

Slaney, R. B. (1984). Relation of Career indecision to changes in expressed vocational

interests. Journal of Counseling Psychology (Jul), 349-55.

Small, L. (1953). Personality Determinants of Vocational Choice; Psychological

Monographs, 67 (1, Whole No. 351).

Spence, Janet, T., Helmrich, Robert L., & Pred, Robers S., (1972). Impatience versus

achievement strivings in the Type A pattern: Differentials effects on students’

health and academic achievement. Journal of Applied Psychology, 72, 522-528.

Stenberg, L. (1985). Early temperamental antecedents adult Type A behaviour.

Developmental Psychology, 21(6), 1171-1180.

Super, D. E. (1957). The Psychology of Careers, New York, Herper and Row.

Tan, S. (1989). The Career Maturity of Singaporean adolescents. Journal of Education,

10(2), 40-50.

Tiedman, D. V., & Hara, R. P. (1963). Career development. Choice and adjustment.

Princeton, NJ: College Entrance Examination Board.

Tiwari, G. (1960). The effect of anxiety and aspiration on academic achievement of

adolescent boy and girls. Asian Journal of Psychology and Education, 6, 33-41.

Toker, Breier, A., Chamey, D.S, Heninger, G. R. Kubter, D. J., Spiker, D. G., Rossi,

A., Coble, P. A. et al. (1998). Choice related Professions and occupational

satisfaction. Vocational development among Bornu state secondary school

adolescents. Nigerian Journal of Education and Counseling, 1, 72-74.

Venkata, R. R. (1978). Source of influence in occupational choice of adolescent boys.

Psychological Studies. 23(2), 98-100.

Verma, S., & Singh, D. S. (1998). Perceived cause of behavior problems among Indian

adolescents. Psycho-lngna, 28(2), 151-158.

Vingali, E., Chapeland, V., & Fillips, A. D. (2005). Career exploration in adolescents:

The role of Anxiety and Fear of failing. Centre for Academic and Career

Counselling, France.

Vlasta, V. (1995). Some aspects of vocational maturation in adolescence. (http://

digitalcommons.wayne.edu).

Walsh, W. B., & Ospiow, S. H. (2005). Career Preferences, Self Concept and

Vocational Maturity; Research in Higher Education. (Springer link Journal

Article. htm).



[85]

Waston, Chreyl, D. (1997). Occupational Aspiration of black South African

adolescents. Psychological Report, 80(2),627-635.

Waston, W. E., & Bowler, M. France (2006). Type-A Personality characteristics and

the effect on Individual and Team Academic Performance. Journal of Applied

Social Psychology, 36(5), 110-128.

Wee, W. T. (2000). Vocational interest and career maturity of male high school

students talented in Math’s and science. Paper presented at 45th Annuals

convention of National Association for Gifted children, Louisville, KY, USA,

Nov. 11-18. 1998.

Weinstein, N. D. (1980). Unrealistic Optimism About Future Life Events. Journal of

Personality and Social Psychological; 39, 808–820.

Woodrich, D. (1998). Three ways to consider educational performance when

determining serious emotional disturbance. School Psychology Quarterly,

13(3), 228-246.

Wu, W. T. (2004). Vocational interest and Career Maturity of Male high school

adolescents talented in math and Science, Proceedings of National Science

Council, 10(3), 126-132.

Young Richarad, A. (1991). Personal construction of parental influences related to

career development. Journal of Occupational Psychology, 25, 183-199.

www.yahoo.com.

www.googal.com.



[86]

Relationship Between Selected Physical Fitness Components and Skill Performance of Boxing and Non-Boxing Players

Dr. Sanjeev Kumar Department of Physical Education

Govt Girls (P.G.) College Sirsaganj (Firozabad)

Introduction

Boxing is an excellent, artistic scientific, occupational and a most favourable art of self

defence. It is an excellent allround individual sports has been widely accepted as a highly

competitive as well as recreational game throughout the world. If is recognized as one of the

most breath taking and skill full sports of Olympics from ancient time.

This game provides wide opportunity for the development of strength, speed,

endurance agility and flexibility, intelligent question (l.Q.) and neuron muscular coordination

of all parts of the body by the various actions involved in it. Such as hitting, ducking bending,

stretching, sliding gliding, etc. and other monuments which call for balance and poise.

The sport of boxing requires a physical conditioning which develop endurance,

strength, Agility, Flexibility, Power Muscular, Strength and Neuron muscular coordination all

of which must be integrated to achieve the optimum skill performance in the ring from each

individual.

Statement of the Problem

“Relationship Between Selected Physical Fitness Components and Skill Performance

of Boxing and Non-Boxing Players” In Nagpur District.

Delimitation

1. To study was delimited to only 25 boxing players and 25 non-boxing players.

2. The age was delimited to 18 to 25 years.

3. The study was delimited to male players.

4. The study was delimited to Nagpur District.

1. The Study was delimited to five physical fitness such as Strength, Speed, Endurance,

Flexibility and Co-ordination.

Limitation

1. For the proposed research work in Boxing players participation in boxing competitions’

Nagpur District only.

2. For the proposed research work in non-boxing players in difference colleges student in

Nagpur City.



[87]

Hypothesis

1. Boxing players of Nagpur District, Physical Fitness is up to level.

2. There is difference between Physical Fitness of Nagpur District Boxing Players and Non-

Boxing Players.

3. There is difference between sports and Other Achievement of Boxing and Non-Boxing

players.

4. There is difference between Boxing and Non-Boxing players physical condition is

different.

Selection of Subjects

Twenty Five Boxing Players and Twenty Five Non-Boxing Players were be selected as

subject on the study. Only those Boxing players were be selected who has represented Nagpur

District Level and Non-boxing players represented Nagpur City colleges. The age of subjects

ranged between 18 to 25 years. The selection were be made of random selection procedure.

Design of the Study

The design of the study was single group design.

Statical Procedure Employed

To know the difference between physical fitness performance and skill performance

level of Boxing & Non-boxing players, ‘t’ ratio were be calculated from the testing of

Hypothesis the level of 0.5,

Scoring of Data

The Subjects score of physical fitness test given before and after the completion of

experimental period constituted the score for the purpose of the study.

Reliability of Data

The reliability the test score was established by test retest method, for this purpose 10

subjects were randomly, electod from each group and the test-retest method was employed on

25 randomly selected subjects, the selected 25 were administered 50 mt. Dash Test, Shuttle Run

test, Standing Broad Jump, Test Modified Sit and Reach Test and retest was given after an day

group ‘r’ was computed by using produced moment method. The ‘r’ value is given in Table.



[88]

TABLE – 1 Reliability Test of Physical Fitness

S. No. Test Items Co-efficient of Co-relation ‘r’

1 50 mtr Dash 0.20 2 6 x 10 Shuttle Run 0.20 3 Sergeant Jump 0.10 4 Sit and reach test 0.30

Significant at 0.5 level of confidence.

LEVEL OF CONFIDENCE

For testing the difference between the means the level of confidence was set at C.05.

TABLE-2

Showing the Mean S.D., Mean diff. and ‘t’ ratio of Boxing

Players and Non-Boxing Players

S.N. Test Item M1 M2 SD1 SD2 Mean Diff ‘r’ ratio 1 Speed 7.09 7.65 0.33 0.39 .556 5.5* 2 Agility 7.44 11.18 0.47 3.78 3.74 4.89* 3 Explosive P 7.48 6.76 0.55 0.70 0.72 4.04* 4 Flexibility 9.04 7.28 0.78 0.89 1.76 7.44*

Graph No. 1 A Comparison of the Mean, S.D., Mean Diff. and ‘t’ ratio of Boxing Players and Non-

Boxing Player

Conclusion

In the light of this study the following conclusions drawn:

1. Boxing players have better talent than the Non-boxing players.

2. Boxing players have better skill the Non-boxing players.

3. Non-boxing players are better in Gargent Jump than Sits Reach Test the Boxing

Players.

4. Speed can be improve by taking part in selected physical conditioning exercises.

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

Speed Aglity Explosive P. Flexibility7.09 7.44 7.43 9.04

7.65 11.18 6.76 7.28



[89]

5. Agility can be improved by taking part in selected physical conditioning exercises.

6. Strength can be improved by taking part in selected physical conditioning exercises.

7. Power can be improved by taking part in selected physical conditioning exercises.

8. Flexibility can be improved by taking part in selected physical conditioning exercises.

References

1. Journal of sports & sports science, Vol. 26(2)2003 pp 17-21

2. B. Nakhostin Rooni and F Rahmani-Nia, Internation journal of Fitness, 404 Shivalik

Apartments Opp. Air Gandhi Road Gwalior 2006, p-7

3. Hardayal Singh., Science of sports Training, D.V.S. Giri Nagar Kalkagi, New Delhi

1997, p-85.

4. Araajo Claudio Girl Soares De, (2004) “An Flexibility Assessment Method” Clinica de

medicina do Edercicio Rio De Janerio

5. UPP A.K. Physical/ Fitness How to develop, Tata Me Graw hall publishing company

Ltd., New Delhi.

6. Aroon Purie : India Today Malocalm. Mistry (Impact) 2006

7. James E. Hornak., Measurement and evalution in physical Education : John wilys sons.

Inc 1979.

8. Devinder K. Kansal., Test and Measurement in sports and Phy. Edu. D.V.S. Giri Nager

Kalkaji, New Delhi. 1996

9. google.com



[90]

Different Themes in the Plays of Rabindra Nath Tagore

Manju Singh Research Scholar (English)

Himalayan University, Arunchal Pradesh

The analysis of different themes in the plays of Tagore, reveals that

in spite of apparent diversity he followed a fixed pattern in the exposition

of theme. There is usually a linear exposition of the thought. In his theory

of poetry, Aristotle admits the importance of the ‘recognition’ and

‘discovery’ however in Tagorian dramatic world ‘recognition’ and

‘discovery’ have been replaced by ‘ignorance’ and ‘realisation’. In his

plays theme marks a process of progfess from the stage of ignorance to the

terminal point of realisation. Sanayasi from the stage of romantic illusion

of ‘separate peace’ comes to the realisation of attaining joy of infinite

through finite. Sudarshna who has no vision to visualise the King in her

Dark Chamber (inner consciousness) come to the realisation that her union

will be possible only after she has rid herself of her ego, pride and

arrogence. In Post Office it is not the realisation of Amal but of Doctor

and Madhav who later on realise that external inhibitions cannot claim the

spirit that is infinite. In The Cycle of Spring the realisation comes to the

king of the mystery of the cycle of seasons corresponding with the cycle of

life. In Natir Puja the dedication of Nati brings an awarness to the King,

lokeshwari and Ratnaveli about the real nature of Buddha’s gospel of

renunciation. Even the plays Karmphal and Grahaparvesh reflect the

idea of Kealisation. Mani, only after being separated from Jatin realises the

gravity of the situation and her responsibility towards Jatin. Satish in



[91]

Karnphal after the death of his father comes to the awarness that onehas

to bear the consequences of one’s own doings.

The fact that Tagore was not a traditionalist and made significant

literary innovations to suit his objective and attitute, has been proved

through the thematic appreaisal of his plays. He not only adopted a wide

range of themes reflecting diverse shades of wife but also created diverse

modes of expression and presentation suitable to the nature of themes.

Hence he was the worried to classify his plays in a unified patterns of Acts

and scenes. Obviously, his plays cannot be appreciated in terms of

Aristotelian formula comprising presentation, exposition, climax,

denoument and catastrophe. He begins the play Sanayasi with soliloquy

and one entire act is devoted to it. It was unique effort and without it, it

would have been difficult for him to project the perverted ego of Sanyasi.

Had he been depicted through direct narrationhe would have failed to

create proper effect. In the play Cycle of Spring Tagore presents an

exceptionally long prologue. The idea of prologue echoes the tradition of

‘prastavana’ of Sanskrit drama. However, to make it an integral part of the

central play through allegory to some extent, reflects the concept of plays

within play. In the plays like Chandalika, Sacrifice, Grahapravesh,

Natir Puja and Muktadhara where the author’s emphasis is on social

criticism, there is direct exposition of idea without the intervention of any

stage direction and other such parphernalia. In The King of the Dark

Chamber, his attempt to present an abstract theme has no precedence in

the entire range of English literature. To manage the events from the very

beginning on symbolical plane through the creation of abstract character

‘the king’ is certainly a testimony of the author’s exceptional

imagination.Similalrly in Red Oleanders the image of Yakshapuri and



[92]

King’ that is a part of an elaborate allegorical symbolism is the inevitable

necessity of the theme. In spite of the diversity of approach one unified

impression that springs out of the study is that Tagore seems to evolve a

point of view technique for the exposition of the theme. Most of his plays

have underlying unified pattern; he presents an idea and then creates

different groups of characters representing diverse attitudes towards the

central idea. Sometiames they are presented as individuals and sometimes

they appear as ‘groups’ in which individual identity carry no significance.

However they are not less significant than Hardys philosophic party and

Shakespeare’s sub plots. This sort of approach besides a few exceptions,

gives a rare magnificance to him as a dramatist.

Reference :

Various plays of Tagore.



[93]

The Shades of Marital Life with Special Reference to Morrison’s ‘Sula’

Amit Nelson Singh

Research Scholar Raja Balwant Singh College, Agra

Abstract

Toni Morrison needs no introduction; besides being a Noble

Laureate Morrison has her own aura in the fields of Literature. She has

bagged several prizes and awards and has worked in different positions as

an Editor, a Professor and an International feminist writer for the women

suffering women. She is Voice for the voiceless, a light in the darkness for

the females protagonists. Morrison paints such vivid Shades of Marital life

in her novel however; her second Novel titled Sula has something more

than the extraordinary. In her novel she has the black family life in

abundance. Throughout the novel Morrison comes as a delineator of

Women’s psychology. It would be right to call Morrison as a liberator of

Afro-American Women Protagonists. Sula is a masterpiece; uniquely

interwoven about different relationships especially the relationships based

of the bond of love. Sula is the girl around who the story revolves. Finally

Morrison reveals the Shades of Marital life between Sula, Jude and Nel.

This trio is an amalgam full of sincerity, sexual deceit, slang, suffering,

sorrow, suppression, subjugation, sting, suspicion and seclusion.

Keywords: Racial Oppression, Subjugation, Suppression, Protagonist,

Persecution, Afro-American.

Toni Morrison is considered the most pioneering Campion among

all feminist writers. Being an Afro-American she has proved herself in the

international arena as an icon of the Age through her writings she projects



[94]

the complex theme of relationships.She goes on inside the Afro–American

women has it has never been portrayed more elusively in the past. She

paints such a grim picture of the protagonists, thatit would be right to call

Morrison as a liberator of Afro-American Women Protagonists. Sula is a

masterpiece; uniquely interwoven about different relationships especially

the relationships based of the bond of love. Sula is the girl around who the

story revolves. Finally Morrison reveals the Shades of Marital life between

Sula, Jude and Nel. This trio is an amalgam full of sincerity, sexual deceit,

slang, suffering, sorrow, suppression, subjugation, sting, suspicion and

seclusion.

Morrison's Sulahas life in abundance; there is the black family life

of women and their husbands. In the novel there are apparently five

married couples, namely, Nel and Jude Greene, Helene and Wiley Wright,

Hannah and Rekus, BoyBoy and Eva, Pearl and her husband. These

married couples reflect different shades of marriage relationships and the

challenges they face cover a great deal of challenges people have faced in

marital relationships. Some of these married couples enjoy a congenial and

amiable married life while some others lead an unpleasant life.

The first shade is the reference to the family life of Helene Wright

and her loving husband Wiley Wright. Both of them are quite affectionate

and dependable to each other. There is no reference in the novel to point

out that they are combative and petulant or unfaithful to each other. The

dispersed passages in the novel witness their pleasant married life.

In the first part of the novel, there is much about their pleasant and

jubilant married life.

Wiley Wright was a seaman (or rather a lakeman, for he was a ship’s

cook on one of the Great Lakes lines), in port only three days out of every



[95]

sixteen. He took his bride to his home in Medallion and put her in a lovely

house with a brick porch and real lace curtains at the window. His long

absences were quite bearable for Helene Wright, especially when after

some nine years of marriage, her daughter was born. 1

Helene Wright was the daughter of a Creole whore. Despite being a

daughter of a prostitute,She has strong values in her and lives a decent

family life, Inspite of the immorality struggles and meanness experienced

by her mother Helene was provided a strong ethical framework by her

grandmother. There are many portions in the novel that make it quite clear

that Helene was a affectionate and trustworthy woman to her husband and

had nothing of her whore mother in her.

The next shade of marital life is the relationship of Hannah and her

husband Rekus. The married life of Hannah and Rekus is cordial one, but

unfortunately a few years after their marriage, Rekus passes away leaving

behind his young, rutty and sexy wife Hannah to be for many other men.

Hannah, having lost her husband, finds herself vulnerable to the attractions

of other men and the consolations, which key being. She being young is

ill-equipped to handle the pressures faced by a young widow.

Hannah is Eva’s daughter and Sula’s Mother. She is a young widow

who settles down permanently with her one-legged mother Eva and her

infant daughter Sula. As regards her relationship with Rekus, she loves

him body and soul, and keeps herself in decorum of a dedicated wife. It

was her love which kept Rekus happy and mirthful,Rekus loved his wife

and the young daughter Sula. The following narration serves as an

confirmation of her happy but short married life.

Hannah married a laughing man named Rekus who died when their

daughter Sula was about three years old, at which time Hannah moved



[96]

back into her mother’s big house prepared to take care of it and her mother

forever. 2

The next shade of marital life is an unpleasant married life of Eva

and BoyBoy. Eva marries BoyBoy and bears his three children- Hannah,

the eldest; Eva whom she names after herself, but calls her Pearl, and son

named Ralph whom she calls Plum. Eva spends five years with BoyBoy.

Neither of the two is faithful. BoyBoy is a devilish and quarrelsome

husband who is fond of keeping mistresses. Boyboy, even while staying

with his wife, kept chasing other women and transgressed all bounds of

decency in flurting with them and making sexual relationships, constant

womanizing degenerated is nature and he got addicted to drinking and use

of abusive words. Eva represents the average woman who is ready to stand

by her husband so long as he is faithful to her. When the situation becomes

unbearable she decides to break away with her forever and ever.

There are many incidents that reflect the unpleasant married life of

Eva and BoyBoy.

After five years of a sad and disgruntled marriage. BoyBoy took off.

During the time they were together he was very much preoccupied with

other women and not home much. He did whatever he could that he like,

and he liked womanizing best, drinking second and abusing Eva third.

When he left in November, Eva had $1.65, five eggs, three beets and no

idea of what or how to feel. 3

Eva’s losing one leg for the insurance money in order to bring up

her children is the result of BoyBoy’s negligence indifference and

immature behavior. If BoyBoy had been faithful to her and taken care of

her and the children, Eva would never have lost her legs. Eva’s sufferings

are a reflection of the trauma experienced by the women, who have cruel



[97]

and abusive husbands. The indifference of these husbands often kills the

joy of their married life and their children remain their only consolation.

She is a mighty a mother figure. She knows how to look after her children

and can sacrifice her leg. Moreover, she can kill her own son. Then there is

the relationship of Eva( Eva Peace’s second daughter whom she calls

Pearl) and her husband. There is only one sentence attributing to Pearl’s

marriage. It makes us feel and think that Pearl married life with her

husband is an average named life. “Pearl married at fourteen and moved to

Flint, Michigan, from where she posted frail letters to her mother with two

dollars folded into the writing paper. 4

The next noteworthy shade of married life in the novel is of Nelan

Jude Greene. Nel, no doubt, is Sula’s close friend, but at the same time,

she seems to know the value of marriage in life. Nel is Sula’s chum to

whom Sula is more than anybody else in the world as she later

acknowledges. She is Wiley Wright and Helene’s only daughter who is

brought up with due care and attention. In the beginning everything goes

on well between Jude and Nel. Nel believes that her sincerity towards her

husband Jude is all that she has earned, She tries to stay with her husband

like a good wife. Jude is not only her husband but also her master and God.

While Sula on the other hand has seduces several men. She considers that

women are not object to be used and thrown; rather she used men and

throws them after use. They prove themselves to be absolutely faithful to

each other. But the faithfulness has to tested by the temptations and

attractions which will test the strength of their married life. The

wantonness of Nel’s close friend Sula posed such a great threat. Later in

the novel, Jude falls a prey to Sula’s immoral self-indulgence and in this



[98]

way loses her faith in him.As regards Nel, throughout the novel she comes

as a dedicated wife who does not condemn or abuse her husband.

Again there is another evidence to witness the happy married life of

Nel and Jude.

Nel and Jude, who had been the stars all during the wedding, were

forgotten. Finally as the reception melted into a dance, a feed, a gossip

session, a playground and a love nest. For the first time that day they

relaxed and looked at each other, and liked what they saw. They began to

dance, pressed in among the others, and each one turned his thoughts to the

night that was coming on fast. They had taken a housekeeping room with

one of Jude’s aunts (over the protest Mrs.Wright, who had rooms to spare,

but Nel didn’t want to make love to her husband in her mother’s house)

and were getting restless to go there.

As if reading her thoughts, Jude leaned down and whispered, “Me

too.”Nel smiled and rested her check on his shoulder. The veil she wore

was too heavy to allow her to feel the core of the kiss he pressed on her

head. When she raised her eyes on him for one more look of reassurance,

she saw through the open door a slim figure in blue gliding with just a hint

of a strut, down the path toward the road. One hand was pressed to the

head to hold down the large hat against the warm June Breeze. Even from

the rear Nel could tell that it was Sula and that she was smiling; that

something deep down in that litheness was amused, It would be ten years

before they saw each other again, and their meeting would be thick with

birds. 5

But the sad saga of Nel and Jude’s married life is the one when in

1940 Nel is left unattended and secluded to make struggles in the

disadvantageous circumstances of her life. Nel, without Jude, is not only



[99]

emotionally shattered but also financially broke she had to struggle her

way through all kinds of odd jobs to meet the needs of her children and

herself.

Because Jude’s leaving was so complete. The full responsibility of

the household was Nel’s. There were no more fifty dollars in brown

envelopes to count on, so she took to cleaning rather than fret away the

tiny seaman’s pension her parents lived on. And just this past year she got

a better job working as a chamber maid in the same hotel Jude had worked

in. The tips were only fair, but the hours were good- she was home when

the children got out of school. 6

She considered Sula like her sister but rather Nel has been robbed of

her only possession Jude. The relationship between the characters as

representative of an intrinsic conflict experienced by black women : the

conflict between the desire to rebel and the urge to conform. Morrison

herself states in the novel :

Because [Nel and Sula] had discovered.....that they

were neither white nor male, and that all freedom and

triumph was forbidden to them, they had set about

creating something else to be. 7

The novel brings out the mental attitude of the Afro–American

women who cannot adjust to a normal conventional life like Nel nor are

they accepted in the so called modern stride of an independent woman like

Sula. Both lifestyles are not suitable and infact hurt each other. Sula hurts

her best friend by having an affair with her husband. The soul of a Black

woman has been mirrored to us with unbearable intensity the truth seems

to merge into fantasy as Sula watches with interest her mother burning to



[100]

death. This brings out the soullessness hardheartedness and the

inexpressiveness of emotions of the Afro–American women. While

reflecting upon Sula, one can almost visualize an African slave woman

passively watching the slave driver killing her father, raping her sister or

selling her mother. The exploitation in marital relationships over the

centuries cannot be washed away in year this is what Morrison is trying to

tell us in her unique subtle style.

References

1. Toni Morrison, Sula. New York: Knopf, 1993, p.17

2. Ibid, p.41

3. Ibid, p.32

4. Ibid, p.41

5. Ibid, p.85

6. Ibid, p.138-139

7. Toni Morrison, Sula.London:Vintage,1988,p.52



[101]

Impact of Various Factors on Land Use in District Aligarh

Dr. Abha Bishnoi

The utilization of land resources depends on a number of factors which

interact with each other. Although this makes it difficult to isolate any one factor

with a view to measure its impact on the prevailing land use pattern, it is never

the less useful to assess the relative importance and role of various factors in a

given area at different stages of aconomic and cultural development. Mehdi

Raza, in accordance with D.S. Chauhan, classified these factors into three

groups: (i) Physical, which include site, topography, climate and soil etc., (ii)

Economic, which include monetary system, credit and capital, trade, commerce,

technology etc., and (iii) Institutional which include cultural environment, social

and collective action, customs and tradition, attitudes, value system and legal

system.1 J. Singh and S.S. Dhillion have divided the physical determinants of

agricultural patterns into four groups : (i) Terrain, (ii) Climate, (iii) Soils, and

(iv) Water resources.2 By combining the factor of drainage and water into one,

an attempt is being made here to give a factorial analysis, of the changing land

use pattern in the district.

Climate

Of all the geographical factors to which mankind is subjected, climate

seems to be the most potent and persistent. The crop producing capacity of an

area depends primarily upon the climatic conditions and soil properties. In fact

climate determites the range of crops which a region can economically produce.

Crops cannot escape the vagaries of climate. More-over crop plants are less



[102]

study in comparison to natural vegetation and therefore need considerable

protection end supervision of the cultivator. The climate of Aligarh district may

be classed as sub-tropical continental monsoon climate in which tne following

characteristics are found : (1) a seasonal rhythm, (ii) a hot summer season, (iii) a

cool winter with deficient rainfall, (iv) a great annual range of temperature (v) a

dry climate except for the three months of July, August and September, and (vi)

a variable, unreliable and insufficient rainfall which is concentrated over a

period of about 90 days with several intervening spells of dry days.

In Aligarh district temperature is not a limiting factor in the growth of

crops. The average temperatures during the clodest months of January and

December are recorded at 14.7°C and 16.0°C respectively, while a temperature

of 6°C has been deemed to be the crucial air temperature at which active

germination and growth begin to take place with most of the crops. So there is

no limit to tna growing season.

The difference in tne temperature of the coldest and the hottest month in

Aligarh comes to 19.5°C. This wide range of temperature in the district may be

ascribed to its location in the great Ganga plain which has a continental type of

climate. This wide range enables the district to produce a variety of crops. The

incidence of frost during Rabi season sometimes checks the growth of standing

crops in the field. Its ill-effect on cereal crops and oil-seed crops is generally

negligible, but some vegetable crops like potato are sometimes affected by it.

Crops grow well within a certain range of temperature. Thus, as observed

by Majid Husain, crops like rice, cotton and chillies are killed by near-freezing

temperatures of two or three days duration. The minimum temperature for wheat

is 5°C, for maize about 9°C, and for rice about 20°C. Cotton maize and tobacco

require warm nights for maximum growth and development. Certain crops like



[103]

potatoes and sugar beets stors carbohydrates more rapidly in the cool nights.

Peaches, mangoes, plums etc., complete fruition during the warm season and

their trees can survive low and freezing temperatures in winters3.

In Aligarh district rainfall and irrigation are the main determinants in the

choice or crops. High temperatures during the larger part of the year lead to

significant loss of moisture from the soil surface and crop-foliage through

evaporation and transpiration, but at the same time they provide adeuate

sunshine and warmth for growth and ripening.

There are considerable variations in rainfall from year to year. In his

study of the agricultural geography of Haryana Jasbir Singh opines that : "Below

700 mm rainfall water is a definite limiting factor and areas with a mean annual

rainfall of 500 mm to 700 mm must be regarded as marginal ones."4 With an

average annual rainfall of 772.5 mm Aligarh remains a little away from the limit

suggested by Jasbir Singh, but during years of drought a part of the district

sometimes comes under this category of “marginal” area. As such drought-

resistant and drought-escaping food-grains like barley and bajra are grown.

In Aligarh district the summer monsoon rainfall decreases from east to

west, and more so from north-east to south-west, while the winter cyclonic

rainfall decreases from north to south. Even during the rainy season there are

long spells of dry days. Since most of the rainfall is received in a a few days, the

actual total and averages do not give a very useful picture. In fact it is the

concentration and intansity of rainfall during this wet season that is more

important.5

Reference :



[104]

1. D. S. Chauhan, studies in the Utilization of Agricultural Land, p. 25,

quoted in M. Raza, Land Reforms in U.P., The Geographer, vol.XV,

Number, 1968, p.41

2. J. singa and S.S. Dhillon, Agricultural Geography, 1987, pp. 100- 170.

3. M. Hussain, Agricultural Geography, 1979, p. 25.

4. J. Singh, An Agricultural Geography of Haryana, 1976, p.48..

5. M. Hussain, Variability of Rainfall in Relation to Agriculture, N.G.J.I.,

Vol. XVI, Part I, March, 1970, p. 74.



[105]

Effect of Health Status during Pregnancy on Pregnant Women in Agra City

Deepti Singh,

Prof. Neeta Chopra

Abstract:

A women’s health plays the important role in her pregnancy. This study was

conducted on 200 pregnant women (100 women each from government and private

hospital ) in Agra city through multistage stratified sample technique. The mean height,

weight, body mass index were 157.58 cms, 54.58 kgs, 22.09 in the present study. The

mean weight of the pregnant women before pregnancy Ist, IInd and IIIrd trimester was

56.77 Kgs., 61.52 Kgs. and 68.06 Kgs respectively. The mean total gained weight from

conception to end of pregnancy was 13.48 Kgs. Statistically, significant difference in

mean height, mean weight, mean body mass index, mean weight in Ist, IInd, and IIIrd

trimester, mean weight gained during pregnancy were observed between the pregnant

women at government and private hospital (p<0.05).

Introduction:

Good nutrition is important for every pregnant women, as it is the key for a

healthy pregnancy. A well balanced diet before & after conception contributes to

healthy pregnancy. Pregnant women are the only source of nutrition for her baby health

and well-being. It is the time of increased nutritional needs both to support the rapidly

growing fetus and her body needs including the preparation is lactation after the baby’s

birth.

It is a very crucial time and it becomes all the more necessary for the mother to

take care of herself and there arises a need for consuming healthy well balanced

nutrition. It is very important period in which if mothers are not taking proper diet,

effect both the mother and the coming newborn child. All pregnant women must gain

weight, fetal growth and their maternal health depend on it. A pregnancy weight gain of

11kg to 15kg is for women who begin pregnancy at normal weight for height and are

carrying a single fetus. Poorly nourished mothers give birth to small infants whose

neonatal, antenatal and infant mortality rates alarming.



[106]

Objectives:

To assess the health status of the pregnant women

Methodology:

Multistage stratified random sampling technique was used for selecting the

mothers as sample for the present study. The sample comprised of 200 pregnant women

belonging to urban area of Agra District from one government and one private hospital

A questionnaire was formulated to elicit information regarding the antenatal care

during pregnancy among pregnant women in relation to certain selected variables.

Statistical analysis:

After collecting the required information from the subjects, the schedules were

coded numerically and data were classified into simple and complex tables. Keeping in

view the objectives of the study, the data was analyzed by applying percentage,

arithmetic mean, standard deviation, t-test, correlation coefficient t-test for correlation

coefficient, chi square test for drawing the conclusion.

Result and discussion:

The collected data were analysed and discussed in the following tables:

Table 1: Distribution of subjects in government and private hospital according to their height

Height in cms. Government

Hospital Private

Hospital Total

No. % No. % No. % 140–150 18 18.0 6 6.0 24 12.0 150–160 67 67.0 48 48.0 115 57.5 160–170 6 6.0 31 31.0 37 18.5 170–180 9 9.0 15 15.0 24 12.0

Total 100 50.0 100 50.0 200 100.0 Mean 155.81 159.36 157.58

SD 7.87 7.47 7.88 t 3.272

p <0.05

Above table 1 reveals the dist r ibut ion o f the subjects according to

place o f delivery and height . Out of 200 pregnant women, major it y o f

them (57.5%) were having the height 150-160 cms., fo llowed by 18.5%



[107]

having the height 160-170 cms. and the minimum (12.0%) each were

having the height 140-150 cms. and 170-180 cms. respect ively. Among

the 100 subjects who had their delivery at government hospital, major it y

of them (67.0%) were having the height 150-160 cms., fo llowed by

(18.0%) having the height 140-150 cms and minimum (6.0%) were

having the height 160-170 cms; while among 100 pregnant women at

pr ivate hospital, major it y o f them (48.0) were having the height 150-160

cms., fo llowed by 31.0% having the height 160-170 cms. and minimu m

(6.0%) were having the height 140-150 cms.

The mean height o f 200 subjects was 157.58 cms. in the present

study. The mean height of pregnant women at pr ivate hospital was more

(159.36 cms.) as compared to pregnant women at government hospital

(155.81 cms). Stat ist ically, significant difference in mean height was

observed between pregnant women at pr ivate and government hospitals

(t=3.272, p<0.05). Khalid et .al. (2007) found that the mean height of the

selected subjects was 154.9 cms which was slight ly less as compared to

finding o f the present study.

Table 2 : Distribution of subjects in government and private hospital according to their weight

Weight in kgs. Government

Hospital Private Hospital Total

No. % No. % No. % 30–40 6 6.0 5 5.0 11 5.5

40–50 39 39.0 17 17.0 56 28.0

50–60 31 31.0 42 42.0 73 36.5

60–70 12 12.0 28 28.0 40 20.0

70–80 12 12.0 8 8.0 20 10.0

Total 100 50.0 100 50.0 200 100.0

Mean 52.75 56.40 54.58

SD 9.83 9.20 9.70

t 2.726 p <0.05



[108]

Above table 2 highlight s of dist r ibut ion of the subjects according

to place o f delivery and weight . Out of 200 pregnant women, major it y o f

them (36.5%) were having the weight 50-60 kgs. , fo llowed by (28.0%)

having weight 40-50 kgs. and minimum (5.5%) were having the weight

30-40 kgs.Among 100 subjects who had their de livery at government

hospit al, ma jor it y o f them (39.0%) were having the weight 40-50 kgs. ,

fo llowed by 31.0% having weight 50-60 kgs. and the minimum (6.0%)

were having the we ight 30-40 kgs. ; whereas among the 100 pregnant

women at pr ivate hospit al, major it y o f them (42.0%) were having the

weight 50-60 kgs. , fo llowed by (28.0%) having weight 60-70 kgs. and

the minimum (5.0%) were having the weight 30-40 kgs.

The mean weight of 200 subjects was 54.58 kgs. in the present

study. The mean weight o f pregnant women at pr ivatehospital was more

(56.40 kgs.) as compared to pregnant women at government hospita l

(52.75 kgs.). Stat ist ically, significant difference in mean we ight was

observed between pregnant women at pr ivate aand government hospita l

(t=2.726, p <0.05). Khalid et .al. (2007) found that the mean weight o f

the selected subjects was 70 kgs. which was higher as compared to

finding o f the present study.

Table 3 : Distribution of subjects in government and private hospital according to their body mass index

Body Mass Index Government

Hospital Private Hospital Total

No. % No. % No. % <18.5 25 25.0 17 17.0 42 21.0

18.5–24.9 64 64.0 75 75.0 139 69.5 25.0 & Above 11 11.0 8 8.0 19 9.5

Total 100 50.0 100 50.0 200 100.0 Mean 21.67 22.51 22.09

SD 2.99 2.61 2.81 t 2.116

p <0.05



[109]

Above table 3 highlight s of dist r ibut ion of the subjects according

to place o f deliver y and body mass index. Out of 200 pregnant women,

major it y o f them (69.5%) were having the body mass index 18.5-24.9,

fo llowed by 21.0% having body mass index below 18.5 and minimum

(9.5%) were having the body mass index 25 and above.Among 100

subjects who had their deliver y at government hospital, ma jor it y o f them

(64.0%) were having the body mass index 18.5-24.9, fo llowed by 25.0%

having the body mass index below 18.5 and the minimum (11.0%) were

having the body mass index 25 and above; while among the 100 pregnant

women at pr ivate hospit al, major it y o f them (75.0%) were having the

body mass index 18.5-24.9, fo llowed by 17.0% having the body mass

index below 18.5 and the minimum (8.0%) were having the body mass

index 25 and above.

The mean body mass index o f 200 subjects was 22.09 in the

present study. The mean body mass index of pregnant women at pr ivate

hospit al was more (22.51) as compared to pregnant women at

government hospit al (21.67). Stat ist ically, significant difference in mean

body mass index was observed between pregnant women at pr ivate and

government hospital (t=2.116, p <0.05). Ali et .al (2014) reported the

similar result s as they found in their study that 47% of pregnant women

had normal pre-gestat ional BMI while, 22% were overweight , 17%

obese, and only 12% of pregnant women were under weight . Saxena

(2002) observed that overall 23.3 percent women were having body mass

index (<18.5 Kg/m2).



[110]

Table 4: Distribution of subjects in government and private hospital according to weight in first trimester.

Weight in First Trimester (kgs.)

Government Hospital Private Hospital Total

No. % No. % No. % 40–50 35 35.0 13 13.0 48 24.0 50–60 40 40.0 51 51.0 91 45.5 60–70 11 11.0 14 14.0 25 12.5 70–80 14 14.0 22 22.0 36 18.0 Total 100 50.0 100 50.0 200 100.0 Mean 54.85 58.70 56.77

SD 9.84 9.25 9.74 t 2.851

p <0.05

Above table 4 highlights t he dist r ibut ion of subjects according to

place o f delivery and weight in fir st trimester. Out of 200 pregnant

women, major it y o f them (45.5%) were having the weight of 50-60 kgs.

in Ist t r imester, fo llowed by 24.0% having the weight o f 40-50 kgs. and

the minimum (12.5%) were having the weight o f 60-70 kgs. in Ist

t rimester.Among the 100 subjects who had their delivery at government

hospit al, ma jor it y o f them (40.0%) were having the weight of 50-60 kgs.

in Ist t r imester, fo llowed by 35.0% having weight o f 40-50 kgs. and the

minimum (11.0%) were having the weight of 60-70 kgs. in Ist t rimester;

while among the 100 pregnant women at private hospital, major it y o f

them (51.0%) were having the weight of 50-60 kgs. in Ist t rimester,

fo llowed by 22.0% having weight of 70-80 kgs. and the minimum

(13.0%) were having the weight of 40-50 kgs. in Ist t rimester.

The mean weight was 56.77 kgs. in Ist t rimester among 200

subjects in t he present study. The mean weight was more among

pregnant women at pr ivate hospit al (58.70 kgs.) as compared to pregnant

women at government hospital (54.85 kgs.). Stat ist ically significant



[111]

difference in mean weight in Ist t rimester was observed between the

pregnant women at government and pr ivat e hospit al (t=2.851, p < 0.05).

Table 5 : Distribution of subjects in government and private hospital according to weight in second trimester

Weight in Second Trimester (kgs.)

Government Hospital

Private Hospital Total

No. % No. % No. % 40–50 15 15.0 6 6.0 21 10.5 50–60 54 54.0 41 41.0 95 47.5 60–70 7 7.0 23 23.0 30 15.0 70–80 24 24.0 27 27.0 51 25.5 80–90 0 0.0 3 3.0 3 1.5 Total 100 50.0 100 50.0 200 100.0 Mean 59.56 63.47 61.52

SD 10.14 9.09 9.82 t 2.871

p <0.05

Above table 5 showed the d ist r ibut ion of subjects according to

place o f delivery and weight in second t r imester. Out of 200 pregnant

women, major it y o f them (47.5%) were having the weight of 50-60 kgs.

in IInd t rimester, fo llowed by 25.5% having weight of 70-80 kgs. and

the minimum (1.5%) were having the weight of 80-90 kgs. in IInd

t rimester. Among the 100 subjects who had their delivery at government


in IInd t rimester, fo llowed by 24.0% having the weight of 70-80 kgs.

and minimum (7.0%) were having the weight of 60-70 kgs. in IInd

t rimester; while among the 100 pregnant women at pr ivate hospital,

major it y o f them (41.0%) were having the weight o f 50-60 kgs. in IInd



[112]

t rimester, fo llowed by 27.0% having the weight o f 70- 80 kgs. and

minimum (3.0%) were having the weight of 80-90 kgs. in IInd t rimester

The mean weight in IInd t r imester was (61.52 kgs.) among 200

subjects in the present study. The mean weight in IInd t r imester was

more among pregnant women at pr ivate hospit al (63.47 kgs.) as

compared to pregnant women at government hospital (59.56 kgs.).

Stat ist ically, significant difference in mean weight in IInd t r imester was

observed between the pregnant women at government and pr ivate

hospit al (t=2.871, p <0.05).

Table 6: Distribution of subjects in government and private hospital according to weight in third trimester

Weight in Third Trimester (kgs.)


No. % No. % No. % 40–50 3 3.0 1 1.0 4 2.0 50–60 25 25.0 10 10.0 35 17.5 60–70 45 45.0 49 49.0 94 47.0 70–80 13 13.0 18 18.0 31 15.5 80–90 14 14.0 22 22.0 36 18.0 Total 100 50.0 100 50.0 200 100.0 Mean 65.51 70.61 68.06

SD 10.88 9.76 10.65 t 3.489

p <0.05

Above table 6 indicates the dist r ibut ion of subjects according to

place o f deliver y and weight in IIIrd t rimester. Out of expect ing

mothers, major it y o f t hem (47.0%) were having the weight of 60-70 kgs.



[113]

in IIIrd t r imester, fo llowed by 18.0% having weight of 80-90 kgs. and

the minimum (2.0%) were having the weight of 40-50 kgs. in IIIrd

t rimester. Among 100 subjects who had their delivery at government


in IIrd t r imester, fo llowed by (25.0%) having the weight o f 50-60 kgs.

and the minimum (3.0%) were having the weight of 40-50 kgs. in IIIrd

t rimester; while among the 100 pregnant women at pr ivate hospital,

major it y o f t hem (49.0%) were having the weight o f 60-70 kgs. in IIIrd

t rimester, fo llowed by 22.0% having the weight of 80-90 kgs. and the

minimum (1.0%) having the weight of 40-50 kgs. in IIIrd t rimester.

The mean weight in IIIrd t rimester was 68.06 kgs. among 200

subjects in the present study. The mean weight in IIInd t r imester was

more among pregnant women at pr ivate hospit al (70.61 kgs.) as

compared to pregnant women at government hospital (65.51 kgs.).

Stat ist ically, significant difference in mean weight in IIInd t rimester

was observed between the pregnant women at government and pr ivate

hospit al (t=3.489, p <0.05).

Table 7: Distribution of subjects in government and private hospital

according to total weight gained during pregnancy

Total Weight Gained in Third Trimester (kgs.)


No. % No. % No. % 4–8 4 4.0 0 0.0 4 2.0

8–12 35 35.0 15 15.0 50 25.0 12–16 40 40.0 50 50.0 90 45.0 16–20 19 19.0 35 35.0 54 27.0 20–24 2 2.0 0 0.0 2 1.0 Total 100 50.0 100 50.0 200 100.0 Mean 12.76 14.21 13.48

SD 3.18 2.50 2.98 t 3.585

p <0.05



[114]

Above table 10 ind icates the dist r ibut ion of subjects according to

place o f de livery and total weight gained dur ing pregnancy. Out of

expect ing mothers, major it y o f them (45.0%) were having weight gained

of 12-16 kgs. dur ing pregnancy, fo llowed by 27.0% having weight

gained o f 16-20 kgs. and the minimum (1.0%) were having the weight

gained o f 20-24 kgs. dur ing pregnancy.Among 100 subjects who had

their deliver y at government hospital, major it y o f them (40.0%) were

having weight gained o f 12-16 kgs. dur ing pregnancy, fo llowed by

(35.0%) having the weight gained o f 8-12 kgs. and the minimum (2.0%)

were having the weight gained o f 20-24 kgs. dur ing pregnancy; while

among the 100 pregnant women at pr ivate hospital, major it y o f them

(50.0%) were having the weight gained of 12-16 kgs. dur ing pregnancy,

fo llowed by 35.0% having the weight gained o f 16-20 kgs. and the

minimum (15.0%) having the weight gained o f 8-12 kgs. dur ing

pregnancy.

The mean weight gained dur ing pregnancy was 13.48 kgs. among

200 subjects in the present study. The mean weight gained dur ing

pregnancy was more among pregnant women at pr ivate hospital (14.21

kgs.) as compared to pregnant women at government hospit al (12.76

kgs.). Stat ist ically, significant difference in mean weight gained dur ing

pregnancy was observed between the pregnant women at government and

pr ivate hospit al (t =3.585, p <0.05). Paxton et .al. (2009) also observed

that , on the basis o f reported pre pregnancy weight , the women gained

11.5 Kg from week 14 to 37, for a total average gain o f 13.6 Kg.

CONCLUSION:

On the basis o f the results obtained from the present study it can

be concluded that most of the women were having the height 150-160

cms., weight 50 - 60 kgs and body mass index 18.5 - 24.9. The mean

weight of the pregnant women before pregnancy, I st , IInd and IIIrd

t rimester was 56.77 Kgs., 61.52 Kgs. and 68.06 Kgs respect ively. The

mean total ga ined we ight from concept ion to end of pregnancy was



[115]

13.48 Kgs. Thus a good health care of the mother dur ing her

pregnancy has a posit ive effect on the outcome o f pregnancy.

BIBLIOGRAPHY: 1. Saxena, Vartika (2002). Nutr it ional status of rural pregnant woman.

Ind. Jour. of Commu. Medi. , 60, 56-61

2. Ali, F. , Thaver, I. , Khan, S.A. (2014). Assessment o f dietar y

diversit y and nutr it ional status of pregnant women in Islamabad.

Pakistan Health Services Academy, Journal o f Ayub Medical Co llege

Abbot tabad, 26(4), 506-509.

3. Elhance, D.N. (2008). Fundamentals of statistics. Kitab Mahal, Allahabad: 3-11.

4. Khalid, S.A., Ibrahim, A.B., Mohammed, A. and Mohammed, A.

(2007). A study of mater ia l dietary int ake dur ing pregnancy in

Riyadh. Saudi Arabia. Journal o f Family and Community Medic ine,

14(1), 9-13.

5. Paxton, Anne. and Lederman, A. Sally (2009). Anthropometr ic

equat ions for studying body fat in pregnant women, ret rieved from :

http:/www.ajen.org



[116]

A Comparative Study of Dietary Practices of Hypertensive and Non-Hypertensive Young Adults in Agra District

Priyanka Sharma Prof. Neeta Chopra

Abstract:

A result presented here more consumption of non-vegetarian foods could

be the causative factors of hypertension. Although after the diagnosis of the

disease the hypertensive subjects opted for restricted dietary Practices like

restricting in salt, saturated fat intake. Statistically significant difference

regarding amount of unsaturated fat was observed between hypertensive and

non-hypertensive subjects. (x2 =32.372, df 4, pl 0.05). Thus it can be concluded

that the dietary factor was positively associated with hypertension.

Introduction:

Hypertension is a major health problem in India according to World

Health Organization (WHO) global health statistics 23.10% men and 22.60%

women above 25 years old suffer from hypertension.

Hypertension is high blood pressure is the force of blood pushing against

the walls of arteries as it flows through them. Arteries are the blood vessels that

carry oxygenated blood from the heart to the body’s tissues. As blood flows

through arteries it pushes against the inside of the artery walls. The size of small

arteries is also affected by the blood pressure. When the muscular walls of

arteries are relaxed or dilated the pressure of the blood flowing through them is

lower than when the artery walls narrow or constrict.

Dietary habits are the main hypertensive risk in those days.Many faulty

food habits are the major risk for hypertension like: excess sugar, excess fat etc.

Excess Sugar:

Excess sugar promotes triglycerides production in the liver and intestine.

It also promotes production of VLDL without increase in cholesterol or protein



[117]

changes. Fructose and sucrose are more triglyceridemic than glucose and starch.

Large amount of sugars stimulate the production of insulin which is lipogenic.

Excess fat:

Saturated fat and cholesterol are positively correlated with plasma

cholesterol concentration and risk of cardio vascular disease. High intake of

saturated fat increases plasma cholesterol and promotes formation of atheroma.

Saturated fat reduces the formation of LDL receptors of VLDL receptors.

Animal fats like egg yolk, butter meat and fat have high amount of saturated

fatty acid. Margarine, ghee, hydrogenated fat and coconut oil also contain high

amount of saturated fat.

Objective:

To assess the nutrient intake among hypertensive and non hypertensive

subjects.

Methodology:

Multistage stratified systematic random sampling technique was used for

the selection of the sample for the present study.

Out of 86 districts in U.P., one district namely Agra was selected

purposively in the first stage as it was convenient to the researcher. Agra district

is divided in to rural and urban areas. Out of these areas, urban area was selected

randomly in the second stage. Agra urban consists of twenty seven hospitals, out

of them one hospital namely Shree Gopal Hospital, one OPD namely cardiology

was selected randomly in the fourth stage. About 1500 patients aged 21-40 years

and having hypertension visiting in the cardiology OPD. Out of these patients,

10% of them were selected systematically in the fifth stage. Thus, 150

hypertensive patients aged 21-40 years of both sex were the unit of information

in the present study.

In non-hypertensive group having the same age and sex that of study

group 150 subjects were selected. Thus 300 respondents (150 respondents



[118]

suffering from hypertension and 150 non-hypertension) formed the unit of

information for the present study.

Dietary Survey:

The basic aim of a dietary is to assess the diet of population groups or

individuals in order to obtain essential information regarding the nutrient intake

level. The 24 hours recall method for 3 consecutive days was used to assess the

consumption of cooked foods in the present study. This is the most extensively

used method of dietary survey and is often employed using on interview. The

subjects were asked to report the food items consumed along with amounts of

their raw ingredients. These were recorded in standard volumetric and later

converted to raw weight of foods and the nutritive value was calculated using the

food table as recommended by ICMR.

Procedure of Data collection:

Having identified with the respondents, the next step was to interview

them. The investigator gave her introduction and explained the purpose of the

present study to establish the report with the respondents. To avoid errors in the

study researcher conducted a pilot study before collecting the actual sample.

The data for the present study was collected from hypertensive and non-

hypertensive young adults of “Agra” City. The study was based on dietary

pattern of young adults.

The subjects were interviewed regarding general information of

hypertensive and non-hypertensive young adults.

Results and Disussion:

Table 1 : Distribution of hypertensive and non-hypertensive subjects according to food habit

Food Habit Hypertensive Non-hypertensive No % No %

Vegetarian 112 74.67 108 72.00 Non-Vegetarian 38 25.33 42 28.00 Total- 150 100.00 150 100.00

x2 = 0.273, df = 1, P>0.05



[119]

Above table highlights the distribution of hypertensive and non-

hypertensive subjects according to food habit. Among the hypertensive

respondents, majoring of them (74.67%) were vegetarian and remaining

(25.33%) were non-vegetarian while among the non-hypertensive respondents,

majority of them (72.00%) were vegetarian and remaining (28.00%) were non-

vegetarian.

Statistically, insignificant difference regarding food habit was observed

between hypertensive and non-hypertensive subjects (x2=0.273, df=1, P>0.05).

Table 2 : Distribution of hypertensive and non-hypertensive subjects according to frequency of non-vegetarian food consumed

Frequency of Non-Vegetarian food

consumed

Hypertensive Non-Hypertensive

No % No % Daily 2 5.27 0 0.0

Weekly 2 5.27 6 14.29

Fortnightly 22 57.89 17 40.48

Monthly 12 31.57 19 45.23

Total 38 100.00 42 100.00

Above table shows the distribution of hypertensive and non-hypertensive

subjects according to frequency of non-vegetarian food. Among the hypertensive

respondents who took non-vegetarian food, majority of them (57.89%) took

fortnightly, followed by 31.57% monthly and the minimum (5.27%) each

consumed daily and weekly respectively, while among the non-hypertensive

respondents who took non-vegetarian food, majority of them (45.23%) took

monthly, followed by 40.48% fortnightly and the minimum (14.29%) weekly.



[120]

Table 3 : Distribution of hypertensive and non-hypertensive subjects according to number of meals consumed per day

Number of meals consumed per day

Hypertensive Non-Hypertensive No % No %

Two 10 6.67 14 9.33

Three 46 30.67 63 42.00

Four 59 39.33 50 33.34

Five 35 23.33 23 15.33

Total- 150 100.00 150 100.00

x2=6.544, df=3, P<0.05

Above table reveals the distribution of hypertensive and non-hypertensive

subjects according to number of meals consumed per day. Among the

hypertensive respondents, majoring of them (39.33%) took four meals/day,

followed by 30.67% three meals/day and the minimum (6.67%) took two

meals/day. While among the non-hypertensive respondents, majority of them

(42.00%) consumed three meals/day, followed by 33.34% four meals/day and

the minimum (9.33%) consumed two meals/day.

Statistically, significant difference regarding number of meals per day

was observed between hypertensive and between hypertensive and non-

hypertensive subjects (x2=6.544, df = 3, P<0.05)

Table 4 : Distribution of hypertensive and non-hypertensive subjects according to regularity in meals consumed

Regularity in

meals consumed


No % No %

Regular 96 64.00 102 68.00

Irregular 54 36.00 48 32.00

Total- 150 100.00 150 100.00

x2= 4.087, df = 1, P<0.05



[121]


subjects according to regularity in meals consumed. Among the hypertensive

respondents, majority of them (64.00%) were regular in taking their meals of

remaining (36.00%) were irregular in their meals consumption, while among the

non-hypertensive respondents majority of them (68.00%) were regular in taking

their meals and remaining (32.00%) were irregular in their meals consumption.

Statistically significant difference regarding regularity in meals consumption

was observed between hypertensive and non-hypertensive subjects (x2=4.087, df

= 1, P<0.05).

Table 5 : Distribution of hypertensive and non-hypertensive subjects according to frequency of high salty food consumed

Frequency of high salty food consumed


No % No %

None 75 50.00 72 48.00

Daily 39 26.00 26 17.34

Weekly 30 20.00 26 17.33

Fortnightly 6 4.00 26 17.33

Total- 150 100.00 150 100.00

x2= 15.447, df = 3, P<0.05

Above table expresses the distribution of hypertensive and non-

hypertensive subjects according to frequency of high salty food consumed.

Among the hypertensive respondents majority of them (50.00%) did not

consume high salty food, followed by 26.00% who consumed high salty food

daily and minimum (4.00%) consumed high salty food fortnightly. While among

the non-hypertensive respondents, majority of them (48.00%) did not consume

high salty food and remaining (17.33%) each consumed high salty food daily,

weekly and fortnightly respectively, statistically, significant difference regarding



[122]

frequency of high salty food was observed between hypertensive and non-

hypertensive subjects (x2=44.977, df = 3, P<0.05)

Table 6 : Distribution of hypertensive and non-hypertensive subjects according to amount of high salty food consumed per day

Amount of high salty food consumed per day (gm)

Hypertensive Non-Hypertensive No % No %

1-50 10 13.33 47 60.26

51-100 20 26.67 12 15.38

101-150 21 28.00 13 16.67

151-200 21 28.00 6 7.69

201-250 3 4.00 0 0.00

Total- 75 100.00 78 100.00


hypertensive subjects according to amount of high salty food consumed per day.

Among the hypertensive respondents, majority of them (28.00%) each consumed

101-150 gm. And 151-200 gm high salty food per day respectively, followed by

26.67% who consumed 51-100 gm high salty food per day . While among the

non-hypertensive respondents, majority of them (60.26%) consumed 1-50 gm

high salty food per day, followed by 16.67% who consumed 101-150 gm per day

and the minimum (7.69%) consumed 151-200 gm high salty food per day.

Table 7 : Distribution of hypertensive and non-hypertensive subjects according to amount of total salt consumed per day

Amount of total salt consumed per day (gm)


No % No %

1-5 0 0.00 2 1.36

6-10 46 31.29 70 47.62

11 and above 103 68.66 78 52.00

Total 150 100.00 150 100.00



[123]

Above table indicates the distribution of hypertensive and non-

hypertensive subjects according to amount of total salt consumed per day.

Among the hypertensive respondents, majority of them (68.66%) consumed total

salt of 11 gm and above per day and the remaining (31.29%) consumed total salt

of 6-10 gm per day.

While among the non-hypertensive respondents, majority of them

(52.00%) consumed total salt of 11 gm and above per day, followed by 47.62%

who consumed total salt of 6-10 gmper day and the minimum (1.36%)

Consumed total salt of 1-5 gm per day.

Table 8 : Distribution of hypertensive and non-hypertensive subjects according to amount of saturated fat consumed per day

Amount of saturated fat consumed per day (gm)


No % No %

None 13 8.67 8 5.33

1-10 35 23.33 36 24.00

11-20 55 36.67 72 48.00

21-30 30 20.00 23 15.33

31-40 17 11.33 10 6.67

41 and above 0 0.00 1 0.67

Total- 150 100.00 150 100.00


subjects according to amount of saturated fat consumed per day. Among the

hypertensive respondents, majority of them (36.67%) consumed 11-20 gm

saturated fat per day, followed by 23.33% who consumed 1-10 gm saturated fat

per day and the minimum (8.67%) did not consume saturated fat per day.


(48.00%) consumed 11-20 gm saturated fat per day, followed by 24.00% who



[124]

consumed 1-10 gm saturated fat per day and the minimum (0.67%) consumed 41

gm saturated fat and above per day.

Table 9 : Distribution of hypertensive and non-hypertensive subjects according to amount of unsaturated fat per day

Amount of unsaturated

fat per day (gm)


No % No %

1-10 29 19.33 70 46.67

11-20 60 40.00 44 29.33

21-30 22 14.67 22 14.67

31-40 15 10.00 8 5.33

41 and above 24 16.00 6 4.00

Total- 150 100.00 150 100.00

x2 = 32.372, df = 4, P<0.05


hypertensive subject according to amount of unsaturated fat consumed per day.

Among the hypertensive respondents, majority of them (40.00%) consumed 11-

20 gm unsaturated fat per day, followed by 19.33% who consumed 1-10 gm

unsaturated fat per day and the minimum (10.00%) consumed 31-40 gm.

Unsaturated fat per day.


(46.67%) consumed 1-10 gm. Unsaturated fat per day, followed by 29.33% who

consumed 11-20 gm. Unsaturated fat per day and the minimum (4.00%)

consumed 41 gm unsaturated fat and above per day, statistically significant

difference regarding amount of unsaturated fat was observed between

hypertensive and non-hypertensive subjects.

(x2 = 32.372, df = 4 P<0.05)



[125]

Bibliography

1. Gopalan, C. Sastri, R.B.V. and Bala Subramanian S.C. (1999). Nutritive

value of Indian foods. ICMR, NIN, Hyderabad, 47-92.

2. Gopaldas T. and Seshadari, S. (1987). Nutrition monitoring and assessment.

Oxford University press, Delhi. 103-105.

3. Singh, R. (2012). Study on hypertensive young adults. Journal of Human

health, 17, 232-236.

4. Jay, P., Allen, T. and Bergman, P. (2011), Hypertensive and high blood

pressure. American Heart Association, 23, 821-824.

Conclusion:

“A comparative study of dietary practices of hypertensive and non-

hypertensive young adults”was conducted in Agra district. On the basis of the

results obtained from the present study, the following conclusion can be drawn.

The findings showthat more consumption of non-vegetarian foods could

be the causative factor of hypertension. The diet of hypertensive subjects

contained more calories, fat, low in fibre, more of non-vegetarian foods and also

consumes more number of meals and incurred more money on foods as compare

to non- hypertensive subjects. Although after the diagnosis of the disease most

of themchanged their life style and opted for restricted dietary practices like

restricting in salt, fat intake, less of fried and spicy foods, less intake of non-

vegetarian foods and more of fibre intake.

It can be concluded that the dietary factors were positively associated

with hypertension. Therefore, it is suggested that even after the onset of

hypertension, the condition can be controlled through appropriate and good

dietary practices.



[126]

Socio - Political Conditions of Indian Life since the middle of the Twentieth Century

Dr. Alkesh Singh, Agra

There was a wide spectrum of ideologies for the regeneration of Indian society

which was badly dislocated after the partition. At one end were the Gandhian who

believed in a non-violent revolution, leading to decentralization, relatively self-

sufficient village communities without an artificial proliferation of wants and minimal

reasonce to modern technology: The socialists both within and outside the Congress

argued that the removal of inequalities was as important as growth and stood for land

reforms, greater public ownership and strict regulation of the private sector as a. means

of achieving greater equality.

After independence, the Congress Party under the leadership of Jawaharlal

Nehru attempted a compromise between the above mentioned view points– a

compromise which leaned towards socialism in declared intent but afforded the

conservatives ample opportunities to resist implementation of socialist policies.

The partition of India adversely affected the economy of India, particularly in

the matter of foodgrains and agricultural products. West Pakistan provinces were

surplus in wheat and rice as 68% of irrigated areas of undivided India went to Pakistan.

The divided India experienced an unprecedented shortage of foodgrains. Almost a

similar situation prevailed in regard to livestock since the better milk yielding cattle

were located in Sind and West Punjab.

The cotton textile industry in India also faced a very unhappy situation. While

most of the textile mills were situated in India, the raw material was produced in

Pakistan.

As far as the general industry was concerned, India’s resources were largely

unimpaired. Almost all the resources like coal, iron ore, manganese and mica were



[127]

located in India. All the heavy chemical plants, all paper mills, glass factories, cement,

paint and matches factories were located in India. The shortage of food stuff was a big

problem before the government of free India. The extensive imports of food stuff

created a serious problem of balance of payments in the trade.

The problems which India faced after independence were not absolutely new.

They had grown during the British rule. Jawaharlal Nehru wrote in 1946:

Nearly all our problems today have grown during British rule

and as a direct result of British policy, the prices, the minority

problem, various vested interests, foreign and Indian, the lack of

industry and the neglect of agriculture, the extreme backwardness in

the social services, and above all, the tragic poverty of the people.

For the rapid economic regeneration of India and upgradation of national

defense, and the elimination of poverty and unemployment, the need for rapid

industrialization with a special emphasis on the development of basic and heavy

industries was felt without ignoring agriculture which was the main stay of the people.

After independence, India faced three major problems–rehabilitation of

refugees, severe food shortage, and inflationary pressure on economy. The first Five

Year Plan (1951-56) accorded the highest priority to agriculture including irrigation

and power projects. During this period, The Bhakra-Nagal Dam project, and the great

power and irrigation projects of Damodar Valley and Hira Kund Valley were started. A

special emphasis was laid on the development of basic industries, not ignoring the

small scale industries and the cottage industries.

During the Nehruvian era, the Indo-Pak and the Indo-China relations became

hostile. During this period, Kashmir became an apple of discord between India and

Pakistan. In 1950, China gave a jolt to India by forcibly occupying Tibet.

Both India and China had suffered from Imperial rule. Hence Jawaharlal Nehru

believed that both the countries with common experience of exploitation at the hands of



[128]

the colonial powers and common problems of under-development and poverty would

join hands to earn a respectable place in the world. Both the countries subscribed to the

policy of Non-alignment and Non-aggression. When Nehru visited China in 1954, he

not only recognized China’s sovereignty over Tibet but also signed the Panchsheel, i.e.

five principles of co-existence. But Nehru's ambition of Asian leadership and world

reputation collapsed when in October, 1962, China launched an attack and over ran

many Indian posts in NEFA.

All the major economic, political military and social events taking place during

the Nehruvian era have been reflected in the first four novels of Arun Joshi in one way

or the other.

The Foreigner was written by Arun Joshi against the economic background

prevailing in India in the fifties during the first and second Five-year plans. It was

during this period that Nehru laid a special emphasis on the development of basic

industries, and setting up of institutions of engineering and technology in public sector

all over India. An incentive was also given to the private sector in opening industries in

India. The government of India encouraged students to go abroad for the study of

engineering and technology.

In The Foreigner, Khemka and his son, Babu project the very image of the

fifties of India. Mr. Khemka who was the Managing Director of his company

manufactured air-conditioners in New Delhi and had a collaboration with an American

company. He had been to New York. After coming back from there, he decided to send

his son, Babu to America to make a man of him. His training in engineering and

technology would have been of great help to him but his son died in a car-accident in

America leaving a wide vacuum for his father and his sister, Sheila who were

responsible for running their factory. When Sindi Oberoi came to Delhi, he was offered

a job as an assistant manager in Khemka’s company. But an income-lax petty official

who was a trade unionist and leftist was very much against Khemka because he thought

that Mr. Khemka was a tax-evader and an enemy of the proletariat, Following is a very

interesting dialogue between Sindi Oberoi and the income–tax man:



[129]

“Don’t pretend that the rich people are the only honest

people in the world,” The income- tax man said darkly. “I

know a thing or two about them. If I were the minster, this

whole office would be wound up and handed over to the

proletariat.”

The tax man further said:

“India is working towards a new age, Mr. Oberoi... ...An age in

which each man will be equal to another.... It is only people like you

and Mr. Khemka who are holding revolution.”

The income tax man called Mr. Oberoi a “bourgeois” and the enemy of the

“proletariat”. The leftists and the trade unionists divided the society of those days in

two parts: the bourgeois and the proletariat under the impact of Marxist ideology. There

developed some trouble in Mr. Khemka’s company. There was no sale for months. The

money transaction was almost choked off. The creditors began to queue up for their

payments. Khemka’s employees got worried when they heard that Mr. Khemka was put

under arrest and there was no chance for his acquittal and his company would be taken

up by some banker sooner or later.

The struggle between the capital and labour began. The capitalists were charged

of exploiting the labour. The income-tax man labelled charges against Mr. Khemka

saying:

It is you who have swindled those miserable wretches in rags

who push carts on your streets and die at twenty five. It is you who

have been telling lies and fabricating documents just so that you could

air-condition this ostentatious house and throw gigantic parties for the

horde of jackals who masquerade as your friends.

Billy Biswas in Joshi’s second novel. The Strange Case of Billy Biswas was

also sent to the United States to study engineering but he soon gave up engineering in



[130]

favour of his first choice of Anthropology and was already half way through Ph.D. The

novel is set against the background of cultural and educational exchanges taking place

in India and the U.S.A. Billy Biswas belonged to a high sophisticated family. The

author writes about his ancestry:

Billy’s family had originally come from Bengal. His

grandfather had one time been the Prime Minister of a famous

princely state in Orissa. His father after completing his law studies at

Inner Temple, had mostly practiced law at Allahabad and Delhi. At the

time when we were in America, he was a judge of India’s Supreme

Court.

Based on the local colour of Bundelkhand region, the novel is a story of horror,

suspense, mystery and romance. It highlights a clash between the West and the East

with regard to their civilizations and cultures. Billy is seen first in New York attending

a mid-Western university for a summer course at Columbia. Though he comes of a very

high family, he is crazy by temperament, and in America, he lives in slums with Indians

and negroes. Though he was educated in England and speaks English with a British

accent, he has deep roots in the wild culture and association with the negroes in

America. The author writes about Billy’s interest in the primitive man:

What impressed me even more was his passionate

involvement with his subject....... It also gradually dawned upon

me that it was around his interest in the primitive man that his

entire life had been organized.

When Billy was asked why he was drawn to Anthropology, he replied that he

always wanted to read the books of Anthropology and visit the places described in

them. He said:



[131]

All I want to do in life is to visit the places they describe,

meet the people who live-there, find out about the aboriginals

of the world.

Billy had a vague feeling which made him uncomfortable. Tuula once said:

Billy feels something inside him, but he is not yet sure.

Sometimes he is afraid of it and tries to suppress it.

It was a great force, urkraft – a primitive force. He was afraid of it and tried to

suppress it. But it was stronger in him than in any other person. It could explode any

time. It was on account of the dominance of this force in him that he was not cut off

from his roots in spite of his long stay in America. The narrator tells us about his

alienation from his own culture:

In spite of a somewhat longish stay in America, neither

of us had lost our roots in India, or in the city of Delhi, nor did

we suffer much, except for passing spells of loneliness, from

that alienation that many other Indians seemed to be burdened

with

Billy came in contact with Meena Chatterjee who belonged to a Bengali family

and he got married to her but neither his parents nor his wife could please him. He

could not find peace in the surroundings in which he lived. The letters he had written to

Tuula revealed the abnormal state of his mind arising out of the cultural clashes in his

mind. He found peace in the woods of Maikala Hills and among the tribals there. He

lived there as a primitive pilgrim and remained a stranger to the civilized world.

Thus, in spite of the beginning of industrialization and mechanization in India

during the Nehruvian period, India and her culture still retained their virginity and



[132]

primitiveness. Dr. Har Mohan rightly remarks about Billy’s journey from Boston to the

Satpura Hills:

From Boston to Delhi has been journey from alienation

to arrival, from selfishness to sacrifice, from an anomic

responsible - to himself to a member of mankind, from being to

becoming

The Apprentice which is the third novel of Arun Joshi is focused on the

shameful defeat of India in the Indo-China war of 1962 and disillusionment with

freedom and corruption in high offices rampant in the age of Jawaharlal Nehru. In spite

of the treaty of non-aggression, peaceful existence, and Panch Sheel, China invaded

India in NEFA in 1962 and occupied the frontier posts causing humiliation and shame

to India. Ratan Rathor who is the protagonist of the novel tells the boy that during the

Chinese aggression, people talked of Chinese betrayal and the honour lost by India after

her defeat in the war:

I imagine they spoke of Chinese perfidy, and of honour. The

government, I understand, is determined to defend our honour

....What I learnt was that it was difficult to retrieve honour, once it is

lost.

India lost the war with China in 1962 on account of corruption in the

government departments. Ratan Rathor after taking bribes from Sheikh alias Himmat

Singh cleared the purchase of defective weapons for the army stores. He tells the boy:

The Sheikh had a big pile of military materials lying in

Bombay which I had rejected because they were no good. He

wanted the Minister and the Secretary to look into the case.

They sent him to me. I refused to pass them. The Sheikh, then,



[133]

offered me, a cut, a bribe. This bribe, for some obscure reasons,

I accepted.

Ratan Rathor, the protagonist of the novel has learned from his experience that

his father’s sacrifice and martyrdom for the sake of his country’s freedom were of no

practical value for him and his mother. What his father had left for him after his

martyrdom was starvation, a tubercular widow and patriotic fervour with no funds.

What the mother of Ratan Rathor had learned was not patriotism but the importance of

money:

It was not patriotism but money, she said, that

brought respect and brought security. Money made

friends. Money succeeded where all else failed. There

were many laws. She said, but money was the law unto

itself.

Ratan Rathor recalls how his father was forgotten after a year from his death

and how he was humiliated, rejected and jeered at in hunting job. He felt that even after

independence, people were not free. What the people of India had inherited from

English men was a new kind of slavery:

We thought we were free. What we had, in fact,

was a new slavery. Yes a new slavery with new masters,

politicians, officials, the rich, old and new. Swindlers in

fancy cars.

Ratan Rathor presents a picture of Delhi after independence in the Nehruvian

era:



[134]

They are all the same, these government colonies. Acres of mortar, an

occasional park. Box upon box of identical flats, yellow by day, colourless at night.

Trees that die as samplings, a dispensary short of medicines, library without books....

In the post-independence period, the high-ups got more interested in deals than

in the reconstruction of their country. Money became their prime motto, not the service

of the people. Ratan Rathor tells the boy:

Deals, deals, deals, my friend, that is what the world

runs on......It is not the atom or the sun or God or sex that lies

at the heart of the universe; it is Deals, Deals.

Thus, the social, political and military events taking place in the post-

independence India during the Nehruvian era form the core of the novel.

The Labyrinth which is the fourth novel of Arun Joshi is once again set in the

period when India was on the way of industrialization and mechanization. The

protagonist of the novel, Som Bhaskar is no different from Sindi Oberoi, Babu Rao

Khemka and Billy Biswas. Like Sindi and Billy, he got his education in foreign

universities and learnt the way of modern life. His father himself was a great scientist

and industrialist. After the death of his father, he became a millionaire overnight at the

age of twenty-five. After returning from Harvard, he became the Managing Director in

his plastic factory. He was a name to reckon with in the industrial world of Bombay.

His primary work was to grab and annex failing industries to his industrial empire. But

in spite of having wealth, good education and family life, he felt some want in his life;

His urge to have a new experience in every walk of life misled him and deviated him

from the right track. His sudden encounter with Anuradha bewildered him and he fell a

victim to her magical charm. Aftab Rai who was Som’s double was a plastic

manufacturer but not good at handling business. Under the bewitching fascination of

Anuradha, Som started neglecting his family and business and was drawn by suicidal

impulse. Som’s wavering mind adversely affected his business.



[135]

The City and the River which is the fifth and last novel of Arun Joshi is a

political fable. This is a novel that is truly a parable of the times. It startlingly presents a

real vision of every day politics. The novel unfolds the story of the Grand Master who

rules the city by the river and is determined to become an unchallenged king. Things

move smoothly till a strange prophecy is made by the palace Astrologer. The learned

man predicts the crowning of a new king in place of Grand Master. The appeal of the

novel lies in the skilful handling of the course plotted by intrigue and corruption in high

places:

The City and The River is a book of a great historical and political interest

because it is set against the background of Internal Emergency imposed by Mrs. Indira

Gandhi in 1975 to save her throne from the wrath of people. The dictatorial and

autocratic policies of Mrs. Indira Gandhi led to the people's rebellion against her rule.

The rallies and demonstrations organized against her by Jay Prakash Narayan forced

Mrs. Indira Gandhi to declare a state of Internal Emergency in the country.

Consequently, the fundamental rights of citizens were suspended and the press was

gagged. The freedom of, thought and speech was withdrawn; the leaders of the political

parties were thrown behind the bars; the family planning was imposed on people

against their wish, and an atmosphere of terror and fear was generated in the country.

Mrs. Indira Gandhi was led by her son, Sanjay Gandhi and a yogi, Dhirendra

Brahmchari. In the general Elections of 1977, Mrs Indira Gandhi was thrown out of

power by the people of India and democracy was restored in the country. Indira Bhatta

and Suja Alexander write about the political nature of the theme of the novel:

The novel indirectly pictures the events of the

emergency regime in India and the malpractices resorted to by

the political powers of the time. In the novel, the Grand Master

and his subordinates employ malpractices in order to reach the

apex of political powers.

Indira Bhatta and Suja Alexander further write:



[136]

Arun Joshi satirizes the way in which the political

leaders struggle and make use of the wrong means in order to

guard the seat of power and position through the novel. He

pictures the malpractices employed by Grand Master for the

safe keeping of his power by taking the aid of guns, lacer

weapons, police and army.

Thus, The City and The River offers a powerful comment and satire on the

social and political scenario of the seventies during the rule of Mrs. Indira Gandhi with

a prophecy that oppression would continue and the oppressed would continue to

struggle against it. A close study of all the five novels of Arun Joshi unfolds the fact

that these novels cover a span of about forty years from 1950to 1990. It was a period

when the Congress Party was led by Jawaharlal Nehru and her daughter, Mrs. Indira

Gandhi. Both Pandit Nehru and Mrs. Indira Gandhi ruled the country for about thirty

seven years with the exception of about two years when the Janta Partya came in power

after 1977.

References:

1. Nehru, Jawaharlal : The Discovery of India: P. 284.

2. Joshi, Arun : The Foreigner: Orient Paper Backs: New Delhi: 2010. P. 38.

3. Ibid. P. 38.

4. Ibid. P. 180.

5. Arun, Joshi : The Strange Case of Billy Biswas: Orient Paperbacks: New Delhi:

2008. P. 11

6. Ibid. P. 12.

7. Ibid. P. 12.

8. Ibid. P.18.

9. Ibid. P. 20.

10. Pandey, Birendra



[137]

11. Joshi, Arun : The Novels of Arun Joshi : A. Critical Evaluation: ed Atlantic

Publisher and Distributors: New Delhi: P. 17. (quoted) : The Apprentice: Orient

Paper backs: Delhi. 1998 : P.06

12. Ibid. P. 97.

13. Ibid. P. 29.

14. Ibid. P. 61.

15. Ibid. PP. 6-7.

16. Ibid. P. 48.

17. Bhatta, Indira and Alexander Suja : Arun Joshi’s Fiction. A Critique. ed.

Creative Books, New Delhi : 2007. P. 80

18. Ibid. P. 82.



[138]

Social Characters in the Poetry of Nissim Ezeikiel

Dr. Gyanendra Singh Pundhir

Social characters Nissim Ezeikiel are ordinary people living in the society

usually - clerks, teachers, section officers, hotel keepers, customers, self proclaimed

patriots, the faceless men in the street. Though they are ordinary social being but they

have an unstated dream of being or becoming some one All literature used at the

ultimate stage is essentially a human document. His social vision becomes clear in the

answer given to Ranjeet Hoskote for the question when he asked whether he feels

distanced as an Indian English writer and member of the privileged westernised elite

His answer was, “I may feel distanced from some members of the Indo-English

‘Privileged westernised elite’ if they speak and behave in a dogmatic, narrow-minded,

intolerant way. I may be as critical of them as of those within the cultural matrix of

traditional Indian society: If I feel that tradition implies a mode of blindness to

universal human valueg1.”

It is the people in a house who make a home a family. ‘The professor’

dramatizes a tragedy due to wrong priorities in life, wrong parameters of achievements

and success as it is going on in the society.

My wife died some years back.

By God’s grace all my children

Are well settled in life.

One is sales Manager,

One is Bank Manager.

Both have cars.

Other also doing well, though not so well.

Every family must have black sheep.

Sarala and Tarala are married.......2

Another example which I found most touching with the strongest confessional

tone is “The Railway clerk” the clerk is the most social being and this clerk is

suffering from persecution mania:-



[139]

It is not my fault.

I do what I am told.

But still I am blamed

I am never neglecting my responsibilities

I am discharging them properly

I am doing my duty

But who is appreciating?

Nobody, I am telling you. (C.P. Pg. 184)

He tries to make it clear that his efficiency is entirely controlled by the

situations i.e. the working conditions. He is doing the duty in the absence of ordinary

facilities like an electricity fan, a big desk and a chance to make huge money.

Ezekiel finds fun at the way semi-educated Indians speak or write English

language. Whether the poem ‘Good bye party for Miss Pushpa T.S.’ is real or

imaginary, I could not understand but it brings no difference to the enjoyment of the

readers when author has ridiculed the errors of grammar, syntax and idioms which

Indians normally commit while speaking the English language. The speaker mimics

Indian style of speaking on the occasion of a party being given by Miss Pushpa's

friends to bid her farewell when she is going to another country perhaps for higher

education or for sight seeing.

Ezekiel has largely rebelled against the Indian way of life, behavior and

speaking the English language. He has felt more annoyed than attracted by Indian life

and by Indian people. He has written a large number of poems depicting the Indian

conditions of life. Though he does not ignore the positive aspects of society but his

poems give strong emphasis on the negative aspects. ‘Barbaric city’ sick with slums,

deprived of seasons. Full of hawkers and beggars crying, is the picture of Bombay. He

describes it is not only the city which is sick but the entire modern civilization is sick

and needs healing. The people of Ezekiel’s city need peace of mind and comfort but

can not achieve these. The people of society are indeed direction less.

Certainly, through these poems, Ezekiel wants to achieve something more than

persiflage, satire, irony and humour arising out of all this chemistry of thoughts. There

is no acrimony, no prejudice, and no stand offish superiority. Contrarily, there is



[140]

sympathy, understanding and pathos that add a clean redemptive touch to the irony,

satire and humour. His poems attempt to explore potentialities of the English language

operating as a perfect lingua- Franca in a particular given condition. That’s why-

Ezekiel in his ‘poster prayers’ says, “Let my follies be fresh/ as flowers3.” He accepts

that poetry has yo helped him to discover faults and weaknesses, though he could not

conquer them.

Reference:

1. Anisur Rehman, form and value in the poetry of Nissim Ezekiel, from Ezekiel’s

letters to him P. 39

2. In letter to D. Rama Krishna, 27 Nov. 1977, Quoted in ‘Ezekiel’s Credo Journal of

Indian writing in English 14, 2 (July 1986) 13.

3. P. Lal, Modern Indian Poetry in English : An Anthology and credo. Op. Cit. P. 169.



[141]

Shuddhi Movement : A Brief Historical Study with Special Reference to District Moradabad and its Surroundings

Dr. B.D. Shukla Asst. Professor,

Department of History and Culture Dr. Bhim Rao Ambedkar University, Agra

India is often described as 'Incredible India. 'The culture, languages, climate, geography, everything is on a different scale on this land. It may be seen as more versatile and complex than a continent. If we cast our eyes on the religious fabric of India we will find it full of vibrant colours of Hinduism, Islam, Sikhism, &Christianity &some others. The activities of these religions and sects not only give new dimensions and directions to society but also work for its upliftment and reformation. 19th century Indian renaissance stands as strong evidence in support of it. My this research paper is a humble effort to study a movement named Shuddhi movement which was a result of such various activities initiated by some socio- religious organizations like SewaSamiti, AryaSamaj, Sanatan Dharma Party, Hindu Sabha and now a days by Dharma JagranSamiti, and DharmaRakshaSamiti. In this paper we have tried to study the course and impact of Shuddhi movement in Moradabad, and some other district.

The word ‘Shuddhi’ is derived from Sanskrit and it means cleansing, purification or freedom from defilement.(1)The word was used for an ancient Brahmanical ritual which aimed at recreating the state of purity after polluting contact or impure activity. In 19th century the term was used to reintegrate Brahmins who had crossed the Kalapani or travelled out of their biradaries.(2)The concept of Shuddhistarted playing a major role when in 1886 few AryaSamaj leaders recognized the unifying potential of Shuddhi. Thus with a set of rites and ceremonies the Shuddhi movement came into being. It had a social reform agenda and aimed at abolishing the practice of untouchability by bringing back the converted outcaste Hindus from other religions to Hinduism and integrating them into the mainstream community by elevating their position and instilling self-confidence and self-determination in them.(3) The movement also strove to reduce the conversions of Hindus to Islam and Christianity, which were underway at the time.(4) In the view of AryaSamaj one of the greatest deficiencies of Hinduism and the major reason for its decline since the age of Vedas was the want of a ritual of conversion. According to the sect active conversion



[142]

would help the Hindus resist against the propaganda of other missionaries. In this regard the Shuddhi Movement was started by Pundit BhojDutt Sharma of Amritsar.(5) He started ShuddhiSabha in 1907. It called for reproselytisation of those who had left the Vedic fold and embraced Islam or Christianity.

Initially the AryaSamaj was particularly successful among Muslim groups which were only partially islamised and had still retained many of their old Hindu customs and beliefs, for example Sheikhs of Larkana and Mewatis of Ajmer etc. It is interesting to note that these group conversions to Hinduism organized by AryaSamaj were motivated by the desire to promote spirituality and moral and religious values not anti-muslim passion. Due to this these groups only gave up some Islamic customs such as Burial, Nikah, and visiting of Dargah, but were not imparted Hindu religious knowledge.(6) In Moradabad& surrounding areas the Shuddhi campaign began effectively in 1923.(7) Meetings were held in many districts to unite all the Hindu castes and sects for the same. AryaSamajis collected funds and persuaded the young to be active for the purpose. They first contacted the Ghosi community, an outcaste community in Moradabad, to come back to Vedic fold as a result of which many agreed for conversing back.(8)The next community whose small number of members agreed to reconvert were the Malkhan Rajput’s. The AryaSamajis were so active in the shuddhi movement that during their annual meeting held from 14 to 16 April 1923 in Moradabad they collected funds amounting to rupees two hundred for the movement.(9) The Arya Kumar Sabha, youth wing of AryaSamaj, held its 9th anniversary celebrations on 26 may, 1923 in Moradabad and in these celebrations speakers spoke loudly in favour of Shuddi.(10)These activities made the movement so intense that the founder leader of this movement Swami Shraddhanand himself visited the district on 13 July, 1923.(11) He toured the city to collect subscriptions and secured a large sum.(12) District administration did not allow him to organize or address any public meeting as Shuddhi activities of AryaSamajis were prone to harm communal harmony but his visit filled the activists with great vigor and enthusiasm. They not only tried to bring back people in Hinduism but also tried to prevent further conversion to Islam or Christianity. It was evident in the opposition of Swami Shraddhananda by the Muslim community during his visit in Moradabad. Realizing the alarming situation District Congress Working Committee became active. Congress also saw it as a threat to the spirit of social unity that it held dear to achieve freedom so Pt. Motilal Nehru visited



[143]

Moradabad in March 1923. He addressed a meeting at Town Hall emphasizing the desirability of Hindu Muslim unity and the benefits of the constructive programme of Gandhi.(13) Pt. Jawaharlal Lal Nehru also addressed a meeting of the people on 25 June, 1923 on the necessity of Hindu Muslim community.(14) The Moradabad municipal board adopted a resolution which deplored communal disturbances and sympathized with the innocent victims of mob- violence. The Alexandria Theatrical Company staged a play in the city, entitled Inqilab, showing good effects of communal harmony. But the conditions did not ease down and Shuddhi work continued. AryaSamaj kept on holding its meetings and collected rupees three thousand and seven hundred to promote the Shuddhi work.(15) In Moradabad, Bareilly, Etah, Badayun, Kasganj, Firozabad also the shuddhi activities took momentum.

In the mean time assassination of Swami Shraddhananda in 1926 filled the followers of AryaSamaj with grief but the movement did not slow down in the district and the nearby areas. Shuddhi of three malkanaRajputs was performed in the temple of Late LalaParshadiLalRastogi in Moradabad on 29 August, 1927.(16).In the same temple the Shuddhi of a Thakur of Bareilly was also done and he was reconverted to Hindu fold from Islam.

This movement has seen many ups and downs yet it is continuing in the Moradabad district and its adjoining areas like Etah, Badayun, and Bareilly etc. Now this unorganizedShuddhikaran process of AryaSamaj is being supplemented with organized missionary groups. Now conversion in India to or from Hinduism generally takes the form of mass conversion where entire group converts together instead of isolated individuals changing their religious allegiances afterShuddhikaranrites. According to reports over the past many years volunteers of Aryasamaj and other supporting organizations have been raiding the Muslim and Christian communities of the villages in Moradabad and adjoining areas using their abject poverty to lure them with promises of better living conditions. Not surprisingly in the year 1988 a sizable numbers of Muslimsas many as twelve each from the village Allahpur and Sujjan of Hathras District have taken to Hinduism.

A very interesting episode of reconversion was noticed at Jasrana village in Firozabad District where more thanfour thousand Christians including 18 Christian Pastorsreconverted themselvesto Hinduism along with their followers fromaround70 villagesunder the leader ship of AcharyaVagish at ArshGurukul,Etah on 5th October,



[144]

2005. These families had accepted Christianity only in 1984-85 in the hope of various facilities and promising future. But soon found every promisemade by Christian Missionaries at their conversion was almost false.This huge incident took place at Padma town in Jasrana Tehsil, District Firozabad in the year 2002. This was the end of a series of reconversions in which first of all 52 villagers accepted back Hinduism on 16th June 2003, then around 300 people came back to Hinduism on 13th February 2004. In 2005 only 145 Christian families came back to Hinduism at Bareilly with efforts of Dharma RakshaSamiti and in similar incidents at Kasganj, Etah and Firozabad more than 400 families did accept Hinduism back. As per the report of DainikJagran dated 9th February, 2006, 300 Christian families came back to Hinduism at Bhojpur village, Etah under the supervision of Pt. Dev Raj Shastri, acharya of AryaSamaj. Along with that on 28th September, 2006 1100 Christian families at Etah converted back to Hinduism. These Balmiki families had accepted Christianity in 19th century due to social inequality of Hindu Society. The event was organised by Dharma JagranSamitiEatha under the leadership of ShriRajeshwer Singh. The identical incidents were noticed in the same year at Ganesh Pur, Jalesar, Badayun, Data ganj, BulandShahar and Mahrara.

As per the report of the DanikJagran, a regional daily, dated 28th march 2007, with efforts of AryaSamaj more than 100 Christian families from Shahi area at Bareilly reconverted to Hinduism.Not only these in the same year various other reconversionswere noticed at Kasganj dated 11thSeptember, Etah and Bareilly dated 15th September and on 26thDecember atRurki, Hathras.

On the basis of the report of the same regional daily dated 15th September 2008 at Mirganj in Bareilly district a Dharma RakshaYajna was organised under the leadership of provincial chief of Dharma JagranSamitiRajeshwerSingh,in which 150 families who had converted to Christianity came back to Hinduism. The ceremonies were held at BirjaNand Public School and attended by the residenst of various nearby villages. In the same year on 25th December 2008, 1000 Christian family came back to Hindu fold at Kachala near Badayun District. Initially the District administration was worried about the peaceful organization of the Suddhikaran process being held at such alarge scale, but everything went on peacefully under the leader ship of ShriDev Raj Shastri of YajnaGurukulEtah.

On the basis of the report of the Amar Ujala, a regional daily, dated 14th July2010, 116 families came back to Vedic Hindu fold giving up Christianity. The



[145]

ceremony was held at Ram Beti Junior High School Umargarh, Firozabad. In an another report of The Hindustan, a regional daily newspaper, dated 24th December, 2011 at Etah 1100 families returned to Hindu fold with the efforts of AryaSamaj and DharmaJagranSamiti. These families belonged to Bareilly, Badayun, Aligarh, Hathras, Kasganj, Firozabad, &Etah. Their ancestors had adopted Islam or Christianity in past. Flow of these incidents indicates the beginning of a sensitive social change to come.

In 19th century Swami Dayanand, who was impressed by the arcade universalization of Christianity and Islam, realised that the need is to create a similar militancy in Hinduism to safeguard this age old religion. The result of this feel was Shuddhi movement that had large impact in Moradabad and its surrounding areas. Despite long time the movement is still on in a great vigour affecting masses in villages. The movement is getting momentum through the provision of Indian constitution (Article 25)regarding the freedom to religion and aims at strengthening the Hindu religion by bringing back those who accepted different religion leaving Hindu fold either due to oppressive policies of high caste Hindus or due to mouth-watering promises by various missionaries. The scale on which this proselytising is going on peacefully is enough to change the social scenario of not only the mentioned areabut also in large parts of India which may lead to far- reaching socio-religious and political impacts. Humbly I believe this may be an interesting and challenging research area for the Modern Historians. References : 1-www.aryasamaj.com/enews/2012/jan/4.htm 2-Untouchable Assertion –The politics of the urban poor in early twentieth century India by NandiniGoopta.published by Cambridge University Press, 2001. ISBN0521443660.page 157 3- Dayanand and the Suddhi Movement Indian Political Tradition , by D.K. Mohanty. Published by Anmol Publications PVT.LTD.ISBN8126120339.page no. 116. 4- The Khilafat Movement: Religious Symbolism and political mobilization in India by Gail Minault. Published by Columbia University Press, 1982.ISBN 0231050720.Page 193. 5- TheSuddhi movement was initiated by PanditBhojDutt Sharma of Amritsar who started SuddhiSabha or all India SuddhiSabha was founded on an organisation basis in a conference held at Agra and PanditBhojDutt Sharma was madeits general secretory. It called for reproselytization of those who had left the Vedic fold and embraced Islam or



[146]

Christianity. N.A.I. Home political Department proceedings, 1926, F.No.206, Vide note of the Criminal Investigation Department on the state of the Hindu Muslim Feeling in U.P. Anjuman Islam of Delhi took up the question of counter activity. 6-Mass Conversions to Hinduism among Indian Muslim Author(s): YoginderSikand and ManjariKatjuReviewed work(s):Source: Economic and Political Weekly, Vol. 29, No. 34 (Aug. 20, 1994), pp. 2214-2219Published by: Economic and Political WeeklyStable URL: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4401654. 7-Uttar Pradesh Police Secret Abstract, 21 April, 1923, para 304. 8-Ibid, 17 March,1923 para212. 9-U.P.Police Secret Abstract, 21 April, 1923, para321. Rs. 1000/ had already been sent to Agra. Chaddamilal and Vishnu NathTyagiwere the main activist in raising of funds. 10- U.P.Police Secret Abstract, 16 June, 1923,para443. 11- The Leader, 16 July 1923. And 12- Ibid. 13- U.P.Police Secret Abstract, 24 March, 1923,para 233. 14-U.P.Police Secret Abstract, 7July, 1923, para495 15-U.P.Police Secret Abstract, 10 February, 1923,para 123. 16-Suddhi of three Malkanas was performed on 29 August, 1927. In the Temple of Late LalaParshadilalRastogi vide Hindustan Time 6, September 1927, in the same temple, the Suddhi of Thakur of Bareily District who was converted to Mohammedanism was took place- vide Hindustan Times, 18 September, 1927.



[147]

Writing in Indian English Literature

Ritu Yadav

Abstract : English literature is two hundred years old, Sri Aurobindo stands like a huge

oak spreading its branches over these two centuries. The contribution of Sri Aurobindo as a perfect writer and craftsman is undoubtedly great. He is the first poet in Indian English writing who has given the re–interpretation of myths. Sri Aurobindo envisages spiritual humanism. Other writers are Tagore Harindra Nath Chattopadhyaya, R.K. Mulkraj Anand Raja Rao, Vikram Seth Kamala Das Rushdie. Introduction :

Rabindranath Tagore (1861-1941) is a celebrated name in the sphere of English literature. His creative genius is so much accounting and his literary output is so much rich and varied that the phrase ‘myriad – minded’, which Mathew Arnold had used for Shakespeare, can aptly be used for him also. He won Nobel Prize for literature in 1913, for his immortal poetic work Gitanjali (1913). Besides being a great universal poet, the genius Tagore is also a novelist, dramatist, Short - Story writer, musician, philosopher, painter, educationalist, reformer and critic in every field and had earned a niche for himself. The setting of his novel is representative and reflective, their characters are natural, realistic, full - blooded and life like. The socio- religious culture of Bengal is brilliantly portrayed in his novels. Through his novels he brings out some of the problems of the woman of his age. Different kinds of human relations are portrayed and analysed through the different social settings. Some of his novels deal with the modern problems of our society and the interest in them centers round the psychological development of characters under the compelling stress of circumstances. To his credit. there is a long list of poems and plays, both in Bengali and English which had made his place among the world's greatest writers. In Iyengar’s words;

As the years passed, he became more and more a legendary figure; in his flowing bead and immaculate white robes he was truly in the line of the great Rishi of Upnishadic times, and indeed he was truly in the line of the great bearing witness to the triune Reality, seeing the way showing it to others.

Tagore neither does nor adheres to the conventional narrative method, nor does he use the principles of organic, consequential plot - structure. He also tries through his novels, to focus the attention on some of the bitter truths and cruel customs of the lives and society as well. His novels amuse, perplex and bring out the real literary pleasures. Tagore has written thirteen novels of which nine are translated into English. The



[148]

translated works are Gora, The Home and The World (1910), The wreck (1921); Binodini (1964) and many more. Tagore wrote his first original dramatic piece when he was twenty - Valrniki Pratibha (1881) arid stated that his works sought to articulate “the play of feeling and not of action.” Tagore’s dramas used more philosophical and allegorical themes. Tagore’s plays also are important to Bengali literature. All of his plays have been repeatedly staged and re-interpreted over the years. His most famous play, perhaps, is Raktakaravi (1926) (“Red Oleanders”) the name of a red flower. It tells of a king who lives behind an iron curtain while his subjects have cruelty and death delivered upon them at the slightest:. pretext. People are forced to work in the mines so that the kleptocratic king and his cronies may render themselves even wealthier. The play follows the heroine Nandini, who leads the people and finally the king himself towards the destruction of this artifact of subjugation. However, this ultimate victory is preceded by numerous deaths, most importantly that of Ranjan, Nandini’s concrete solution to the besetting women's issue. He analysis modern India from a different perspective and elevates Hindu orthodoxy to a grand metaphysic. His work The Serpent and the Rope(1960) abounds with various themes. It is the story of an intellectual Rama who is in quest of personal enlightment and seeks inspiration and revelation from eastern and western metaphysics. He has a French wife and his association with Savithri brings to the forefront the contemplation of the Feminine Principle and endeavors to correlate the eastern and western views. The later works by Raja Rao includes The Cat and The Shakespeare (1956) and Comrade Kirillov (1976). Kanthapura (3938) by Raja Rao emphasizes the influence of the Gandhian movement by highlighting the 1920's and the Gandhi - Irwin Pact of 1931. He focuses a small village through which he explores the impact of the freedom movement on the villagers and also captures their roles in the struggle for Independence. Rao uses his novels to spread the Gandhian message and as propaganda against social evils.

Mulk Raj Anand (1905-), R.K.Narayan (1906-2000) and Raja Rao (1909-) became the trinity of Indian writing in English. Speaking of The Big Three, Walsh said:

It is these three writers who defined the area in which the Indian novel was to operate. They established its assumptions; they sketched its main themes, freed the first models of its characters and elaborated its particular logic. Each of them used an easy, natural idiom which was unaffected by the opacity of a British inheritance. Their language has been freed of the foggy taste of Britain and transferred to a wholly new setting of brutal heat and brilliant light.”

The sudden spirit of creative writing in the eighties reflects the sense of awareness of the plurality of the nation. It transcends the east - west conflict and



[149]

portrays the new Post Colonial India with its evolving outlook, which is essentially as blend of tradition and modernism. It reveals the cosmopolitan outlook of the new generation who strives to strike a balance between the inherited traditional values and imbibed foreign culture. The treatment and technique of the novel is Trans-national and Trans - continental. Salman Amitav Ghosh and Upamanya chatterjee are the writers who reigned supreme with their momentous work. Their works delve into the hurdles faced by newly independence nation, which at times a harsh depiction of reality. These writers have made bold attempts to recapture the altered perceptions of Post - colonial India and the use of revolutionary narrative technique has elevated their position among the writers of Indian Fiction in English.

Salman Rushdie (1947) was born and brought up in Bombay and later went to England for higher education. Thus, his roots and early education in India combined with the exposure to higher education in a foreign country, has played a stupendous role in shaping the mind of this writer. His novels abounds with myths, symbols and motifs. The arrival of his best novel Midnight Children (1981) shook the very foundation of the complacency of the Indian English Fiction. The language, style theme and narrative technique employed by Rushdie is entirely novel and highly innovative. He initiated a trend which cared very less about the continental method of writing novels. Incredible imagination, amazing comic sense and absolute word - play are the hallmarks of Rushdie's works. Midnight’s Children (1981), the novel has three parts and based on the crucial role by history in the narrative, it can be categorized as the growth of the characters during pre - Independence, x. partition and post - Independence. His works abounds with the lavish use of symbols and fantasy. Rushdie will always he remembered for his dare devil techniques, narrative spanning generations, depiction of characters with eccentricities, experimentation with style, abundant usage of allegory, symbols and thinly veiled disguise of real life people and political overtones.

A Suitable Boy(1993), by Vikram seth was the cynosure of all eyes on its publication. Seth delves in detail on the social milieu of post — Independent India. The novel portrays the concerns of the middle aged lady, Mrs.Rupa Mehra, who embarks on a mission suitable groom for her daughter Lata and succeeds when she meets the young Haresh Kanna. Though match making is the novel's theme, the major attraction of the novel is the depiction of social panorama of India which encompasses cultural arena, politics in academics circles and the like also form an integral part of the novel. Inexhaustible, It is also remarkable that the theme and technique of novels in Indian



[150]

literature during this period found based on social upset, poverty, untouchability, exploitation, social movement, political movement etc. Iyengar observes,

Some of the best studies of social life are, naturally enough, in the regional languages; and it is not easy to translate the racy idioms of every day speech into English. This is particularly true of life in the country side, the seaside, the hillside where life has, perhaps, changed very little indeed during the last two thousand years. Urban life in India attracts the novelists by its excitement, perversions, sophistications and violent alternations between affluence and poverty, splendor and squalor; but the interior, the areas of obscurity and inaccessibility have their attractions too, and sometimes bring out the best in the creative novelist (165). Reference : 1. Bhasker A Shukla : (2010)„Indian English Literature After Independence‟,

Jaipur:Mark Publishers. 2. Bhatnagar, M.K. :( 1996)„Indian Writings in English‟, Vol.I, New Delhi : Atlantic

Publishers and Distribution. 3. Bhatnagar, M.K. : (1998)„Indian Writings in English‟, Op.Cit, Vol.II. 4. Bhattacharya, P.C. : (1983) „Indo-Anglian Literature and the works of Raja

Rao‟,Delhi : Atmaram and Sons.

5. Bhatta S. Krishna : (1987)„Indian English Drama : A Critical Study‟, New Delhi :Sterling Publishers.

6. Champa Rao Mohan : (2004)„Post-colonial situation in the Novels of V.S.Naipaul‟New Delhi : Atlantic Publishers,



[151]

Post – Independence Indian Women Novelists

Ritu Yadav

Abstract

In the post-independence era there are some women writers like Kamala

Markandaya, Anita Desai, Shashi Deshpande, Shobha De, Arundhati Roy, Kiran Desai,

Chitra Banerjee Divakaruni, and others. Kamala Markandaya has presented women in a

traditional outlook and independent in thinking. R.P. Jhabwala has found that life in

India is a burden to a European woman, while Santha Rama Rao has believed in the

superiority of the Indian culture when it came across the western culture. Nayantara

Sahgal protected basic the problems of women towards when injustice to a woman in

marriage. Raji Narasimhan presented liberated women characters in her novels. Her

women characters are educated and able to live freely. Her works include The Heart of

Standing is You Cannot Fly (1973), Forever Free (1979) and The Sky Changes (1910).

Keywords : Victims, Racism, Sexism, Protagonists.

Introduction :

In this series of women writers, Anita Desai is different from other women

novelists, as she has presented psychological exploitation of her women characters. Her

protagonists are mainly lonely and sensitive. Shashi Deshpande, a graduate in

economics and law studies, focused on the problems and issues of contemporary

middle class women. Her protagonists are sensitive, intelligent and career oriented.

Bharati Mukherjee, an Indian-American immigrant writer, wrote about her experiences

in India as well as in America and Canada. Her protagonists are victims of racism,

sexism and other forms of social evil.

The first novel of the Thousand Faces of Night (1992) won the prestigious

commonwealth award. She has been publishing a collection of stories, The Art of

Dying (1993) and the novels The Ghosts of Vasu Master (1994), When Dreams Travel

(1999), In Times of Siege (2003), and Fugitive Histories (2009) and a children’s book,

The Winning Team (2004). In her works, she has presented a battle of women in their

relationship with men and society. Uma Vasudev has presented a totally liberated



[152]

women. Her women are not bothered by the traditional middle classed attitudes, views,

opinions and taboos. Her novel The Song of Anusaya (1978) is an instance of it. Jai

Nimbkar’s novels Temporary Answers (1974), A Joint Venture (1988) and Come Rain

(1993) have dealt with the middle class married women’s identity crisis in the

contempprary male dominated society.

Nayantara Sahgal the prominent woman writer is one of the first few Indian

women writers who immediately caught attention of the literary world. Sahgal belongs

to one of the most prominent political families of India, i.e. Nqhru Gandhi family. She

was always in touch with the aristocratic people. Therefore, most of her characters

belong to the wealthy and upper class Indian society. She sticks to the people she knew

intimately. All of her characters are able to think in English and talk in English; they

never had a problem to present Indian conversation into English. Politics was in her

blood, so one of the important political events from India forms the background of her

each novel. A Time to be Happy (1963) presents the dawn of Indian independence.

This Time of Morning (1965) is about few days after independence. Strom in

Chandigarh (1969) deals with partition of Punjab. A Situation in New Delhi (1983)

presents the political situation of the Indian capital when the question of leadership

after Nehru occurred.

Some of her characters are the easily recognizable public figures, for example,

Kailash Sinha means Krishna Menon in This Time of Morning. Shivraj in A Situation

in New Delhi means Jawaharlal Nehru. The Day in Shadow (1971) is an outstanding

novel by Nayantara Sahgal. Its protagonist, Smirit Raman is a writer who prefers

divorce when she and futility of companionship between husband and wife.

However, it is ironical that after getting separated from her husband she did not

start her own life. On the contrary, she preferred to depend on other man, Raj, a

parliament member. The novel shows the prejudice she has to face in this male

dominated society. Sahgal has expressed her deep nationalistic feelings in her earlier

works, but later her personal life and the bitter marital experiences compel her to reflect

them in her novels. Sahgal has shown a realistic picture of high-level politicians and

beurocrats. She has shown how politicians care for themselves instead of the problems



[153]

of common people. Because of her birth and her upbringing, Sahgal sometimes thinks,

she does not entirely belong to India.

Her novel, Rich Like Us (1985) won the Sinclair Prize for fiction in the year

1985. Sahgal in her novels has presented the India of the early decades of this century.

Her searching looks at India during emergency reveals that here democracy and

spirituality is only skin-deep. It was her deep concern with the country that leads her to

say about emergency imposed on India by her cousin Mrs Indira Gandhi. Sahgal has

written when many Writers have preferred to keep silence on the issue because of the

power and dominance, of Indira Gandhi. Women created by her possess independent

nature. It is also womh to be noticed that feminine attitude of Sahgal "is closer to

writers like Simon de Beauvoir and much lesser writers like Betty Friedan and Katy

Millet".

Anita is another woman writer. According to Anita Desai, writing is a process

of “exploration of language: how much can language do, how far, can it pretend human

experience and feelings.”

Anita Desai is published works are novel Cry the Peacock in 1963. Followed

by, Fire on the Mountain (1977), Games at Twilight (1978), Clear Light of Day (1980),

The Village by the Sea (1982).

References :

1. Encyclopedia of English Literature.

2. Narsimhan, Raji, The Heart of Standing is You Cannot Fly (1973).

3. Narsimhan, Raji, Forever Free (1979).

4. Hariharan Gita, The Thousand Faces of Night (1992).

5. Sahgal Nayantara, The Time of Morning (1965).



[154]

Rabindra Nath Tagore and Human Touch in His Writings

Vikash Sharma [email protected]

Abstract Tagore’s faith in humanity was at the core of his entire being. The last birthday

address amidst the darkest gloom did not end in despair, “As I look around I see the

crumbling rains of a proud civilization strewn like a vast heap of futility. And yet I shall

not commit the grievous sin of losing faith in Man. I would rather look forward to the

opening of a new Chapter in his history after the cataclysm is over and atmosphere

rendered clean with the spirit of service and sacrifice2” On August 7, 1941 at a few

minutes past mid-day he breathed his last in the old Jorsanko House where he had first

opened his eyes eighty years and three months ago. Millions came to pay their last

tribute to the ‘Rabi’ of Modern India’ and when the pyre flames leapt up, a strange

silence descended upon the vast sea of humanity.

Key words : Service, Sacrifice, Humanism.

Introduction

Tagore, a poet, a musician, an artist, a playwright, a novelist, a saint, a painter, a

reformer, a politician, was in fact the image of a ‘complete man’:

He was a unified man, a whole man, and as such was an

example of his country and missionary to the West, who still points

the way to the final harmonising of our differences and, therefore,

towards our mutual strength through this coming phase of the

struggle of the human race to understand itself and to make itself a

clear reflection at that godhead out of which it was evolved towards

a purpose greater than we know.

The complexity of his manysided genius is observed by Leonards Elmhrist;

“one of the most difficult of all aspects to portray of this many-sided personality is that

which encompassed and express the artist.’ However, the multi-dimensional genius of

Tagore was marked by his star humanitarian faith. However, Tagore was essentially a

poet and his poetry besides being an spontaneous overflow of powerful feelings



[155]

displays a diversity in theme as well as in technique. It reflects every aspect and mood

of nature, together with a variety of human activity: social, political religious. It also

reflects the variety of relationship between man and God. Niharranjan Ray has

discovered the six fold pattern of growth in his poetry in the following pattern:

1. Germination and Early bloosoms (1872-88)

2. Fruits of Maturity (1888-1900)

3. Fruits of Offering (1901-13).

4. The Nest and the Sky (1914-1925).

5. New Flowers and Fruits (1926-1927) and

6. The Sunset glow (1937-1941).

Tagore’s career begins with Prabhat Sangit (1877) followed by Banaphul. Kari

and Komol (1886) is the song of humanity standing on the road in front of the gateway

of the Palace of life……’. Manasi (1890) is a collection of poems representing Tagore

as a poet of love. Sonar Tari (1894) is a meditative and evocative work where Tagore

sings of ‘beauty visualised as an abstract universal principle rather than through its

particular,’ manifestations.’ In Katha O Kahini he presents some splendid self

contained fragments from Sikh-legend with new interpretation. Naivedya, volume of

hundred poems reflects the spirit of religious devotion. Gitanjali indicates a deeper

intensification of the mood of surrender and humanity, already, reflected in Naivedva.

Balak, is an extension of thoughts contained in Gitanjali the infinite seeking its own

fulfilment in the finite. The years between 1921-25 marked a pause in his poetic career.

In Banobani (The voice of the Forest) the poet approaches nature with a blended feeling

of affection gratitude and reverence.

The guidance of Bankim Chandra led him to carry forward the tradition of

Bengali fiction. Bau Thakuranir Hut (1883) is in the mode of historical romance.

However, Rajrishi (1887) shows the element of conflict between Dharma and

Rajdharma Chokher Bali (1903) is a novel with multi diamensional conflict of social

values and man and woman relationship. The wreak (1906) deals with the idea of

reconcilation. Gora (1909) is by far his best effort to highlight the ideal of national

identity. After Gora in quick succession he produced Chaturanga (1916) Ghare Baire

(1916), Sesher Kavita (1930), Dui Bon (1933) and Malancha (1934). As a short--story



[156]

writer he deals with a wide range of themes. These short stories were published in three

volumes: Kabuliwallah The Hungry Stones’ and the Masi and other stories. On the

basis of theme they can be classified into four categories- love, social relationship, the

correspondence between man and nature, and man and the supernatural.

His genius as a painter flourished only in the later part of his life. For lack of

any definite guidance his paintings own their unique quality and do not conform to any

traditional pattern. He painted only a few memorable of the Painting, with him was a

living expression the poetry within him became one with the artist within him and it

resulted in a harmony of form, theme and colour. Such paintings are lyrics, written in

colour. The art critic Goseph Southall presented a very comprehensive assessment of

his paintings:

Tagore’s drawings are, as I see them, the work of a

powerful imagination, seeing thing in hue and colour as the

best-oriental sees them, with that sense sof rhythm and

pattern that we find in persian or Indian textiles craft work.

The colour sense is indeed superb.

Similarly Manoranjan Gupta observes:

But there is much more than this: there is a deep

feeling and apprehension of the spiritual life and being of

men and animals, expressed in their features, their

movements, their outward forms, hues and colours.

Besides painting Rabindranath, the singer of ‘two thousand songs’ evolved

some new styles of musical patterns blending the classical Ragas with folk-lore

tradition. Dhurjati Prasad Mukerherji sums up:

The profusion of these songs, their variety, their

individuality inspite of their typicality and the combination

of words with melodic forms would markout any song maker

as one of the greatest.

Tagore’s artistic self was rooted in staunch humanism hence the preservation of

the essential dignity of man was the end of all his activities. However, he approached

this end of literature from a, philosopher’s point of view. Through his lectures,



[157]

addresses, articles and writing he vehemently condemned the repressive measures

adopted by Britishers to crush the identity of Indians. Tagore devoted considerable

attention to national and international affairs but his interest was confined to the

preservation of Indian culture.

References

1. Malkani, M.U. (1958). “Tagore the Playwrights Indian Literature.”, Sahitya

Academy, New Delhi.

2. Hiranny Banerjee (1971). “Rabindra Tagore”, Ministry of Information and

Broadcasting, New Delhi.

3. Desai S.K., Ed. M.K. Naik, S.K. Desai, G.S. Amur (Dharwar : 1972). Symbolism

Tagore’s Plays in Critical Essays of Indian Writing in English.

4. Nirmal Mukherjee Naik ed. and S. Mokashi Punekar (1977). The Plays of

Rabindranath Tagore Perspectives on Indian Drama in English, Macmillan Madras.

5. S. Vishwanath, Narvane (1977). An Introduction to Rabindranath Tagore,

Macmillan, Madras.

6. Church Richard (1987). Universal Man, Rabindranath Tagore Centenary Volume,

Sahitya Academy, New Delhi.



[158]

Evaluative Study of Problems and Opportunities for Domestic Workers in India

Dr. Sunil Kumar

Abstract The market of domestic services is gradually becoming more and more

feminized and it demands more and more young girls. Domestic workers generally

belong to backward and scheduled castes, domestic workers have not yet achieved a

minimum level of literacy as most of the workers are school dropouts. Education still

remains a distant dream for the workers and the heads of their families, too. Women

who are unmarried, divorced, and separated are preferred as the ‘married’ status

entails bearing the additional responsibilities of her household. There is a significant

change in the structure of the family among the domestic workers. The quality of life of

the families is deplorable, but the domestic workers themselves dominate in the

decision – making process of their families and take several decisions regarding

themselves and their families due to their working and earning status.

Key words : Divorce, Literacy, Quality of life, separation.

Introduction

The relationship between the domestic workers and their family members is

changing. The domestic worker tries to appease members of her family because without

their consent and participation in household activities, it is not possible for her to work

for wages outside her home. She even works outside the home in the interest of the

quality of life of her family members. While working, workers, too, have to make

arrangements for the care of their children. Quite often, the non-working husband, in-

laws, and older children look after the younger children of the domestic workers. At

other times, the children are left like vagrants on the streets with no one to care for

them at home. Sometimes, the workers even carry the children to their workplace

(employers' place). The wages of the workers are the barest minimum. Very few have

other sources of income. Since most members of the workers' family are landless or

with barely any land, they do not have any other economic support.

Globalization, both of the economy and information systems, accelerates the

process of migration, tourism, and travel. Its cultural and social homogenizing effects



[159]

proceed along with the creation of pluralism and cultural diversity. The cultural

diaspora is created by migrants settling down in countries which offer them better

income and employment opportunities. The studies of the Indian out-migrants suggest

that most of them continue to maintain their traditional ways of life and customs. More

than this, their cultural self-awareness becomes more protective and strengthens their

commitment to the traditional modes of culture (Y. Singh: 2000: 60-61). Most of the

domestic workers have migrated to Agra from the neighbouring districts and, at times,

neighbouring states. The lure of earning simply by going to a nearby city or town draws

these workers horn rural areas in large numbers. A major portion of the workers’

earnings go towards the upkeep of the family. To some extent, debts are cleared,

mortgaged land is freed, consumer items of everyday use are purchased, and portions of

their income go towards the purchase of fashionable clothes, bags, fancy footwear,

wrist watches, artificial jewellery, and cosmetics.

Irrespective of kinship and family network, neighbours and acquaintances are

playing a major role in helping domestic workers find jobs in domestic service, which

is based on verbal negotiations. There are few options to choose the work within the

household because it is separately related to the wages paid to the workers. It is quite

significant that workers keep shifting from one household to another on some pretext or

the other. Workers do not work in any one household for a long time. Working hours

are not fixed for either the part-time or full-time domestics. Though the wage structure

in this service is minimal, yet, it does not mean that the workers have no aspirations

regarding their wages. They all want higher wages.

The quality of life of the domestic workers is not at all satisfactory. The food

and clothes allocated by the employers are not sufficient. Quite often, the workers do

not enjoy proper leave and leisure time. Policies and programmes regarding family

planning and welfare, being propagated by the governmental and non-governmental

organizations, are not known to most of the domestic workers. Domestic workers do

not even know about contraception and methods of birth control. Domestic workers do

not have access to proper civic amenities.

The communication revolution has brought about a number of visible changes

in the society. Domestic service is also influenced by this revolution. The workers are



[160]

being exposed to the means of mass communication, especially television and radio.

The ideas, behaviour, manners, and particularly the relationships of the domestic

workers with others are gradually undergoing change and they are also being

‘westoxicated’ to use Dipankar Gupta’s term.

Women are lagging behind in political participation. They are few in number in

the Parliament, assemblies, panchayats, and other local bodies, and especially in policy

making organizations. Their participation is not satisfactory as compared to their male

counterparts though they are qualified, skilled, efficient, and courageous. The

organizations for women are doing their job well in the words of Nilika Mehrotra, but

they are not sufficient and they are yet to achieve their goals in Vibhuti Paters terms.

The case of the domestic workers is the same and they are not untouched by this

present scenario in the women’s world.

Conclusion :

To conclude, there is the persistence of the ‘tradition-modernity continuum’.

Yogendra Singh ideology, views, and assumptions are well established here. The

relationship of domestic workers with their employers and others is changing. To

exercise Dipankar Gupta’s views on modernity, the relationship between the domestic

worker and employer is definitely mistaken here and nobody is ‘modern’, neither the

domestic worker nor the employer.

References

1. Gupta, Dipankar, Mistaken Modernity, India Between Worlds, Harper Collins

Publisher India, 2000.

2. Mehrotra, Nilika, ‘Grassroots Women Activism: A Case Study from Delhi’ Indian

Anthropologist, Vol. 27(2), December 1997.

3. Patel, Vibhuti, Women’s Challenges if the Nov Millennium. New Delhi: Gyan

Publishing Mouse, 2002.

4. Singh, Yogendra, Culture Change in India Identity and Globalization, Jaipur and

New Delhi: Rawat Publications, 2000.,

5. Ideology and Theory in Indian Sociology, Jaipur and New Delhi: Rawat

Publications, 2004.



[161]

Ownership Rights of Women in Early India

Richa Prakash M.Phil (History)

Dr. Madhu Vashishtha Assosiate Professor

Smt.B.D.Jain Girls P.G College Agra

Abstract Human life is inter-dependent for no man is an island and thus exchange or barter is the basic

component of the economics involved in life. This is turn influences the power relationships as they are

dictated by one’s necessities as well as desires. Empowerment on an external scale has to be influenced

by empowerment from within. Thus ‘rights’ in the legal context entails the claims and entitlements of an

individual. Rights are possessed, exercised and enjoyed. We need to trace the definition of property and

ownership in ancient India as the connotations would have varied in time and space.

Key words : Stridhan, Ownership, Brahmana, Religion Law State.

Introduction

There has been plethora of work done on St݅ݎdhana or ‘woman’s property’ in

India, written indeed mainly from the legal point of view since the British East India

Company was established in India. It was William Hickey, the legal practitioner who

came to India during the time of Warren Hastings, who felt that the Indians admired the

British sense of justice and thus there was a need to compose treatise on Hindu and

Muslim laws. The first work of this nature was A Code of the Gentoo Law which was

an English rendering of Vivadarnavasetu, compiled under the direction of Warren

Hastings by legal brahmana experts namely N.B. Halhed and published in the year

1776.

The first authoritative work on Hindu law was H.T. Colebrooke’s A Digest of

Hindu Law on Contracts and Succession, with a commentary by Jagnannath

Tarkapanchanan, and it contained sections on St݅ݎdhana among other aspects of Hindu

law. Thomas Strenge’s Hindu Law was published as early as in 1830 which is the

earliest work on a legal treatise which deals with St݅ݎ dhana as well. The most

authoritative work was that of Sir Gooroo Das Banerjee’s Hindu Law of Marriage and

St݅ݎdhana which was originally published in 1880 had also been standard work for

many years. Another useful work which was compiled in a book form in 1888 was the



[162]

series of lectures on the Outlines of the History of Hindu Law of Partition, Inheritance

and Adoption as Contained in Original Sanskrit Treatises delivered by J.Jolly. Another

work which was conclusive on St݅ݎdhana was G.C. Sarkar’s Hindu Law of Adoption,

which was published in 1981. There has been a plethora of literature which moots the

important question of St݅ݎdhana like Priyanath Sen’s General Principles of Hindu

Jurisprudence (1918), Radha Binod Pal’s History of Hindu Law (1938), P.V.Kane’s

History of Dharmasastra, vol. II and III (1941 and 1946), N.C. Sengupta’s Evolution of

Ancient Indian Law (1965-7), J.D.M Derrett’s Religion, Law and State in India (1968),

etc. This shows that the concept of St݅ݎdhana is not an eschewed subject. In fact, all the

studies on St݅ݎdhana have been from a legalistic and professional point of view. It is

only Kane whose work is more historical than legal.

In the primary Stone Age man may have not developed the concept of

ownership as the tools and implements he owned would have constituted his only

possessions given that he was a nomad. It may have been only during the Neolithic

times with the coming of the pastoral and agriculture economy that he may have

developed a sense of ownership, though the concept of legal rights and proprietary may

have still been elusive for the Neolithic man. The evidence from the Rgveda indicates

that the concept of ownership had not taken shape in the early Vedic period. However

there are many references to ‘collective ownership’ in the text.1As early Vedic society

was based on tribal kinship so all that was considered wealth was divided among the

constituting clans and sub-clans.

Cattle was the main source of wealth for the pastoral communities and thus they had a

greater scope to develop it as a source of wealth as it could be preserved and multiplied;

used as the medium of exchange; increased by wars and raids’ and divided among

clans, families and even individuals. In the later books of the Rgveda we do have some

reference to individual ownership of cattle. It is in the ‘wedding hymn’ from the later

books of the Rgveda that women were entitled to some form of cattle wealth in the

form of their wedding gift.2The term mentioned is ‘vahatu’ which is explained by

1 RV.I.141.1. 2 RV.X.85.13-38



[163]

Sayana as “ cow and other gifts” given for pleasing the girl.3 As land ownership began

in the later times of the Vedic period so there was no question of its ownership or

inheritance. During this time tribal units may have exercised ownership rights over the

land area under their possession and thus this may have been the initial stage of land

ownership. The tribes then allotted the land to different individual families. The right of

the family to the land he cultivated was only valid until such time as he utilized, for the

moment he abandoned it, it was reverted to the tribe. The strenuous work of clearing

the land, the necessity of mutual cooperation, small scale defense mechanism and the

expansion of families led to the formation of villages which in turn led to the regulation

of land rights. In the course of time two forms of land rights evolved: one of individual

ownership of land and the other the joint ownership of land. However, the concept of

landed property had not yet evolved in India. The rights were a privilege granting

inheritable utilization rights and included social obligations.

With state formations subsequently the ruler assumed supreme authority in all

matters, Initially they demanded gifts in exchange for cultivating the land as a tax,

thereafter it became obligatory to deliver a share of the grain yield, and thus a tax

system was finally evolved. Soon it became necessary to establish an official

machinery to collect the taxes. According to Manu a field belonged to the one who first

cleared it.4

The term parinahya has been used in the Taittiriya Samhita5 indicates the

authority of the wife on family resources. 6 In these times there was primarily

community ownership of land, thus women did not have the right to ownership of

immovable property, which unfortunately remained unchanged with the growth of

private ownership of land.

Thus in accordance with the socio-economic framework the Dharmasutras

advocated an extremely patrilineal form of inheritance, in which in the absence of sons,

the property would rather be given to the near and far agnate of the property holder than

be accrued to the daughters. It was laid down that the ornaments and other wealth 3 Bhattacharya,N>N., “Property Rights of Women in Ancient India” in Roy, Kumkum (ed.), Women in Early Indian Societies, Manohar, New Delhi, 1999, p.117. 4 Manu.IX.44. 5 T.S.VI.2.1.1 6 Bhattacharya.N.N., op.cit. p.117.



[164]

which was received by the woman upon her marriage from her kin, both agnate and

cognate, should be in absolute ownership of the woman.7 Again the dharmasastras or

the smrtis were the were the first documents which provided a distinct codification of

rules related to proprietary, inheritance and partition.

The daughter according to the law givers did not have the right to inherit the

father’s property. According to Bhattacharya8, the Dharmasutras allowed the woman to

become exclusive owners of the wealth that was obtained by them as gifts from their

relations. This forms the basis of the formulation of the six fold concept of St݅ݎdhana.9

The second aspect of the Dharmasutras was rather a difficult one to accept.

The Dharmasutras state in most vivid terms that the daughter has no right to

inherit the paternal property. Whereas Manu was trying to create a synthesis and thus

he says that the brothers have to forego one-fourth of the patrimony of their own share

in favour of the sisters for conducting the ritual of marriage of the sisters.10 But

nowhere has he mentioned that a woman was entitled to her father’s ancestral and

private property. Thus he too accepts and upholds the code written in the

Dharmasutras.

It becomes apparent that the daughter is not granted a share directly from the

father’s property. Yajnavalkaya also stresses that upon the death of the father and

mother, the sons have to distribute the liability and the assets of the father equally.

However, if the sisters are not married at the time of the death of both parents than the

sons must forsake their one-fourth of property or money equivalent to that amount for

the sake of the marriage of the sister.11 Similarly like Manu, even Yajnavalkaya does

not specify that this share is part of the daughter’s natural possession or under a moral

obligation for the brothers to forego one-fourth of their share for the sister. Visnu says

that the wealth of a man without a male heir goes to his wife and upon her death to the

daughter.

There are references also to putrika which means the appointed daughter in case

of absence of sons. According to Manu, a man who does not have any son, may appoint 7 Apas. Dh.S.ii.6.14.19., Buadh. Dh.S.II.2.49 and Vaistha.XVII.48-9. 8 Bhattacharya.N.N., op.cit. p.118. 9 Dharmasutras., IX.194. 10 Manu.IX.104. 11 Yaj.II.8.117,124.



[165]

his daughter as putrika, whose son shall perform his funeral rites.12 The husband of the

daughter has to be informed about the status of the daughter as putrika for the main aim

behind the marriage of the daughter is to beget a son who shall perform the last rites of

the father-in-law. In this case the son begotten would rather liberate the girl’s father.

This must have been a difficult task for the girl for the law givers forbade a man

marrying a putrika. Yajnavalkaya says that a son born from the appointed daughter is at

par to aurasa son (one born from a lawful wife).13

According to Brhaspati, a daughter springs from a man’s person just as the son,

so no one else inherits the wealth of the father other than the daughter, appointed or

otherwise. The only necessary condition is that he be equal to the case of the father,

thereby married to the man of the same caste. Ultimately it is her son who then

becomes the owner of this property.14Visnu states the same with a difference that he

claims a girl who has no brother is a putrika even if she has not been expressly

appointed.15 This would have affected the family life of such a girl who had no brother

and thus as a corollary declared a putrika; for marriage and procreation were the sole

aim of the female existence.

According to Yajnavalkaya, in case of a man who dies without a male heir and

even has no sons out of the twelve kinds accepted in inherit property, the wealth of the

person may accrue to his wife, daughters, parents, brothers siblings and even the

brahmacaris in seriatim. This rule is applicable to all varnas.16 Brhaspati says that a

wife who dies before her husband takes away his consecrated fire (Agnihotra); but if

the husband dies before he then she is entitled to his property in case she has been

faithful to him. 17 He seems confused when he says that a wife is not entitled to

immovable property of her husband, but needs to be provided only that portion of the

arable land and food that can sustain her.18 Immediately in the next verse, he states that

the wife is declared to succeed her husband’s property, and in her absence, the

12 Manu.IX.127. 13 Yaj.I.8.128. 14 Brhas, XXV.56-58. 15 Visnu.XV.4-6 16 Yaj..II.8..135-136. 17 Brhas.XXV.49. 18 Brhas.XXV.54.



[166]

daughter.19 Gautama also says that the estates of childless person shall go to his wife

after his death, or she shall seek for a son from his uterine brother. But only such a son

shall inherit his property and none other.

Manu is reticent about the right of the widow to her husband’s property.

However, the right of the wife was recognized only after her sons and even though

many law-givers are silent on the right of the widow to her husband’s property, yet

many acknowledge her right too.

According to Manu, a mother has the right to her son’s property who dies

without an heir. It is important to reiterate that the son is the actual heir to the property

of the father and only in case of the absence or death of the son will the property be

acceded to the mother or the wife. Brhaspati says that the mother is entitled to her son’s

property in case he dies without an heir or a wife. In case the mother consents than the

other sons can be given a share in the property of the deceased son.

It was with reference to movable property that the society was unwilling to

allow women their rights. Perhaps this may have been related to community ownership

of property. As the society was tribal, transferring land to the daughter who would

belong to other clan was not feasible, so as to keep the property within the same clan.

But with reference to movable property their rights were recognized at an early stage.

Subsequently this aspect of movable property was termed as St݅ݎdhana.

Dharmasastras mention the term St݅ݎdhana, though terms like vahatu and

parinrhya were also indicative of women’s movable property in the times preceding the

dharmasastras. The term St݅ݎdhana denotes women’s property. We have to see whether

the woman had ownership right over the movable property or was it only symbolic.

St݅ݎdhana came to be divided into two categories; saudayikaand asaudayika.

Saudayika St݅ݎdhana included figts received from relations like the father, the mother,

or the husband out of affection. Women had inalienable right over this catgory of

St݅ݎdhana. The asaudayika St݅ݎdhana can be used by the woman during her lifetime

but cannot be disposed of by her. To quote Katyayana: “Whatever is obtained by the

married or unmarried girl, at her husband’s house or at her father’s house, from the

19 Brhas.XXV.55.



[167]

brother or parents is called saudayika (dowry). After having obtained saudayika

property, women are free to do what they like with it, since it has been given to them

through kindness as a means of livelihood. With regard to saudayika women are

declared to be free to do what they like, as to selling it or giving it away, even in case of

immovable property.”20 Narada with the exception of the immovable property states

that the woman can dispense with the other forms of possession at her will. 21

Katyayana again reiterates that neither the husband, nor son, nor father nor brothers can

spend St݅ݎdhana at their will. If they do so they will be subject to punishment and they

shall have to repay it with interest. If however any of them spend the St݅ݎdhana with

the consent of the woman, and in a conciliatory manner, then he has to pay only the

principal amount. Katyayana mentions the following restriction to the rule; “that

whatever a woman has received as a gift from her husband she may dispose it off at

pleasure after his death, if it be movable; but as long as he lived let her preserve it with

frugality, or she may commit to his family.”22 In consonance with such indictments

Visnu also said that the heirs will not divide among themselves the ornaments which

were worn by the woman when her husband was alive, or else they will become

outcastes.23

Even though women were vested with some form of rights over property but the

extent to which they could exercise their right over it is important to understand to

know their real status vis-à-vis the St݅ݎdhana. Two aspects have to be understood in

this regard: the extent to which St݅ݎdhana was regarded as the exclusive possession of

women, and two, what was the extent of the power of alienation that women had over

such property. Even smrtikaras were quite reluctant to invest women with absolute and

exclusive right over the St݅ݎdhana. According to Manu a wife cannot dispossess her

own property without her husband’s sanction. 24 However he also provides that a

husband could not deprive his wife of her St݅ݎdhana. According to his a husband can

temporarily take his wife’s St݅ݎdhana, if she is deleterious to him. He further states that

20 Katyayana quoted in Apararka, pp. 751-52. 21 Narada quoted in Apararka,p.752. 22 Katyayana quoted in Dayabhaga,p.76. 23 Visnu.XVII.22. 24 Manu.IX.299



[168]

her other relatives however close did not have the right to utilize her St݅ݎdhana as that

would tantamount to them being punished like thieves.25 He further says that those who

live on the property of women commit sin and drown in hell.26 They will be treated as

outcastes if they divided the ornaments worn by the widow during her husband’s

lifetime.27

Brhaspati also recognizes woman’s right over her St݅ݎdhana. He says that such

property as has been given to the woman by her father-in-law cannot be taken from her

by the co-heirs. Thus most of the smritikaras lay down that woman has absolute and

independent ownership over her saudayika St݅ݎdhana, except the figts received from

her husband. However, she had absolute power no dispose them off only after his

death, if it does not consist of immovable property. While some smrtikaras are lenient

in the repayment of the St݅ݎdhana utilized by the husband for the family under

extenuating circumstances like illness in the family, on religious ceremonics or on the

occasion of a calamity that has struck the family. Yajnavalkya is rather lenient

regarding the payment of St݅ݎdhana, in case utilized by the husband as he says he need

not repay it to his wife.28

Katyayana who wrote elaborately on this issue says that the husband must not

take his wife’s St݅ݎdhana, without her consent but if he takes it with her consent, he

shall pay back the principal amount only and that thoo when he has enough wealth to

restore it.29 Katyayana says “Yet more, if he has taken a second wife, and no longer

gives his wife the honour due to her, the king shall compel him, even by violence, to

restore her property, though it was put amicably into his hands”. In case he is unable to

pay, Katyayana says “the husband is to give some part of her property as St݅ݎdhana, to

his wife; if he dies without fulfilling this condition his heirs are required to do so”.30

25 Manu.IX.77. 26 Manu.III.77. 27 Manu.IX.200. 28 Yaj.II.147. 29 Katyayana quoted in Apararka,p.755. 30 Ibid.



[169]

Narada insists that no adverse possession can deprive the woman of her title to

St݅ݎdhana,31So we can conclude that the wife’s asaudayika St݅ݎdhana can be utilized

by the husband. He can utilize it but he is liable to return it. If the husband uses it for

other purposes, besides the ones enumerated above, he will be guilty of theft.

Even though women had alienable right over the saudayikaSt݅ݎdhana but in

reality their right was limited by the lawgivers. Also how much they wielded these

rights in practice is another query. We have to remember that the St݅ݎdhana constituted

mainly the immovable property, as the right to allow movable property was not

considered so upon marriage as the property would then have to be transferred to the

clan she is married into. Hence St݅ݎdhanawas restricted to only movable forms of

property. Again even after marriage, the asaudayika St ݅ݎ dhana was primarily

maintained by the males in the family, besides not giving her the right to own any

immovable property.

Manu refers to six forms of St݅ݎdhana, viz., the property given before the

nuptial fire is lit; at the bridal procession; given to the woman with affection; given by

a brother; given by mother and given by father.32 Visnu adds a few more kinds of

property in the St݅ݎdhana. According to his whatever has been given to the woman by

her father, her mother, her son, her brother and whatever has been received by her

before the nuptial fire, presented to her upon her husband’s espousal of another wife,

given to her by her kindred, as well as her fee and a gift subsequent are called

St݅ݎdhana.33

Narada’s description of St݅ݎdhana is in proclivity with Manu. He states further

that whatever has been given to the wife by her husband can be dispensed with at the

will of the wife with the exception of immovable property. 34 The most detailed

description has been given in Katyayana Smrti and his elaboration of the St݅ݎdhana has

been widely accepted by all groups including Dayabhaga. To enumerate a few he

includes all items received before the nuptial fire, during the bridal procession given for

31 Narada.III.83. 32 Manu.IX.194. 33 Visnu.XVII.18. 34 Narada.I.28.



[170]

love and received from mother, brother of father are the six fold property of women.

Also in Smrti Chanrika it is quoted all that does not constitute St݅ݎdhana is “whatever

has been given conditionally or fraudulently by the father, brother or husband is

declared not to be stridhana”.35

Referring to the kind of St݅ݎdhana over which women exercise absolute right,

Vyasa says that whatever is presented at the time of nuptials to the bridegroom,

intending the benefit of the bride belongs entirely to the bride and shall not be shared

by kinsmen.36 Apastamba maintains that ornaments are the exclusive property of the

wife and so is the wealth given to her by her kinsmen.37 Medhatithi in his commentary

upon Manusmrti recommends that all ornaments worn by a wife with the assent of her

husband is her own property, although they may not be given by the husband.

Katyayana while discussing what does not constitute St݅ݎdhana writes “The wealth

which is earned by mechanical arts, or which is received through affection from others

is always subject to her husband’s domination. The rest is pronounced to be the

woman’s property”.38

With regard to the right of the woman over the immovable property, Sarkar

states that the property purchased by the woman from her St݅ݎdhana as well as the

income thereof her St݅ݎdhana constitutes St݅ݎdhana only, because the property so

purchased, though in different shape represents the St݅ݎdhana with which it was

bought.39 However there other writers who opine that the immovable property given to

the woman by her husband does not constitute her St݅ݎdhana for she is not regarded

able to dispense it without the consent of her husband during his lifetime, and even

after his death. According to Brhaspati any immovable or movable property given to

the woman by her father-in-law cannot be extended to the coparceners.40

Thus we can ascertain that no one definition is given by the dharmasastrakars.

Initially six types of property were included and the list got longer with time. Broadly

35 See Smrti Chandrika.IX.I, CI.II 36 Quoted in Dayabhaga IV.I.16. 37 Colebrook,H.T., A Digest of Hindu law on contract and succession, 38 Katyayana cited in Smrti Chandrika.IX.I.16. 39 See Vyavastha Darpana: A Digest of Hindu law by Sarkar, S.C., op., cit.,p.219. 40 Jha, Ganganath, Hindu Law in its Sources, Patna University, Patna, 1931.,p.550.



[171]

the following forms of property constitute St݅ݎdhana by the law givers: Adhyagni are

the gifts received before the nuptial fire is lit; Adhyavahanika are the gifts given by the

bride’s parents to her at the time of her departure to her husband’s home; Bhratradatta

are the gifts received from brother, mother and father respectively; Pritidatta are the

gifts given as a mark of love and respect to the in laws’ at the tiem when the bride

touches their feet; Anvadheya is the property given to a woman after her marriage by

her husband, father and mother out of a affection; Adhivedanika are the gifts given by

the husband when he takes another wife; Bandhudatta are the gifts received from

anyone in relation and Sulka is the property given to a female as a consideration of

marriage. This enlisting of all that encompasses St݅ݎdhana is in itself explanatory that

St݅ݎdhana does not imply all the property received by the woman but few which are

enumerated broadly by the various law givers.

The Dayabhagaof Jimutavahana and the Mitaksara of Vijnresvara became so

important that throughout the successive times these two works and their legal

interpretation came to be regarded as almost the sole source of the Hindu laws relating

to ownership, partition and inheritance.41 It is to the author of Mitaksara that the credit

to broaden the scope of St݅ݎdhana goes as he observes that the term conforms in the

import with its etymology, and is not technical; for, if the literal sense be admissible, a

technical acceptance is improper.42 There are many who agree with the interpretation of

Mitaksara’s definition of St݅ݎdhana like Apararka, Nanda Pandit, mitramisra and

Kamalakar. Those who refuted it include: Jimutavahana, Devannabhatta, Srikrsna and

Viswarupa.

Among the writers of the modern times Altekar completely disagrees with

Vijnresvara’s interpretation. He says that there can be no doubt that the original verses

in Yajnavalkaya Smrti did not contemplate the inclusion of any of the categories

mentioned by Vijnresvara within the scope of St݅ݎdhana. One cannot be assured that

the term ‘adyam’ used Vijnresvara expanding the scope of St݅ݎdhana, has occurred in

the original verse of Yajnavalkaya. He further writes that even if we state that the

reading of Vijnresvara is genuine but we cannot assert that Yajnavalkaya would have 41 BhattacharyaN.N., op.cit., p.120. 42 Mitaksara.II.XI.2.



[172]

intended to include items like inheritance and share at partition under the term

‘etcetera’. As these items of included could have deprived the relatives of their larger

share in property on the one hand and extended the scope of the share of women’s

property manifolds. If it was the intention of Yajnavalkaya to expand the scope of the

women’s property rights he would have mentioned the same unequivocally in the verse

rather than surreptitiously incorporate it under the term ‘etcetera’.

According to Altekar he may have used the term for the apparent list of gift

items which are mentioned in the successive line which would incorporate bride-price,

gifts from grandparents, and other relations.

The qualitative approach towards property and property relation underwent a

possible advent under Jimutavahana (c. AD 1100-50) and Vijnanesvara (c. AD 1080-

1100). The Dayabhaga of Jimutavahana and the Mitaksara of Vijnanesvara became an

important authority on being the sole source of Hindu laws relating ownership, partition

and inheritance. The Dayabhaga is in direct conflict with Mitaksara if we interpret

Yajnavalkaya. The Mitaksara of Vijnanesvara, a commentary on Yajnvalkaya Smrti, is

more complex than Dayabhaga of Jimutavahana. Jimutavahana, the author of

Dayabhaga completely rejects Mitaksara’s comprehensive interpretation of St݅ݎdhana.

He rather restricts the application of the term St݅ݎdhana to certain descriptions of

property belonging to a woman. He quotes from Visnu and says that what has been

given to a woman by her parents, son or her brother, what has been presented to her on

her husband’s espousal of another wife’, what has been given to her by kindred, as well

as her perquisite, and a gift subsequent constitute the separate property of woman.43

The term kindred would imply maternal uncle and others. However Dayabhaga like

Manu opines that enumeration of the six kinds of property of a woman is not aimed at

restricting a greater number of it. Referring to Katyayana’s text regarding the term ‘a

gift subsequent’, Jimutvahana says that Katyayana includes following kinds of property

under the term: “What has been received by a woman from the family of her husband at

the time posterior to her marriage, is called a gift subsequent, and so is that which is

similarly received by a woman after her nuptials, either from her husband or from her

parents, through the affection of the gtiver, Bhrgu pronounces to be a gift

43 Dayabhaga.,IV.1.3.



[173]

subsequent”.44 Also by defining adhygini and adhyavahanika kinds of St݅ݎdhana, he

refers to Katyayana’s text which runs thus” “What is given to woman at the time of her

marriage, near the nuptial fire, is celebrated by the wise as the woman’s peculiar

property bestowed before the nuptial fire. That again which a woman receives while

she is conducted from the paternal abode to her husband’s dwelling is instanced as the

separate property of woman, under the name of gift presented in the bridal

procession”.45 Explaining the adhivedanika, he says that the wealth which is given to

gratify the first wife by a man desirous of marrying again, is a gift on a second

marriage, for its object is to obtain another wife.46Explaining it further the author of

Dayabhaga writes that the woman must consolidate the wealth received by her from

her husband during his lifetime which she can utilize upon his death. This was intended

as a caution against extravagance. He also refers to the views of Devala regarding the

definition of sulka, “Her subsistence, her ornaments, her perquisite, and her gains are

the separate property of a woman. She herself exclusively enjoys it, and her husband

has no right to use it, unless in distress.”47 The portion quoted above in the Dayabhaga

establishes woman’s exclusive right of enjoyment over the perquisite of a woman but

her husband can use it in times of distress. Unfortunately the word ‘distress’ has not

been elaborated thus the right of the woman to dispense with property is not absolute.

According to Jimutavahana, the main characteristic of St݅ݎdhana is that the

woman must enjoy absolute right over her property. “That alone is her peculiar

property over which she has power to give, sell or use independently of her husband’s

control.”48 To support his view he quotes Katyayana, :The wealth which is earned by

mechanical arts or is received through affection from any other is always subject to her

husband’s dominion. The rest is pronounced to be woman’s property.”49 Thus the

wealth received by the woman from strangers and other sources does not constitute her

property as the husband exercises complete right over it to dispense it.

44 Dayabhaga.,IV.1.2. 45 Katyayana quoted in Dayabhaga IV.1.5. 46 Katyayana quoted in Dayabhaga IV.1.14. 47 Katyayana quoted in Dayabhaga IV.1.15. 48 Katyayana quoted in Dayabhaga IV.1.18. 49 Katyayana quoted in Dayabhaga IV.1.19.



[174]

Thus we see that there are multitudes of opinion of what constitutes St݅ݎdhana.

While Mitaksara includes inherited property in the St݅ݎdhana, the Dayabhaga on the

onset rejects the view that inherited property constitutes St݅ݎdhana. Banerjee opines

that the property women receive as inheritance can be classified into two types: the one

inherited from the male owner and the other she may inherit is the St݅ݎdhana of a

female. He states that these two cases are distinct and should be treated separately. In

the case of the former the relations from whom a woman may inherit properly may

include husband, son, father, brother, grandson or the other male lineal descendants,

and sagotra kinsmen of her husband; in the latter case, they are her mother, her

maternal grandmother and her daughter.50

Again Mitaksara recognizes widow’s rights to inherit her husband’s property

only if he be separated and not otherwise. But Jimutavahana recognizes her right to

inherit her husband’s property even if her deceased husband is not separated. Even

though she inherits her husband’s property being issueless but does not exercise

autonomous control over it. He limits her interest to mere enjoyment with moderation

and declares that on her death the property of the deceased will not devolve to her heirs

who will inherit St݅ݎdhana, but onto the next heirs of her husband.

Regarding the right of the daughter to inherit her father’s property Jimutvahana

says “In like manner, if succession have devolved on a daughter, those persons who

would have been heirs of her father’s property in her default, take the succession on her

death; not the heirs of the daughter’s property.”51 Thus according to Dayabhaga, the

property which a woman obtains through the means of inheritance does not constitute

her St݅ݎdhana because of two reasons: first, women lack absolute right over the

inherited property and second, the property which a woman obtains through the means

of inheritance, after her demise does not go to those who are entitled to inherit her

peculiar property, rather it goes to the inheritors of the paternal property.

As opposed to the opinion of Jimutavahana, Vijnresvara regards the share which

a woman gets at the time of partion as St݅ݎdhana, and thus includes inherited property

within the scope of St݅ݎdhana. He says that St݅ݎdhana includes the property which 50 Katyayana quoted in Dayabhaga.,p.311. 51 Dayabhaga.XI.1.65.



[175]

shemay have acquired by inheritance, purchase, partition, seizure or finding as also

specified by Manu and the rest is termed as ‘woman’s property’.52

Since St݅ݎdhana varied in its definition and scope it has separate and varied

laws interpreting and defining its succession and inheritance. These laws were complex

and based on the mode of acquiring St݅ݎdhana. There were many basis on which

St݅ݎdhana succession could be stratified starting with the form of marriage and if the

woman in question died without an heir. In case of the former Manu says that the

property of the mother is the share of the unmarried daughter alone.53 However in the

later part he writes that if the mother is dead then all the uterine brother and sister are

entitled to a share in the mother’s estate. 54 This seems to contravene his earlier

statement. He says that even something should be given to the daughters out of the

estate of their maternal grandmother.55 Still later in his text after describing what

constitutes St݅ݎdhana, Manu said that it is ordained that such property shall go to the

offspring of the woman on her death.56

In case the woman dies without any heir then such a property goes to the

husband in case of a chaste marriage or else the property goes to the parents of the

woman.57 The ornaments worn by women during their husband’s lifetime should not be

divided among heirs or else they become outcastes.58 Thus Manu does not give a lucid

understanding on the succession laws to St݅ݎdhana. IT seems that both the sons and

daughters were entitled to the deceased mother’s property or alternatively St݅ݎdhana.

According to Yajnavalkaya the wealth belonging to the mother should be distributed by

daughters among themselves, after clearing out her liability during lifetime. In case

there are no daughters the sons would share the wealth in accordance to the law.59 In

case of a woman dying issueless, the property shall accrue to the husband if the

marriage had taken place under the first four forms of marriage (Brahma, Daiva, Arsa

52 Mitaksara.II.XI.2. 53 Manu.IX.131. 54 Manu.IX.192. 55 Manu.IX.193 56 Manu.IX.95. 57 Manu.IX.196,197 58 Manu.IX.200. 59 Yaj.II.8.117.



[176]

and Prajapatya). If she had been married under any other form of marriage the property

shall be assigned to her father.60 The only difference in what Visnu says is that he does

not specify clearly that in case of the absence of daughters, sons are entitiled to

St݅ݎdhana.61 Brhaspati provides a share to the daughter in the St݅ݎdhana only if she is

not betrothed. If she is married then she shall receive only an honorary trifle.62 Vasistha

says that the nuptial presnt of the mother shall be divided by the daughters amongst

themselves.63 Gautama gives the right to inheritance to only those daughters of the

woman who are unmarried and not well settled in life.64

Vijnaneswara says that a woman who dies without a progeny, her property will

be taken up by her kinsmen; namely her husband and the rest. Thus he considers the

kinsmen competent to succeed to a woman’s property. The author now distinguishes

different heirs according to the differences in the forms of marriage.65 Of a woman who

dies without an issue and who had become a wife by any of the four forms of marriage

i.e. Brahma, Daiva Arsa nd Prajapatya, the property belongs in the first place to her

husband. Then it goes to his nearest kinsmen. But in the other forms of marriage i.e.

Asura and Paisaca the property of a children woman goes to her parents. The

succession devolves first to the mother and then on to the father. In case they are not

alive, then their next of kin takes the succession.66 In all forms of marriage, if the

woman has children then the property devolves to her daughters.

In this place by the term ‘daughters’ grand daughters are signified; for the

immediate female descendants are mentioned in the preceding passage: ‘the daughters

share the residue of their mother’s property’.67 Hence, if the mother be dead, daughters

take her property in the first instance and where both married and unmarried daughters

are present, the unmarried daughters take upon the succession, but, on failure of the, the

married daughter, and where there exsts both daughters who are endowed and those

who are not endowed , the succession goes to the unendowed daughters. He cites

60 Yaj.II.8.145. 61 Visnu.XVII.19-21. 62 Brhas.XXV.87. 63 Vasistha.XVII.46. 64 Gautama.XXIX. 65 Mitaksara.II.XI.10. 66 Mitaksra.II.XI.11. 67 Mitaksara.II.XI.12.



[177]

Gautama to support his case who says that a woman’s property goes to her daughters’.

‘unmarried or unendowed’, as already mentioned. Unendowed are those who are

destitute and childless.68 This mainly applies to wealth other than the fee or gratuity, it

is the grand daughters who will inherit the St݅ݎdhana under this text: ‘If she leaves

progeny, it goes to her (daughter’s) daughter.’69 According to Manu if there are many

granddaughters and daughters then only a trifle share will be accrued by the

granddaughters and a large proportion will be given to the daughters.70 If there are no

grandsons in the mother’s line then the sons take up the wealth of their mother.71

Gautama says they who share the inheritance must pay the “debt”72 and the grandsons

are bound to discharge the debts of their paternal grandmother; for the text states,

‘Debts must be paid by sons and son’s sons.73

Dayabhaga, cites Manu on the subject of succession to the peculiar property of

woman,74 and on its basis, suggests the participation of both the brother and sister in the

inheritance. According to he author of Dayabhaga, it should be interpreted as implying

the share of sisters and brothers of the same uterine. He further cites Brhaspati75 and

other law givers to support his contention. Neither a barren nor a widowed daughter

inherits; for these present no oblations at solemn obsequies, either in person or by

means of their offspring.

Accordingly Narada says: ‘On failure of the son, the daughter inherits, for she

equally continues the lineage.”76 But if there is the son and daughter’s son claiming the

succession, the son has the exclusive title; since the married daughter is debarred from

the inheritance by the son, therefore, the son of the debarred daughter shall be excluded

by the son of the person who bars her claim. 77 On failure of all these the barren

68 Mitaksara.II.XI.13. 69 Yaj.II.146 cited in Mitaksara.II.XI.15. 70 Mitaksara.II.XI.17. 71 Manu.IX.92 cited in Mitaksara.II.XI.19. 72 Gautama.XII.40. 73 Manu.II.XI.24. 74 Manu.IX.192 cited in Dayabhaga.IV.II.1. 75 Brhas.XXV.87. 76 Narada.XII.50 cited in Brhas.IV.II.10. 77 Narada.IV.II.11.



[178]

daughter and the widowed daughter both succeed to their mother’s property; for they

are her offspring; and the right of others to inherit is declared to be on failure of issue.78

In case of Brahma marriage, the mother’s nuptial presents will be given to her

daughter upon her death. Again the right first devolves on the maiden daughter; if there

be none, it descends to the betrothed daughter; or for want of such, it goes to a married

daughter; or on failure of all daughters, it devolves to the son. The husband’s right of

succession is relative to the property of a wife who leaves no issues whatsoever.79 It can

thus be ascertained that there was no vivid form of delegation of St݅ݎdhana as it first

depends on the marital status of the deceased woman, and secondly, on the form of her

marriage, whether it was approved or not approved and thirdly on the nature of the

St݅ݎdhana i.e. the source from which St݅ݎdhana had beenprocured; and on the schools

of law she was governed by under the Hindu system.

Yajnavalkya states that the loss of ownership of immovable property like land

can be after a span of twenty years, and loss of elephant, gems etc. to one who has

taken these things in possession for ten years. However he says that these limitations of

years do not hold any water in case of property owned by women.80 Visnu also enjoins

upon the king to protect the property of minors, helpless persons and of women.81

Maintenance had to accrue to the wife in case where one was leaving for

business, or in case of desertion, divorce or resorting to polygamy. According to Manu,

a man should go abroad for business only after securing maintenance for the wife, as

the virtuous wife may also go corrupt in the wake of lack of arrangements made for her

subsistence.82 The main area of concern was to avoid the wife from going astray.

Yajnavalkya elaborates on the conditions when a man can resort to polygamy

but he must provide proper maintenance to her in case she was living with him. Upon

dereliction of this the husband shall become prey to evils.83

A wife is entitled to maintenance even if she has blemished or defects. In case a

wife is meritorious the husband has to give her one-third of his earnings according to

78 Narada.IV.II.12. 79 Narada.IV.II.24. 80 Yaj.II.2.24-25. 81 Visnu.II.65. 82 Manu.IX.74. 83 Yaj.I.3.74.



[179]

Yajnavlkya. He says that the king can direct the man to accrue one-third of his earnings

to a wife who has been diligent, obedient, docile, mother of a son and humble; in case

such a man is poor, the king can order him to provide food grains and apparels from his

earnings.84 Again if a man abandons his first wife upon second marriage, then he will

have to extend half the amount that he has spent on his second marriage to his first wife

in spite of her St݅ݎdhana.85

Thus St݅ݎdhanacomes to include a compendious list of things which incorporate

both movable and immovable property which she received from her Parents, Kinsmen,

her husband and his family except the immovable property of her husband. Katyayana

limits the amount of St݅ݎdhanato only 2,000 panas which could be given to a woman

by her relations.86 He does not permit gift of immovable property by the husband or his

relatives as St ݅ݎ dhanato the wife. Manu sees marriage as a sacrament while

Yajnavalkya sees it as a contract between husband and wife.87 Yajnavalkya includes the

property or wealth in St݅ݎdhana that should accede to her in case of being superseded

for that would mean that the woman has to be compensated as the contract has been

broken by the husband.

From the Sanchi epigraph of 450 AD88 we have reference to gifts of some

dinaras for feeding Buddhist bhikshus and for permanent lighting of the lamp before

the image of Buddha to the Arya Samgha at Kakanadabotavihara by Upasika

Harisvamini, wife of Sanasiddha, for the sake of her parents, She made this gift from

her St݅ݎdhana.89

In most cases we can see that the law makers accrued the right St݅ݎdhana to the

daughter and in their absence to their offspring who derive this right through them. In a

patriarchal society the male is the heir to all forms of property, movable and immovable

while in a matriarchal society the woman is the sole beneficiary of the law of

succession and thus in here we see an influence of the same on the Brahmanical

84 Yaj.I.3.76. 85 Yaj.II.8.148. 86Katyayana, quoted in Smrti Chandrika,p.652. 87 Chattopadhya, Sudhakar, Social Life in Ancient India, Calcutta, 1965,p.125. 88 CII,III,No.62,261. 89 Goyal, S R, Guptakalina Abhilekh, Meerut,1984,p.192.



[180]

lawgivers. In the classical age the woman’s rights enhanced as even a widow had

access to property.

In Yajnavalkaya smrti it is clearly stated that the husband who dies without

having an heir as a son, his property shall devolve to his widow. Yajnavalkya seems to

have been influenced by Gautama in stating so. A little later Visnu smrti also

champions the cause for widows. This affected the rights of the male coparcener. Thus

we see a unison opposition to the right of the widow to her dead husband’s property. In

fact in Abhijan Sakuntalam of Kalidasa we find that the sonless widow did not succeed

to her deceased husband’s wealth but had the right to maintenance while the estate was

taken over by the king. This was exactly the argument of Narada that a sonless widow

will not have access to her husband’s property but only the right to maintenance from

the property which was escheated to the king.90

The best way to deprive a woman of her property rights is to make the scope of

St݅ݎdhana provincial such that it comprises of few clothes and ornaments. While

dealing with the property rights in ancient India, one has to realize that it took a long

time before the unrefined customs and conventions, by which the ancient societies were

governed, became a part of the mainstream widely acceptable legal system, such that

for a long time there was no general system of inheritance regulated by any state power,

as different regions of the country then and now have different legal traditions. Even

within single region laws vary from caste to caste, community to community.

There is a hiatus within India between the codified and customary laws. The

former consists of the laws and customs as codified in the Dharmasastras and Smrtis

and it is followed by few dominant sections of the total population of India. While the

others follow various customary laws and traditions for the study of which we are to

depend on the vast mass of anthropological literature including correspondence, notes

and queries, gazetteers, census reports, journals, memoirs, surveys and individual

monographs on tribes and castes.

An example of matrimonial inheritance exemplifies the system of customary

laws. In the work, The Khasis and The Garos of Megahalaya details of the form of

inheritance among the tribes by P.R.T Gurdon and A.Playfair is enumerated. Among

90 Narada,XIII.52.



[181]

these tribes the entire family wealth belongs to the mother and it is transferred from the

mother to the daughters, the youngest one having the largest share. This form of

inheritance is prevalent in the contemporary times among various castes and tribes of

Karnataka, Madhya Pradesh and Kerala. In Kerala, the Nayar joint family or tarwad

consists of a woman, her daughters and grand-children in the female line, and when it

grows unusually big it often splits into smaller units called tavazis. In a book published

in 1941 titled Mother-right in India by Baron Omar Rolf Ehrenfels, he studies the rules

of matrilineal inheritance thoroughly.

In another book by Debiprasad Chattopadhyaya’s Lokayata (1959), the custom

of matrilineal inheritance has also been extensively dealt with. In K.M.Kapadia’s

Marriage and Family in India (1966) and N.N.Bhattacharya’s Indian Mother Goddess

(1970, 1977) there is explicit details related to inheritance and St݅ݎdhana rights of

women.

In some cases we come across a fusion of matrilineal and patrilineal system of

inheritance in which the sister’s son inherits the property of his mother’s brother. This

form of typical inheritance system finds resonance in the Mahabharata in which it is

stated that this form of inheritance was in practice among the Arattas and Bahikas.91In

southern India this system was known as alia-santana which was followed even by the

Kings of Travancore. The doctrine of pater familias which was so potently crystallized

in the smrtis as a universal phenomenon was never universally realized as we see in

cases of laws of inheritance and property ownership.

Even though daughters have been associated with inheriting St݅ݎdhana but

many law givers have recognized them as the first and sole owners. Also not much is

said to clarify the stands of individual lawgivers. Hence, it becomes imperative to refer

to the commentaries regarding the rules of succession of St ݅ݎ dhana. Even the

commentaries do not give any general rule of succession to woman’s property as

different schools of Hindu law have propounded different rules in this regard.

We can ascertain that no one definition is given by the dharmasastrakaras. Thus we can conclude that defining or elucidating the scope of St݅ݎ dhana is a

91 Mahabharta.,VIII.45.13.



[182]

complicated task, since the views of both the lawgivers and commentators who have interpreted the dharmasastras vary in definition and scope of St݅ݎdhana. References: 1. Aitreya Brahmana, BI, 1895-1906. 2. Apastmaba Dharmasutra ed., G.Buhler, Bombay, 1932. 3. Bahiya Jataka., No.108, story of the past. 4. Brhadaranyaka Upanisada in Eighteen Principal Upanisads, ed., V P Limaye

and R D Vadekar ( Poona: Vaidik Samsodhana Mandala, 1958). 5. Imperial Gazetteer of India, Vol. I,p. 483 (1907). 6. Manu Smrti or Manava Dharmasastra, ed., S N Mandlik, Ganpat Krishnaji’s

Press Bombay, 1866, trans, G Buhler, Oxford, 1886. 7. Patanjali., Mahabhasya, Vol II, p.233 on the Sutra Gotravayavat

Panini,IV,1.162. 8. Rgveda Samhita, ed., F Max Muller (London, 1890; Varanasi: Chowkhamba

Sanskrit Series Office) 1966. 9. Translations of the Dharmasutras of Apastamba, Gautama, Vasistha and

Baudhayana, G Buhler, sacred Books of the East, Vols II and XIV, Oxford, 1879-92.

10. Acker, Joan., 1988, ‘Class, Gender and the Relations of Distrubution’, Signs 11. A.S. Altekar, The Position of Women in Hindu Civilisation, Delhi; Motilal

Banarsidass, 1987 (rpt.),p.337. 12. A.S.Altekar, 1978, The Position of Women in Hindu Civilization: From

Prehistoric Times to the Present Day. Delhi. Motilal Banarsidass (reprint, third edition) is the most easily accessible and popular of such reconstructions.

13. Baig, Tara Ali., India’s Woman Power, S Chand and CO. Ltd. 14. Basham, A L., 1963, The Wonder that was India: A survey of the Culture of the

Indian Sub-continent before the coming of the Muslims, Orient Longman Ltd, Bombay.

15. Basu, B N., 1994, Vatsyayana’s Kamasutra. 16. Ghosh, S K, 1984, Women in a Changing Society, Ashish Publishing House,

New Delhi. 17. Horner,I.B.,1975, Women Under Primitive Buddhism.Delhi:Motilal

Banarsidass (1st edn., 1930). 18. Kosambi, D D., 1956, An Introduction to the Study of Indian History, Bombay. 19. Roy, Kumkum., 1999, Women in Early Indian Societies, OUP. 20. Sharma, R. S., 1997, Material Culture and Social Formations in Ancient India,

Macmillan India Limited.



[183]

Analysis of Crimes against Women as per Indian Penal Code

Dr. Meenakshi Verma

Abstract

The I.P.C. has defined following crimes against women. A decreasing trend in

rape cases has been observed during 2008-2009. Thereafter an increasing trend in the

incidence of rape has been observed during the periods 2009-2012. These cases have

reported a decline of 0.3% in the year 2009 over 2008, an increase of 3.6% in 2010

over 2009 and an increase of 9.2% in the year 2011 over the year 2010 and further

increase of 3.0% in the year 2012 over 2011. Madhya Pradesh has reported highest

number of rape cases (3,425) accounting for 13.7% of total such cases reported in the

country. Mizoram has reported the highest crime rate of 20.8 as compared to national

average of 4.3.

Rape cases have been further categorized as incest rape and other rape cases.

Incest rape (Incidence- 392)

Incest rape cases have increased by 46.8% from 267 cases in 2011 to 392 cases

in 2012 as compared to 3.0% increase in overall rape cases. Maharashtra (77 cases) has

accounted for the highest (19.6%) of the total such cases reported in the country.

Rape victims

There were 24,915 victims of rape out of 24,923 reported rape cases in the

country during the year 2012. 12.5% (3,125) of the total victims of rape were girls

under 14 years of age, while 23.9% (5,957 victims) were teenaged girls (14-18 years).

50.2% (12,511 victims) were women in the age-group 18-30 years. However, 12.8%

3,187 victims) victims were in the age-group of 30-50 years while 0.05% (135 victims)

was over 50 years of age.

Offenders were known to the victims in as many as in 24,470 (98.2%) cases.

Parents/close family members were involved in 1.6% (393 out of 24,470 cases) of these

cases, neighbours were involved in 4.7% cases (8,484 out of 24,470 cases) and relatives

were involved in 6.5% (1,585 out of 24,470 cases) cases. The State /UT / City-wise

details are presented in Table-5.4.



[184]

Kidnapping & abduction (Sec. 363-373 of IPC)

(Incidence- 38,262 Rate- 6.5)

These cases have reported an increase of 7.6% during the year as compared to

previous year (35,565 cases). Uttar Pradesh with 7,910 cases has accounted for 22.2%

of the total cases at the national level. Delhi UT has reported the highest crime rate at

25.3 as compared to the national average of 6.5.

Dowry Deaths

(Sec. 302, 304B of IPC)


The cases of dowry deaths have decreased by 4.5% during the year 2012 over

the previous year (8,618 cases). 27.3% of the total such cases reported in the country

were reported from Uttar Pradesh (2,244 ases) alone followed by Bihar (1,275 cases)

(15.5%). The highest rate of crime (2.7) was reported from Bihar as compared to the

national average of 1.4.

Torture (cruelty by husband or his relatives) (Sec. 498-A IPC) (Incidence-1,06,527

Rate-18.2)

‘Torture’ cases in the country have increased by 7.5% over the previous year

(99,135 cases). 18.7% of these were reported from West Bengal (19,865 cases)

followed by Andhra Pradesh 12.6% (13,389 cases) and Rajasthan 12.5% (13,312). The

highest crime rate of 47.8 was reported from Tripura as compared to the national rate at

18.2.

Assault on women with intent to outrage her modesty (Sec. 354 of IPC) (Incidence-

45, 351 Rate- 7.7)

Incidents of Assault on Women with Intent to outrage her•odesty in the country

have increased by 5.5% over the previous year (42,968 cases). Madhya Pradesh has

reported the highest incidence (6,655) amounting to 14.7% of total such incidences.

Kerala has reported the highest crime rate (20.9) as compared to the National average

of 7.7.

Insult to the modesty of women (Sec. 509 IPC)




[185]

The number of such cases has increased by 7% during the year over the

previous year (8,570 cases). Andhra Pradesh has reported 40.5% (3,714 cases) followed

by Maharashtra 14.1% (1,294 cases) of total incidences during the year 2012. Andhra

Pradesh has repoited the highest crime rate (8.7) as compared to the national average of

1.6

Importation of girl from foreign country (Sec. 366-B of IPC) (Incidence- 59)

A decrease of 26.2% has been observed in crime head as 59 cases were reported

during the year 2012 as compared to 80 cases in the previous year (2011). Karnataka

(32 cases) and West Bengal (12 cases) have together contributed 93.2% of total such

cases at the national level.

References :

1. Indian Penal Code

2. CRPC

3. Indian Evidence Act



[186]

How Social Media has Changed The Mindset of Voters In India

Vaanya Singh Welham Girls’ School, Dehradun

Abstract : The promotion has always played an important role. It could be either done online or offline.

Online promotion is considered very effective because it aims at a large number of people as compared

to the audience for offline promotion. Promotional activities in politics work with the aim of making

people familiar with the ideology of the political party. Social media plays an important role in it. Social

media serves as a platform for the transfer of views and suggestions of the local people and share of

ideologies of the political leaders if seen from the point of view of the political world. Social media helps

in transfer of free knowledge without any barrier, anyone who has access to social networking sites or

even to the internet can have access to this free knowledge and can also be a part of it. Social media has

been widely used as a medium to promote political views by political parties (Safiullah, Pathak, Singh, &

Anshul, 2016). They promote their ideas, slogans, guidelines etc. on social media so that a large number

of people can be aware of it and can have access to it.

Introduction

Social media has become a huge platform to promote one’s ideas and opinions.

It is the medium through which a person or organization can reach masses and appeal

to the whole nation. Therefore, social media also serves as a platform to promote the

right to vote for the Indian elections. Everyone in the country, especially the youth,

uses social media to communicate their ideologies and messages to everyone else in the

world (Chaffee &Kanihan, 1997; Safiullah, Pathak, Singh, &Anshul, 2016). As owning

a phone and an internet service has become very easy, the political parties want their

messages to reach far and wide. India is the world’s most populous country and that

means this country consists of a huge number of voters. India is a democratic country

and the candidates of the political party try to persuade the voters to vote for their party

through various strategies. Each and every vote counts and therefore, it is very

important that the maximum number of people who are eligible to vote are aware of the

elections and take part in the voting during the elections in order to determine the

governing body of their country. PTI (2019) stated that a study conducted by a digital

marketing company stated that around one-third of the voters that were voting for the

first time were motivated through the messages they saw online. Social media appeals



[187]

to the mindset of the youth and they become more curious to know what is going on

inside the nation they are living in. Their curiosity leads them to learn more about the

government of the country and therefore, they are urged to become a part of the

elections. They want to know who they are voting for is the right government.

According to an online report, in the elections of the year 2019, there was more

political movement on social media as compared to the elections in the year 2014 (PTI,

2019).

As people receive political news and messages through social media, they

become more updated about the ongoing situation of the country and the government.

They learn about the various works and goals of each government and become

influenced to be a part of the voters for the elections. They want to make sure that the

country is ruled by the right hands and that the elections are just and fair. Biswas, Ingle

and Roy (2014) state that social media is one of the major factors in influencing the

voting behavior of the youth as it provides them with a platform to interact and connect

with their desired political party. It is found that social media motivates the people to

vote by creating awareness about the elections (Safiullah, Pathak, Singh, &Anshul,

2016). The political party that is more socially active and interactive on social media is

found to have more followers and thus, more voters in their favor (Biswas, Ingle &

Roy, 2014).

The people of the country keep themselves updated about the recent

developments and progress of the country and the government through social media.

This platform allows them to share their opinions and ideas freely in the form of the

comments, posts, pictures and other such ways. All these ways lead to the increment of

engagement of people on the subject of politics and elections and urge the people to

take part in the elections. Not only the people but also the political parties use social

media to reach out to the people of the country in all age groups in order to promote

their campaigns through different techniques and strategies as these are very innovative

and reach a large amount of people in very less time (Safiullah, Pathak, Singh, &

Anshul, 2016).

Social media campaigns are basically the promotional activities done by the

political parties. A part of these campaigns are pictures, videos audios or any medium



[188]

for Virtual communication. A general study has shown that people nowadays are seen

more on their mobile phones as compared to any other thing happening around. People

prefer to read news online and check whatever is happening online. Therefore the

campaigns not only do promotional activities but also provide information to the people

(Biswas, Ingle, & Roy, 2014). These campaigns work in a manner of attracting people

such as ads with vibrant colors or any attractive tagline which captures the attention of

people and once the people seem to be interested in it, they start looking for more

information about the party. All these methods are used by the political parties to draw

the attention of the voters. The trends which are being followed on social media are

first observed, then relevant information regarding these trends is gathered so that the

political party could use an appropriate method to draw the attention of the voters.

After going through the process only the political party starts is social media campaigns

make sure it influences the right number of targeted people of the right number of

voters for the upcoming elections.

Social media has always played an important role in convincing the minds about

various things. Digital marketing is a part of it. Digital marketing has been proved as an

excellent example of promotional activities. Be it any product in the market or any

party in the political field, social media has helped them to get in touch with a large

number of people and convey their ideas. Social media campaigns have helped to gain

the trust of the local media because earlier when a political party made promises they

were just verbal promises and were not laid down anywhere but now all the ideas and

agendas are laid down on these online platforms which even serve as a measure to

recheck the performance of the party. Thus this helps in gaining the confidence of the

local people that whether the political leaders have kept their promises or not. Various

reports or statistical data is published on social media which circulates from one person

to another, these reports or data have calculated figures about facts related to politics,

the upcoming elections and various other topic concern with the politics of the country.

These facts and reports lay down some information based on which the voter’s decision

is influenced. This is also a method in which social media influences the voters. There

is a lot of information available on social media regarding the political situation of the

country as people continuously share their ideas, opinions and suggestions (Safiullah,



[189]

Pathak, Singh, & Anshul, 2016). Even online conferences are seen to be conducted

concerned with these matters. People who are an audience for all these, get affected by

the knowledge that is shared, there could be a positive response or a negative response

depending upon the knowledge shared. Therefore such participation of people is

considered healthy but is seen in favour of few parties the rest parties suffer negative

outcomes. To prevent such negative outcomes the parties need to plan their social

media campaigns strategically, thus social media campaigns influence the voters and

also serve as an important tool for the political parties.

Advertising on social media is one of the most powerful tools to spread a

political message far and wide. The political parties, especially BJP, has taken great

advantage of this tool to promote their political campaigns. They have created a brand

image of their leader, Narendra Modi, which appeals to the masses and through this

brand image they promote their ideas and views and urge the voters to vote for them

(Laroche, Habibi& Richard, 2013). This image of positivity has impacted a large

amount of population in India and everybody shares various posts based on Modi

urging them to vote for BJP. Modi has gained a major number of followers through this

brand image. People on social media share messages and pictures based on the brand

image of Modi to urge others to vote for his party. Various videos have been spread

throughout the nation about Narendra Modi that appeal to all kinds of people in the

country (Sohal& Kaur, 2018). Therefore, by creating a brand image of the leader of the

party, the whole party is being benefited as the voters will ultimately vote for the party

from which the leader belongs. The data of the voters, like their activities on social

media and their posts, is collected and then analyzed to gain more insight about them as

to what kind of material they like on social media and to what age group they fall in.

The political parties have invested huge sums of money to promote themselves through

advertising on social media because most of the population of the country is connected

to each other through social media. For example, the youth of the country will be more

attracted by funny pictures and quotes about the government and the country and the

older people will be more attracted by deep and patriotic messages and pictures. The

political parties also make use of psychological and emotional factors while

advertising. Wettstein and Wirth (2017) state that the reactions of the audience due to



[190]

their emotions encourage them to take part in various online discussions and forums

where they express their reactions freely. Thus, this data helps the political parties to

target the right population with the right messages. In order to prevent misuse of the

data, the social media sites have made it compulsory for the person requesting

information about the people of the country to share their identity proof so that they do

not spread any fake news against any political party. The identity proof also helps the

social media sites to know that the money they invest in advertising is not coming from

any unknown sources. Since social media is a very powerful tool to spread information,

it can also be used to spread false news about anything, therefore, it is important to

check that the information shared is true and reliable.

Figure 1 BJP's vote share (Livemint, 2019)

Advertising plays an important role in promotional activities. It covers the

maximum share for the promotional activities. Advertising, when done through the

internet on social media, proves to be highly effective. Advertising is not just for any

product but it is equally important for the political world also. It helps the political

parties to express their view and agendas to the people, to help people to be aware of

them and their goals. Therefore to keep up with the growing pace political parties have



[191]

taken these advertising online also. BJP in 2014 is considered a big example.

Advertising, when done through social media, is done in various ways, such as transfer

of audio, videos, visual or pictures. Since we live in a world where people prefer online

shopping over the physical market, the trends in online have started growing (Biswas,

Ingle, & Roy, 2014). This is the reason political parties have taken advertising or

promotional campaigns online.

Figure 2 BJP has benefited the most from increases in voter turnout (Livemint,

2019)

Social media has also become a platform for real-time conversations as the

political leaders are able to post their views and opinions about the recent happenings

around the world and the whole nation is able to see it and reply to it in the form of

comments and posts (Sohal& Kaur, 2018). Iyengar (2019) states that the people of the

country also get to express their opinions to the posts and actions of the political

leaders. They get to express their satisfaction as well as their disappointment towards

something related to politics on social media. The political parties and political leaders

become aware of the views and opinions of the public and learn about what is good and

bad for them. All these things help a lot as they need to form the goals that benefit the

public and make them content in the future. Thus, social media has helped to bridge the



[192]

communication gap between the public and the political leaders. Social media provides

the public with a space that makes them feel included and therefore, they are motivated

to vote in the elections.

The social media has a feature of live streaming messages and speeches of

various political leaders through which they can appeal to the people who are sitting at

home and using social media (Sohal& Kaur, 2018). The people can easily watch those

messages and videos and share them with others along with their opinions (Biswas,

Ingle, & Roy, 2014). During the live stream, the viewers can also express their opinions

and ideas by replying to the live stream through comments and pictures. Besides this,

the promoters of the political parties have created groups on social media by grouping

various kinds of population like a group of people who do not speak English or a group

of people from a particular state in the country and the promoters post messages and

pictures to promote their political campaign and urge the people to vote for their

respective parties.

Every year the number of first-time voter’s increase and these are the people

that are highly affected by social media. The first time voters are the youth of the

nation. It is said that the youth has always played an important part in the elections, so

campaigns on social media such as Facebook, Twitter and Instagram are conducted to

influence the mindset of the people. The influence created by the social media can be

either positive or negative, therefore the strategies formulated on these campaigns are

to be decided after considering various factors (Biswas, Ingle, & Roy, 2014). In 2019

elections it was seen that the excessive use of social media for campaigning by one

party served as a negative point for the other parties. The other parties were led to face

criticism due to this (Iyengar, 2019).

The right meaning of democracy comes into play when both the government

and the people of the country are involved in the development of the country. The

political parties organize online discussions and debates so that every individual can

take part in it and express their views and opinions (Iyengar, 2019). Through such

debates and discussions, everybody’s voice is heard and all of them feel like they play

an important role in forming the government of the country and various decisions



[193]

affecting the country. Therefore, social media has increased the interaction between the

government and the people of the country (Biswas, Ingle, & Roy, 2014). Even the

common people can communicate their demands and complaints to a higher level

through social media and social media makes sure that their demands and complaints

do not go unheard.

Furthermore, political parties use humorous messages and pictures to create a

negative image of the party opposing them. One of their strategies includes

disregarding the other parties and their leaders on the social media platform to lower

their reputation. BJP has given large sums of money to popular organizations on social

media to create memes and other humorous messages against INC which would reach a

large number of people (Iyengar, 2019). Thus, the political parties having a great and

strong presence on the social media stand out from the crowd.

Youth has been considered as an important target in the elections because of the

increasing number of first-time voters. After studying the trends which youth follows,

social media has been seen as an effective way to communicate with the youth. Not

only the exchange of information, ideas, agendas take place but the expectations of the

youth are also conveyed to the political parties. The youth feels that they have been

heard when the leaders respond to their suggestions which in return help to make their

decision regarding whom to vote. Before elections, social media advertising or the

digital market is seen at its peak (Iyengar, 2019). Various sessions are conducted to

know the demands of people. It is seen that online services which are available are must

faster. For example, when people face any difficulty in the railway they put it on twitter

and the Indian railways put efforts to help them. In this, social media serves as a

platform for the local people to convey their problems. In a similar manner, the political

leaders and the local people are kept in touch through social media. We see these

political leaders updating their actions on the nation (PTI, 2019). In this manner, virtual

communication takes place between the local people and the political leaders

(Wettstein& Wirth, 2017).



[194]

Figure 3 BJP's increase in vote shares (Livemint, 2019)

The youth of the country is the most informed group of voters in the country.

They are very broad-minded and do not discriminate amongst people. They accept all

kinds of people and all kinds of ideas. In order to appeal to them, the political parties

should be able to listen to them and speak to them in their language. The 2019 general

elections have seen a great surge of first-time voters and the youth of the country which

more than any other previous elections of the country (PTI, 2019; Iyengar, 2019). It is

mostly because all of them have a smartphone and a laptop these days and all of them

are connected to each other through social media. The internet is cheap and accessible

to everyone. Thus, almost every one of them comes across political messages and news.

Social media also provides them with the analysis and research about the various

political parties. This has increased the involvement of the youth and first-time voters

in the elections of the country. The more they learn about the country and its

government, the more they want to get involved to choose the right government which

will rule their country (Wettstein& Wirth, 2017).

The political leaders have also slowly become known to the ways and strategies

of social media as they want to connect more with the public. They depend a lot on

social media to promote their campaigns and political ideas. The political leaders are



[195]

able to share their views without being interrupted by the media people but however,

everyone else is allowed to reply and react to their views. These leaders are able to

make everyone aware of their political agenda. They can organize various meetings and

discussions and invite everyone through social media (Biswas, Ingle, & Roy, 2014).

Besides this, they can also invite people to various protests and other public related

activities. These leaders are able to communicate easily and without any boundaries

with the public and listen to their issues and demands. Modi is one of the most

significant leaders on social media with a great number of followers (Roy & Amin,

2019). He is active on a wide number of platforms. Previously BJP was active on the

social media with the aim to focus on the development of the country and anti-

corruption but with the 2019 elections, this party has shifted its focus to show that Modi

is the only great leader that is capable to ruling the country.

The use of social media was excessively seen in the 2014 Lok Sabha elections.

This was the first time political parties came on to promote their ideas of the party on

social media affecting a large number of people (Iyengar, 2019). During the elections,

people tend to become responsible about who to cast their vote and therefore start

gathering information about the political aspects of the parties and elections as well.

India has been estimated with a total of 150 million internet users in 2012 (Roy &

Amin, 2019). So the number of people on social media has been seen excessively high.

Social media is therefore considered as an effective way because of the large audience

it attracts at the same time. After 2012, the number of internet users has seen a rapid

increase by the time of elections in 2014 and election of 2019. These active internet

users portray a portion of the social media active users as well and this ratio tells us

about the number of people getting influenced regarding their voting decision through

social media (Laroche, Habibi& Richard, 2013).

The growing technology has made changes in the mindset of the voters as well,

and political leaders use these technologies to gather data about the voters such as the

various Google searches, the ads on social media help the political leaders. The

political leaders can gather the data regarding the expectations of the voters through

social media and then formulate their policies. Therefore the social media platform is

not only beneficial for the local people but also the political parties as well. One of the



[196]

examples can be seen by BJP in 2014. BJP prove to be an excellent example when it

comes to appropriates use of social media for promotional activities during the

elections (Roy & Amin, 2019). The same scenario was also seen in 2019 elections but

this tie the opposition party were also active users of social media to promote its ideas

such as INC. INC was seen using calculative strategies in the use of social media to

promote its ideas (Iyengar, 2019). Social media has always been used a communication

path, during the time of elections social media plays an important role because the ideas

of the voters are expressed on the social media and in the similar way the political

leaders also use social media as a communication device to present their views and

strategies so the maximum number of internet users can be aware of them (PTI, 2019).

The 2014 elections are considered as an example of the planned social media

strategies. BJP had its catchy tagline which was being promoted everywhere on social

media, people got used to the tagline and the word of mouth spread easily (Laroche,

Habibi& Richard, 2013; Roy & Amin, 2019). This helped BJP gain a lot of votes. BJP

made sure that the advertising should be done online in every possible way such as

posters, ads in between YouTube videos, ads on Google search or WhatsApp forward

messages are an example for all these campaigns which helped in the positive growth

of BJP. In 2019 again BJP made sure to use its opportunities available on social media

but this time the opposition party used it too. In such a case the results were seen that

one party could easily use the social media posters of the opposition party to edit or

mock them and then spread it among the internet users. In this way, the parties suffered

criticism as well. Therefore social media can not only serves as a positive medium but

also a negative medium depending upon the strategies used by the parties and the trends

being followed among the people (Wettstein& Wirth, 2017). The 2019 elections faced

this issue as there were negative promotions being done for the parties by the

opposition party.

Social media is not only playing an important role for the youth or the first time

voters but also for the other voters as well. People find it easy to gather information

about the political parties on the internet rather than doing research based on

newspapers and other information providing sources (Chaffee &Kanihan, 1997). The

people find various links or websites which are made with the basic purpose of



[197]

providing information only. Social media has also made easy access to the live sessions

being conducted by the parties. This states that people can have access to all these live

conference and sessions just by staying at home. They can be an active part of these

meetings. They can take active notice of what the agendas are and how the parties are

reacting to it and what decisions the parties are taking on any issue put forward.

Therefore all these benefits are provided through social media only and the voters get

influenced by all this information which is provided.

The use of social media is of great importance only if the party knows how to

use it and is well known to the strategies which are to be used while for the promotional

activities. If they do not look after the strategies of the opposition party then it can

create a negative influence on the voter as the opposition party may create a negative

impact of the party by using anything against them. Therefore social media techniques

are to be used with high concern and by being alert about the knowledge being shared.

It is very easy to transfer knowledge on social media when the authenticity of that

knowledge is not assured (Chaffee &Kanihan, 1997). Therefore the parties need to look

after the knowledge being shared that whether the knowledge or information which is

being spread among the people is fake or real. On social media the news spreads like

fire, therefore even if one person is hearing the news there are chances that it may

influence many voters Advertising plays an important role in the promotional activities.

It covers the maximum share for the promotional activities. Advertising, when done

through the internet on social media, proves to be highly effective. Advertising is not

just for any product but it is equally important for the political world also. It helps the

political parties to express their view and agendas to the people, to help people to be

aware of them and their goals. Therefore to keep up with the growing pace political

parties have taken these advertising online also. BJP in 2014 is considered a big

example (Roy & Amin, 2019). Advertising, when done through social media, is done in

various ways, such as transfer of audio, videos, visual or pictures. Since we live in a

world where people prefer online shopping over the physical market, the trends in

online have started growing (Biswas, Ingle, & Roy, 2014). This is the reason political

parties have taken advertising or promotional campaigns online. Therefore people need

to look at the news they are believing as one piece of information can cause a change of



[198]

min in the voting decision of the voters. Also, there are now indirect ways to provide

knowledge or information on the social media about the political action being

conducted and this is by portraying the piece of information in a humorous manner.

This method is widely accepted and is being used rapidly as not only it provided

information but people enjoy it while reading. This method, however, can also be used

to spread any unauthentic or fake news available on social media.

Figure 4 BJP's political dominance (Livemint, 2019)

It is during the elections when the voters are seen most alert and at this time

only maximum use of social media is seen by the parties. Political parties tend to use

social media to spread the videos of the rallies or the conferences which are performed

by the political leaders of that party (Roy & Amin, 2019). In a similar manner, a

political party can use any video of the opposition party where any action or speech of

action done by them is irrelevant and spread it against them to create a negative impact

of the party. Therefore it has been proved that the social media influences the voters,



[199]

but the influence can be either positive or negative depending on who is using it or

what are the strategies for using it (Wettstein and Wirth, 2017). The local people need

to be aware of the information being circulated, it is advised to check the piece of

information before making the decision of voting. The same rule lays down for the

political parties as well, they need to make sure that no fake news is being circulated

against them and it is important to convey the message regarding the information to the

people who are reading it and using the social media, because on social media one

piece of information can influence a great number of people reading it.

REFERENCES:

1. Biswas, A., Ingle, N. & Roy, M. (2014). Influence of Social Media on Voting

Behaviour. Journal of Power, Politics & Governance, 2(2), pp. 127-155.

2. Chaffee, S.H., &Kanihan, S.F. (1997). Learning about Politics from Mass Media.

Political Communication, 14(4), pp. 421-430.

3. Iyengar, R. (2019). In India’s last election, social media was used as a tool. This

time it could be a weapon. Retrieved from

https://www.cnn.com/2019/03/11/tech/india-election-whatsapp-twitter-

facebook/index.html

4. Laroche, M., Habibi, M.R. & Richard, M.O. (2013). To be or not to be in social

media: How brand loyalty is affected by social media? International Journal of

Information Management, 33, pp. 76-82.

5. Livemint. (2019). Ten charts that explain the 2019 Lok Sabha verdict. Retrieved

from https://www.livemint.com/elections/lok-sabha-elections/ten-charts-that-

explain-the-2019-lok-sabha-verdict-1558636775444.html

6. PTI. (2019). Social media plays key role in influencing first time voters: Report.

Retrieved from https://economictimes.indiatimes.com/news/elections/lok-

sabha/india/social-media-plays-key-role-in-influencing-first-time-voters-

report/articleshow/69295605.cms

7. Roy, T.L. & Amin, R. (2019). 2019 elections: A regulated social media war.

Retrieved from

https://www.google.com/amp/s/www.exchange4media.com/amp/digital-

news/2019-elections-a-regulated-social-media-war-95065.html



[200]

8. Safiullah, M., Pathak, P., Singh, S. & Anshul. A. (2016). SOCIAL MEDIA IN

MANAGING POLITICAL ADVERTISING: A STUDY OF INDIA. POLISH

JOURNAL OF MANAGEMENT STUDIES, 13(2), DOI:

10.17512/pjms.2016.13.2.12

9. Sohal S. & Kaur, H. (2018). A Content Analysis of YouTube Political

Advertisements: Evidence from Indian Parliamentary Elections. 13(2), pp. 133-

156.

10. Wettstein, M. & Wirth, W. (2017). Media Effects: How Media Influence Voters.

Swiss Political Science Review, 23(3), pp. 262-269, DOI: 10.1111/spsr.12263



[201]

Elements of Realism In The Stories of William Dean Howells

Dr. Seema Yadav

Abstract :- Howells was realistic write. His realism was a gradual growth. At first he made no distinction

between novel and romance. It was only in the 1860s that he used the term for the first time for the prose

narrative. In 1871, he wrote to his father from Boston to make his way through ‘Personalised fiction.’

This idea grew with him and came up fully developed in his novels of the 1880s. His early novels of

manners, published before 1880, are realistic as they potray manners of people around him. Till 1880,

realism in America did not attract much attention. But by the early 1880s it was fixed. In 1884 Howells

found that realism in America was almost the only literary movement of his time that has vitality in it.

His realism, was much influenced by the French and Russian writers but it was a native growth also, and

it had a soul of its own. He undoubtedly got inspiration and guidance from foreign writers but

supplemented it by his own native sources. His realism was American. After getting the inspiration he

was waiting for, he settled his line forever. He felt that besides the influence on him, he had forever been

a realist himself.

Key words : - Realism, Romance, Inspiration, Common man.

Objectives of the Study :-

1. To study elements of realism in the short stories of Howells.

2. To study scope of realism in the short stories writings of Howells.

Introduction:-

Howells propounded his own theory of realism suited to his own temperament,

the taste of the contemporary people, and the temper of the age. When he began his

career as a writer, his aim was consistent opposition to sentimental literature, which

occupied the literary platform in America. He condemned the romantic literature

which, like an opium, dulled the senses and clogged the normal workings of the mind.

He attacked the sentimental view of life and directed his revolt against the literature

which imitated art in place of life : His personal and -social morality, much of his

literary practice, and much of his battle for realism stemmed from that revolt. ...”92 He

opposed the sentimental -literature because it was the literature of make-believe and

92 The Road to Realism, p. 123



[202]

false picture of life. This literature provided an escape from”. The weariness, and the

Sever and the 'fret" of the workaday world. Condemning the unusual, the strange, the

heroic, the exotic, and the sentimental, he worshipped the real, the colloquial, the

moderate, the optimistic, the domestic and the democratic : "But let fiction cease to lie

about life; let it portray men and women as they are actuated by the motives and

passions in the measure we all know, let it leave off painting dolls and working them by

springs and wires: let it show the different interest in their true proportions : let it

forbear to preach pride and revenge, folly and insanity, egotism and prejudice, but

frankly own on these for what they are, in whatever figures and occasions they -

appear... ".93

The proper study of Howells realism was common man. He saw the universe in

the individual, all men within every man. He says in A Hazard o New Fortunes, “There

is the making of several characters in each of us; we are each several characters; and

sometimes this character has the lead in us and sometimes that.”94 He found literary

possibilities in common facts and events of human life, which would enable the reader

to make valid generalizations about human nature. The material for the realistic novel

proposed by him was not the glorification of power and passion, not the deification of

self.

The theme of Howells short stories are realism as the controlling factor. The

general subject matter derives from the average life of middle-class America. This life

consists of a series of decisions, actions and reactions, assessments of immediate

situations. In most cases, the only way in which a person can determine whether or not

he has acted or chosen wisely is through the actual, verifiable consequences, if he

attempts of evaluate them. If he tries, the reality of many situations remains illusive to

him and sometimes to an objective viewer as well.

The theme of the first story, “Doorstep Acquaintance”, is a casual introduction

with Italian people living in Ferry Street, Boston, New York. The second story, "His

Apparition", deals with the incident of apparition seen by the hero. The third story,

"The Angel of the Lord," explains the fear of death in man since his childhood. The

next story, "Though One Rose from the Dead," is a study of the occult, or 93 Criticism and Fiction, p. 104 94 George W. Arms; (cd) A Hazard of New Fortunes -(Newyork: EP. Dutton & Company, 1952) p. 540.



[203]

psychomancy. It throws light on life after death. "Editha" is about the Spanish-

American war and presents three conflicting views on the war through Editha Balcom,

George Gearson and Mrs Gearson. "Braybridge’s Offer" is concerned with the offer. of

Braybridge for marriage with Miss Hazelwood. The theme of "The Eidolons of Brooks

Alford" is about an experience of Alford about seeing eidolons of different people. "A

Case of. Metaphantasmia" is a story about metaphantasmia. It is about though-

transference in sleep from one person to another. The theme of "The Chick of the

Easter Egg" is religious. It is concerned with the feast and festivity on Easter day in

Bethlehem, Pennsylvania.

Howells' characters in the short stories under our study are in a direct

relationship to his age and experience He wrote about the kind of middle-class

American people with whom he was familiar in respect to age, origin, occupation,

socio-economic label, and interests. As his view-point broadened, his scope of

characters also broadened; but some segments of society, such as Southerners,

Orientals or far Westerners, are rarely depicted. Most of his characters are from the

general area of his birth or Easterners. Mostly they live in village or move from villages

to cities.

References :-

1. Abel, Darrel, A Mercian Literature, Masterworks of American Realism, New York,

1963.

2. Birth off, Warner, The Ferment of Realism : American Literature 1884-1919, New

York, Free Press, 1965.

3. Cady, Edwin H. ‘The Light of common, day, Realism In American Fiction,

Bloomington, 1971.

4. The road to realism, the early years of William Dean Howells, Syracuse, 1956.

5. Carter, Everett, Howells, and the age of realism, Philadelphia, 1954.



[204]

The Nature and Scope of Consumer Protection Act 1986

Vatsalya Upadhyay Research Scholar,

Himalayan University, Itanagar

Abstract : At the outset it comes to our mind, why Consumers Protection Act 1986 has been

enacted, when the series of laws are in existence like Contract Act. Sale of Goods Act,

Prevention Of Food Adulteration Act, Weights mid Measures Act and MRTP Act to protect and

safeguard the rights and interests of the persons as consumers and also as citizens. From our

experience, we find that the existing laws, systems and methods of enforcement thereof are too

much cumbersome expensive, technical and time consuming and are not capable to protect the

interest of the consumers. Apart from the various complaints of short weight, adulteration, red

tape corruption and other social problems, the existing legal provisions and administrative

methods were inadequate to provide protection to the consumers. Although the earlier

enactments tried to help the consumer but it became far cry due to time consuming and

expensive judicial process which could not discharge the duties and social obligations in a

faster manner.

Keywords : Consumer, Exploitation, Legislation, Goods Services, Commodities.

Objectives of the study :

1. To study the aim and objects of the consumer protection Act 1986.

2. To study various provisions and its scope.

3. To study the impact of this Act on the redressal of complaints of consumer.

Introduction

The consumer is a person who buys goods and avails the services by paying the

price for needs and demands. Looking to the exploitation of consumers, the Govt. of

India has enacted a socio-economic legislation in the name of Consumer Protection Act

1986 to ensure the protection of the consumers and to provide them inexpensive

remedy within short-time and a summary and simple procedure for disposal of

complaints. The Act has been given a shape of a law of correction and not a punitive

law.

The ever increasing population, illiteracy and cultural, diversities created a

market where the goods and services could not get matching supply. This phenomena



[205]

created an imbalance between the buyers and sellers and gave rise to a market where

the traders tried to adopt the diverse practices coming under definition of “Unfair Trade

Practice”. The series of outslaughts prevailed on the consumer like excessive price of

goods and deterioration in the quality of goods etc. In the early days the theory of

"Caviat Emptor” was laid down for the law of the sales. The theory of "Caviat Emptor"

let the buyer beware throws the entire responsibility on the buyer, if the purchases the

goods commodities. This theory envisaged that every man must look out for himself.

The theory of "Caviat Emptor" was used by the traders and manufacturers against the

interest of consumer. The increased deceptive practices to exploit the purchasers placed

the emphasis in the recent years that not the buyer but the seller must be aware about

the genuineness of the goods. As a result of this change, the Government heavily

regulated the business on behalf of the consumer. The primary theme of the

Government was to protect the consumer from the business community. The Consumer

Protection Law was thought to be enacted because the provisions of the Contract Act

1972 relating to fraud and misrepresentation and the law relating to guarantees and

warrantees were found incapable to give adequate protection to consumers against

deceptive trade practices. The high cost of litigation and unduly long time consuming

court process, fear and embarrassment were the major constraints in the way of

redressal. An individual consumer was unable to approach the court for the redressal of

his grievance. The position of consumer was very weak in the market. The exploitation

of the consumer gave birth to the consumer movements which brought the awareness

and initiated the idea that it is not the consumer but the seller, manufacturer or trader

who owes a duly to not to over look the interest of consumer and to be fair towards the

society.

Unfortunately these enactments could not satisfy the demands and expectations

of consumers as series of these laws did not provide speedy reliefs and compensation to

the consumers against the exploitations at the hands of manufacturers, traders and

sellers being preventive or punitive in its application. The Government thought that for

the economic progress of the Nation it is necessary to maintain a balance and ethical

co-relation in between the producers of and supplier of the services and consumers.

Ultimately the Consumer Protection Act, 1986 was passed to provide the effective,



[206]

inexpensive, simple and speedy redressal for the consumer grievance. The Act

established a clear and transparent provision for the effective disposal of consumer

disputes which Civil courts could not able to afford.

The Consumer Protection Act 1986 was brought in Lok Sabha on 9th December,

1986. The nature of the Act which had been commended in Lok Sabha in brief is as

follows.

“This Bill is a landmark in the field of socioeconomic legislation of the country.

This comprehensive bill is in addition to and not in replacement of any other law on the

subject of consumer protection. The Bill enshrines the rights of the consumers to he

promoted and protected by the Consumer Protection Councils in the Centre and the

States and the redressal machinery at the national, State and District levels. This

legislation intends to provide prompt and meaningful remedy for consumer grievances,

but its success will depend on effective implementation of its provisions by the Central

and State Governments....”

This legislation was enacted to provide speedy and in expensive redressal to the

aggrieved consumers and to promote a strong voluntary consumer movement to

implement the objects in better spirit. The Act is a unique piece of legislation which is

pro every one but is against none, as each of us including a manufacture, a trader or an

industrialist is a consumer.

The features of the Act in brief can be discussed in the following manner:

1. The Act applies to all goods and services unless specifically exempted by the

Central Government. The scope of the Act is very wide as it covers all sectors

whether private or public. The provisions of the Acts are compensatory in nature.

2. The Act provides simple, speedy and inexpensive redressal for the consumers.

3. The Act in order to foster the interest of Me consumer enacted three types of quasi-

judicial machinery at the National level, State level and District level. The

provisions of the Acts are in addition to and not in derogation of the provisions of

any other law for the time being in force.

The distinct and unique features of the Act are as follows :

1. The aggrieved consumer can file a complaint before the Consumer Disputes

Redressal Agencies;



[207]

(a) If he has suffered a loss or injury on account of supply of defective goods.

(b). If he has suffered a loss or damage due In deficient service, rendered or agreed

to be rendered to him in connection with bunking, financing, insurance, transport,

supply of Electricity, professional services and others.

2. The aggrieved consumer can file a complaint against Housing Boards and other

bodies including the Improvement Trusts engaged in providing the house by

acquisition of land, construction of house, development of sites, allotment of plots

and houses to the public. The services rendered for consideration (payment of

money) by Central or Stale Government comes under the scope and ambit of Act.

The medical services given by any nursing home or doctor for consideration are

also covered under the Act and the consumer tan file the complaint spiting the

nursing homes and doctors in respect of deficient services.

3. The consumer can file a complaint without the assistance of any advocate and the

complaint can be filed either in English or Hindi or even in local language stating

out the facts and description of loss of injury suffered by him.

4. The consumer can plead his case before the Consumer Disputes Redressal Agencies

himself or through his attorney.

5. The Act has made a provision for the consumers to file the case without court fee.

The filing of appeal in Supreme Court against the order of National Commission

has also been kept free without payment of court fee.

6. The orders passed by any Consumer Disputes Redressal Agency are supplied to the

party free of cost.

7. The consumer can file a complaint before any Consumer Disputes Redressal

Agency (Consumer Forum) according to the territorial and pecuniary jurisdiction.

Conclusion :

The Consumer Protection Act 1986 has opened new vistas in the process of

consumer awareness, redressal of their problems and has created an atmosphere of

awareness about the rights and finding solutions.



[208]

References :

1. Agarwal, V.K., Law of consumer protection, 2016, Bharat Law House, New

Delhi.

2. Nabi Mohammad Kamaluu, Consumer Rights and Protection in India, New

century publications, 2015, New Delhi.

3. Bakshi, P.M., consumer protection law Ashoka Law House, 2004, New Delhi.

4. Kumar, N., consumer protection in India, Himalaya Publishing House, 2007,

Mumbai.

5. Kapoor, N.D., Elements of Mercantile Law, Sultan Chand and South, 2005, New

Delhi.



[209]

An Overview of Indian Banking System

Aloukik Upadhyay Research Scholar

Himalayan University, Itanagar

Abstract :

Banking sector is the major component in the financial sector in India. In the

post liberalization era, increase in the capitalization has been done through

diversification of ownership to private investors up to a limit of 49%. The post

liberalization has made many changes in the banking sector in many ways. The

enhancement and stability in this sector has led to the efficiency of banks. The process

of reforms has improved the financial health of commercial banks. The deregulation

has opened up new opportunities for banks to increase revenues. The entire era has

witnessed greater competition among banks. Now, the focus is on soft interest rate

regime, increasing operational efficiency, strengthening regulatory mechanisms and

technological up-gradation.

Key words : - Liberalization, Reforms, Competition, Social Control, Deregulation

Objectives of the study :

1. To trace the history of banking sector in India.

2. To evaluate the changes after post liberalization era in banks.

3. To study various facets of changes being taken up in banking sector.

Introduction :

The banking system forms the core of the financial sector of an economy. The

role of commercial banks is particularly important in underdeveloped countries.

Through mobilisation of resources and their better allocation, commercial banks play

an important role in the development process of underdeveloped countries. By offering

attractive saving schemes and ensuring safety of deposits, commercial banks encourage

willingness to save among the people. By reaching out to people in rural areas, they

help convert idle savings into effective ones. Commercial banks improve the allocation

of resources by lending money to priority sectors of the economy. These banks provide

a meeting ground for the savers and the investors.



[210]

The process of financial development in independent India has hinged

effectively on the development of banking system. Financing of emerging trade and

industrial activities during the 1950s and the 1960s reflected the dominance of banking

as the critical source. Functionally, banks catered to the needs of the organised

industrial and trading sectors. The primary sector consisting of agriculture, forestry, and

fishing had to depend largely on their own financing and on sources outside the

commercial banks.

It is against this backdrop that the process of banking development was given

impetus with the adoption of the policy of social control over banks in 1967, reinforced

in 1969 by the nationalisation of 14 major scheduled commercial banks. Since then, the

banking system has formed the core of the Indian financial system. Driven largely by

public sector initiative and policy activism, commercial banks have a dominant share in

total financial assets and are the main source of financing for the private corporate

sector. They also channel a sizeable share of household savings to the public sector.

Besides, in recent years, they have been performing most of the payment system

functions. With increased diversification in recent years, banks in both public and

private sectors have been providing a wide range of financial services.

Prior to reforms, the banking sector suffered from lack of competition, low

capital base, inefficiency and high intermediation costs. Ever since the bank

nationalisation of 1969, the banking sector had been dominated by the public sector

along with a high degree of financial repression characterised by administered interest

rates and allocated credit. Over the reforms period, the banking system has experienced

tremendous growth in the sophestication and size of non-bank intermediation.

Banking sector reforms introduced in the early 1990s in a gradual and

sequenced manner, were directed at the removal of various deficiencies from which the

system was suffering. The basic objectives of reforms were to make the system more

stable and efficient so that it could contribute in accelerating the growth process.

Banking sector reforms have supported the transition of the Indian economy to a higher

growth path, while significantly improving the stability of the financial system. In

comparison of the pre-reform period, the Indian banking system today is more stable

and efficient. However, the gains of the past decade have to be consolidated, so that



[211]

these could be translated to drive the institutions, markets and practices into a mature

financial system that can meet the challenges of sustaining India on a higher growth

trajectory. The banks would need to reassess their core banking business to view how

best they could undertake maturity transformation to step up the lendable resources in

support of real economic activity.

The focus of on-going reforms in the banking sector is on soft interest rate

regime, increasing operational efficiency of banks, strengthening regulatory

mechanisms and technological up-gradation. Banking sector reforms in India are

grounded in the belief that competitive efficiency in the real sectors of the economy

will not realise its full potential unless the banking sector was reformed as well. Thus,

the principal objective of banking sector reforms was to improve the allocative

efficiency of resources and accelerate the growth process of the real sector by removing

structural deficiencies affecting the performance of banks.

The banking industry has been witnessing great strides in technology up-

gradation. Electronic funds transfer facility (EFT) is currently available in major cities

in the country. With a view to extending benefits of EFT to all locations in the country

and to provide for transfer of messages relating to funds transfer in a safe and secured

manner, RBI is considering a proposal to commence national electronic funds transfer.

With the operationalisation of this facility, it would be possible to make the facility of

EFT available from any branch of a bank, which has connectivity to the Indian

financial network.

The most significant achievement of financial sector reforms has been a marked

improvement in the financial health of the commercial banking sector, which

constitutes the most important segment of the Indian financial system. Asset - quality of

commercial banks, which before the initiation of reforms, was at a very precarious

level, improved significantly even as norms were tightened over the years and the

economy slowed down. The capital position of commercial banks also improved

significantly and was somewhat higher than the prescribed level. Profitability of the

commercial banking sector improved despite decline in spread, which itself is a

measure of efficiency. Although commercial banks' still face the problem of overhang

of NPAs, high spread and low profitability in comparison with banks in other emerging



[212]

market economies, reforms have been successful in enhancing the performance of

commercial banks in terms of both stability and efficiency parameters.

With the increasing integration of various segments of financial markets, the

distinctions between banks and other financial intermediaries are also getting

increasingly blurred. Another important aspect of reforms in the financial sector has

been the increased participation of financial institutions, especially banks, in the capital

market. These factors have led to increased inter-linkages across financial institutions

and markets. While increased inter-linkages are expected to lead to increased efficiency

in the resource allocation process and the effectiveness of monetary policy, they also

increase the risk of contagion from one segment to another with implications for overall

financial stability. This would call for appropriate policy responses during times of

crisis. Increased inter-linkages also raise the issue of appropriate supervisory

framework.

Despite substantial improvements in the banking sector, some issues have to be

addressed over time as the reform process is entrenched further. The discussion on

banking developments revolves around on a wide range of issues including the

following.

1. Overall redrawing of boundaries between the State ownership of financial entities

and private sector ones.

2. Public sector character of the banking sector and efficiency.

3. Dilution of the government stake and its impact on the performance of the banking

sector.

4. Corporate governance in banks and other segments of the financial system.

5. Transparency of policies and practices of monetary and financial agencies and

accountability.

6. Prudential requirements of market participants together with comprehensive and

efficient oversight of the financial system.

7. Maintenance of best practices in accounting and auditing, as also collection,

processing and dissemination of symmetric and detailed information to meet the

market needs.



[213]

References :

1. Ahluwalia, M.S., Second Generation Reforms in the Banks : Major Issues, paper

presented at the Bank Economists’ Conference (January 2001), New Delhi.

2. Bhatt, Nitin, Thorat, Y.S.P. (2001), “India’ Regional Rural Banks. The Institutional

Dimension of Reforms”, Journal of Microfinance, Vol. 3, No. 1.

3. Kohli, S.S., Loan Default and Profitability of Banks, IBA Bulletin, January 2001.

4. Kulkarni, R.V., Changing Face of Banking from Brick and Mortar Banking to E-

banking, IBA Bulletin, January 2000.

5. Medha P. Tapiawala, Banking Reforms and Productivity in India 2010, New

Century Publication, New Delhi, December 1988.

6. Reddy, Y.V., Financial Sector Reforms and RBI’s Balance sheet Management, RBI

Bulletin, December 1997.



[214]

Electronics in Energy System

Vinod Kumar Department of physics

Government Degree College, Pihani Hardoi

Abstract In today and also in future the impact of greenhouse gas emissions and the accelerated

augmentation in global energy consumption have swift the transition towards greener energy sources.

For this the renewable energy system has been using very frequently. The non-renewable and renewable

energy systems are the categories of Distributed Energy Resources (DER). As the coupling technology

for DERs, the major advantages of power electronics will be the potential for improving efficiency and

the introduction of new control possibilities for providing ancillary services to the electric grid. This

paper reviews most non renewable and renewable DER systems, and discusses the power electronics as

the coupling technology in the light of the prospects and possible trends in the future. Also briefly

describes the attributes of distributed generation (DG). A qualitative description of the role of power

electronics in Non renewable energy system (Internal combustion engine, Micro turbine & Fuel cell

systems) and Renewable energy system (Wind, Solar & Photovoltaic systems) has been presented.

Keywords: On-site Generation, Distributed Energy Resources (DER), Renewable Energy Sources

(RES), Power electronics, Ancillary services, combined heat and power (CHP).

I. INTRODUCTION:-

According to International Energy Agency (IEA) data from 1990 to 2008, the

average energy use per person increased 10% while world population increased 27%.

And as of 2010, about 16% of global final energy consumption comes from renewable

but at the same time the fossil fuels (liquid, coal and natural gas) have been the primary

energy source for the present day world which is of non-renewable energy system. So

the renewable as well as non-renewable energy system both is important for human

development. Distributed generation (DG) applications today are primarily for niche

markets where additional power quality is desired or local onsite generation is desired.

In some cases, the distributed energy resource (DER) is designated for backup and peak

power shaving conditions. Power electronics currently are used to interface certain

DER such as fuel cells, solar cells, and micro turbines to the electric power grid to

convert high-frequency ac or dc voltage supplied by the DE source to the required 60-

Hz ac voltage of the grid. In case of DG systems, the power electronic interface has to

regulate the voltage, frequency, and power to link the energy source to the grid. The



[215]

focus will be on high power density, robust dc-ac and ac-ac modules with complex

control and safety requirements. This paper makes a review of DER systems which

includes both renewable and non renewable energy technologies with a focus on the

coupling power electronics to the utility grid. It discusses needs for future research and

points out some possible directions for the future. This paper presents some of the

requirements of the power electronic interface as applicable with respect to both

renewable and non-renewable power generation units and qualitatively examines the

existing power electronic topologies that can be employed. Energy storage is also very

important for DG; however, this paper focuses on the power electronics aspects of DG.

II. RENEWABLE & NON RENEWABLE SYSTEMS AND THEIR POWER

ELECTRONICS COUPLING- In this paper the renewable and under DER and both

of them are further classified as follows:

Renewable generation units-

Wind energy system

Photovoltaic system

Wave energy system

Non-renewable generation units-

Internal combustion engine systems

Micro turbine systems

Fuel cell systems

For all above systems the power electronic devices can be used in place of

traditional power devices such as switches, capacitors, inductors etc. and can perform

several of these functions with a single device. The power electronic coupling accepts

power from distributed energy sources and converts it as desirable power with

frequency and voltage. In below the required power electronics coupling discussed for

each of the application.

Wind energy system-

Wind power is the conversion of wind energy into a useful form of energy, such

as using wind turbines to make electrical power, windmills for mechanical power. The

electrical output can either be AC or DC. In the last case a power converter will be used

as interface to the grid. High frequency direct AC-AC conversion has also been



[216]

proposed as coupling of wind energy conversion systems to the grid. Matrix converters

have also been proposed for wind energy generation systems, both with partially rated

and full scale converters for variable speed mode of operation. Additionally, the

presence of power converters in wind turbines also provides high potential control

capabilities for both large modern wind turbines and wind farms to fulfill the high

technical demands imposed by the grid operators such as: controllable active and

reactive power (frequency and voltage control); quick response under transient and

dynamic power system situations, influence on network stability and improved power

quality.

Photovoltaic energy system-

Photovoltaic energy systems consist of arrays of solar cells which create

electricity from irradiated light. The designed system includes PV cells as the main

source of energy, electric storage (battery), maximum power point tracking (MPPT)

and protection circuitries. An MPPT algorithm based on measuring the slope of the PV

power-voltage curves is presented which can be implemented with simple analog

electronic circuits. PV panels are formed by connecting a certain number of solar cells

in series. Since the cells are connected in series to build up the terminal voltage, the

current flowing is decided by the weakest solar cell. PV modules are connected in

series and/or in parallel and then connected to a centralized DC/AC converter. There

are also string-array PV systems in which series of PV panels are connected in the form

of a single string and connected to the grid with one inverter per string. There exists

also a configuration where PV strings have a DCDC converter plus and inverter

offering the possibility of maximum power point tracking for maximizing the power

production of the PV system.

Wave energy systems-

Wave energy is the transport of energy by ocean surface waves, and the capture

of that energy to do useful work — for example, electricity generation, water

desalination, or the pumping of water (into reservoirs). Machinery able to exploit wave

power is generally known as a wave energy converter (WEC). Waves are generated by

wind passing over the surface of the sea. As long as the waves propagate slower than

the wind speed just above the waves, there is an energy transfer from the wind to the



[217]

waves. Both air pressure differences between the upwind and the lee side of a wave

crest, as well as friction on the water surface by the wind, making the water to go into

the shear stress causes the growth of the waves. The primary advantage of most power

electronic coupling is the possibility to integrate energy storage units such as super

capacitors, or superconducting magnetic energy storage (SMES) in the DC link of

converters and provide additional support to the grid. There are other possibilities that

are emerging now but still at the level of research based on direct AC-AC link

conversion technology that has been reported and used for lower power level

applications such as UPS.

Internal combustion engine systems-

The internal combustion engine system firstly converts chemical energy into

mechanical energy which in turn spins a shaft to convert the mechanical energy into

electrical energy. The energy can be converted in DC as well as AC. With power

electronics as interface, the combined efficiency of engine generator can be optimized

and provide the flexibility of adding energy storage systems for islanded mode of

operation.

Microturbine system-

Microturbine system has shafts spinning at up to 120.000 rpm driving a high

speed generator. The high frequency output from the generator is first rectified and then

converted to grid frequency AC power. Microturbines are appropriately sized for

commercial buildings or light industrial markets for combined heat and power (CHP) or

power only applications. In high speed microturbine applications the generated three

phase high frequency voltage, typically in the range of 1000 to 3000 Hz must be

converted to line frequency before it becomes usable for the consumer and/or utility.

The power electronics can also be designed to provide ancillary services to the

consumer or power grid such as voltage support, load following, operating reserve,

backup supply. Then a DCAC inverter is used to build up three phase voltages at the

frequency of the grid. The microturbine generator feeds three phase power into a

rectifier and the DC is then fed into a high frequency single phase inverter so that a

compact high frequency transformer can be used. The secondary of the transformer

feeds an ACAC converter that takes the single phase high frequency voltage to produce



[218]

a three phase voltage at the frequency and phase needed to make a connection to the

grid. No manufacturer is presently marketing this high frequency link system but it is a

configuration of future interest. Matrix converter can also be a solution for coupling the

microturbine to the grid with the disadvantages of higher number of switches and the

lack of a DC or AC link to store energy that will make fluctuations at either side of the

converter directly visible to the other side.

Fuel cell systems-

These are electrochemical devices that produce electricity without any

intermediate power conversion stage. The advantage is the energy density that is nearly

10 times that of a battery. Fuel cells like PV systems produce DC power and thus

power conditioning systems are required to be able to couple them to the grid. If

isolation or high ratio of voltage conversion is required a transformer is integrated into

the system. The main drawback of this system is that a line frequency transformer

placed at the output of the inverter makes the system bulky and expensive.

III. POWER ELECTRONICS COSTS AND OTHER COSTS FOR DER’s

SYSTEMS

Power electronics account for 20-40% of the total system cost. In order to see

widely spread distributed energy systems in the future, cost of the coupling power

electronics must be given a serious consideration. Power electronics can amount for a

significant part of the total cost of a typical DER application.

IV. CONCLUS ION-

The importance of renewable energy, renewable energy based energy

conversion systems, and distributed power generation as well as non-renewable energy,

nonrenewable energy based energy conversion has been reiterated. The unique

advantages of using power electronic couplings have been discussed throughout the

paper and can be summarised in the following features: - Flexibility to integrate energy

storage units in the converter DC link to provide power quality support and ancillary

services such as reactive support by generating units and loads, - Maximum power

point tracking for PV and wind energy systems, - Dispatching capabilities with energy

storage units, - Improved efficiency, -Variable speed operation ability allowing for fuel

usage optimisation. In order to make possible all the potentialities mentioned in the



[219]

paper, intensive research and development in the power electronics technology is

strongly needed.

References:-

1. Power Electronics for Distributed Energy Systems and Transmission and Distribution Applications, Technical Report Oak Ridge National Laboratory ORNL/TM-2005/230 Dec. 2005.

2. W. Kramer, S. Chakraborty, B. Kroposki, H. Thomas, “Advanced Power Electronics Interfaces for Distributed Energy Systems,” Technical Report National Renewable Energy Laboratory NREL/TP581-42672 March 2008.

3. R. H. Staunton, B. Ozpineci, "Micro turbine power conversion technology review," Report Oak Ridge National Laboratory ORNL/TM-2003/74, April 2003

4. Frede Blaabjerg, Zhe Chen,and Soren Baekhoej Kjaer, "Power Electronics as Efficient Interface in Dispersed Power Generation Systems," IEEE Trans. Power Electron.,vol. 19, no. 5, pp. 1184-1194, Sep. 2004.

5. F. Delfino, R. Procoppio, "Photovoltaic generating units as reactive supply ancillary service providers," in International Journal of Emerging Electric Power Systems, vol. 9, no. 4, Oct. 2008.

6. A. B. Mogstad, M. Molinas, P. K. Olsen, R. Nilssen, “A power conversion system for offshore wind parks," in Proc. of the 34th Annual Conference of the IEEE Industrial Electronics Society IECON 2008, Florida, USA Nov. 2008.

7. M. Molinas, O. Skjervheim, P. Andreasen, T. Undeland, J. Hals, T. Moan, B. Sorby,"Power Electronics as grid interface for actively controlled wave energy converters," in Proc. of International Conference of Clean Electrical Power, Capri Italy, May 2007.

8. F. Schimpf, L. Norum,"Grid connected converters for photovoltaic, state of the art, ideas for improvement of transformer less inverters,” in Proc of NORPIE 2008, Finland, June 2008.

9. W. Short, P. Denholm, A preliminary assessment of plug in hybrid electric vehicle in wind energy markets, National Renewable Energy Laboratory NREL/TP-620-39729.

10. S. Lentendre, P. Denholm, Power Utilities Fortnightly, pp. 28-37, Dec. 2006. 11. A. Brooks, Vehicle to grid demonstration project: grid regulation ancillary service

with a battery electric vehicle, AC propulsion , Dec. 2002.



[220]

12. M. Molinas, D. Moltoni. G. Fascendini, J.A. Suul, R. Faranda, T. Undeland, “Investigation on the role of power electronics controlled constant power loads for voltage support in distributed AC systems,” in Proc. of IEEE Power Electronics Specialists Conference, Rodhes, Greece, June 2008.

13. IEEE 1547 Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with Electric Power Systems

14. E. Santi, D. Franzoni, A. Monti, D. Patterson, F. Ponci, N. Barry, "A fuel Cell Based Domestic Uninterruptible power Supply,", in proc, APEC 2002 Conf, 2002, .vol. 1; pp. 605-613.

15. Juan Manuel Carrasco, Leopoldo Garcia Franquelo, Jan T. Bialasiewicz, Eduardo Galvan, Ramon C. Portillo Guisado, Ma. Angeles Martin Prats, Jose Ignasio Icon, and Narciso Moreno Alfonso, "Power-Electronic Systems for the Grid Integration of Renewable Energy Sources: A Survey," IEEE Trans. Ind. Electron., vol. 53, no. 4, pp. 1002-1016, Aug. 2006.



[221]

A Positive Approach to Physical Education Profession through Health, Fitness and Health Education

Dr. Vijay Singh Chaudhary

Asst. Prof. (Phy. Edu.) Govt. P.G. College Jalesar, Etah (U.P.)

Anil Kumar, P.G. College, Dahina Introduction

Spiritually, as we know that we are meant for a specific task. So, being in this

profession we all must develop a positive attitude towards the spreading culture of

physical education and physical fitness all over the country through awaring the youth

in colleges or universities for physical fitness, by telling them the importance of fitness

in achieving the real aim of life i.e. Happy and Healthy living, our profession also have

the some aim in other words i.e. Holistic development of the individual or personality. I

Say the actual enjoyment of life is totally depend on the fitness only. Its our prime duty

to set a example for students and society in term of physical fitness, Health and

wellbeing, metal fitness (Mental alertness), social adjustment, leadership qualities.

Better communication etc. Now the people and authorities (state or centre Govt.) are

realising the importance of phy.edu. in many ways, so it is the time to relive our duties

or responsibilities for our profession. Then How this profession would be spread &

achieved its goal al. i.e. all round development of students but this would be only

possible when the professionals would full fill their duties with the full positivity and

would do Hard Work, and continuous acquiring knowledge with updates, perseverance,

Better communication skills, and do things for the welfare of the students this aim

would also be supported by creating sports environment, develop sports facilities,

Better communication with update knowledge, then only we would be on right track to

bring physical Education in the Academic front or in the mainstream of academics.

DAVID BECKHAM Said- It’s not about the name on the back of the jersey; it’s

about the badge on the front. Mental fitness- you have to be mentally fit or tuff over in

adverse condition for being progressive is in profession and be alert so teacher’s of the

stream should not take undue advantage of yours, sometimes one comes forward for

commanding the students specially on 15 August and 26 January for flag Hoisting or in

other ceremonies. Here you have to be alert for command, and make it impressive, &



[222]

put your views in front of students and faculty, send the good athletic students for inter

college completions, whether your principal want or not, you have to struggle for the

welfare of students specially in sports, for that you have convincing ability or some sort

of tuff ness in yourself and prove yourself that you are a leader and fullfil your duties

on the part of physical education expert or educationist.

Physical fitness simply is the ability of your body systems to work together

efficiently, being efficient means being able to do daily activities with the learnt

amount of effort.

A fit person is able to carry out the typical activities of living, such as work and

still have enough energy and vigour to respond to emergency situations and to enjoy

leisure time activities. However – as you get older you most likely will be less active

and will need to develop a plan for regular physical activity, but getting fit and staying

fit can be fun. The activities you choose can be those that you like doing best and those

that are best for you. General surgeon of United States recently published a report

noting that being physically active provides many benefits to health and well being and

that being in active presents many health risk. In fact, inactivity is major risk factor for

many diseases (inactive life style is the biggest killer of human life) (Plato also

advocated that lack of physical activity destroy the good condition of every human

being while methodical and movement training preserve it) them fore increasing

physical activity shall be a major health goal for people of all ages1 a proverb says a

sound mind in a sound body, this incline towards the physical fitness- it is the ability to

perform daily task vigorously and alertly with energy left over for enjoying leisure time

activity and meeting emergency demands it is the ability to endure, to bear up, to

withstand stress to carry on in circumstances, where an unfit person could not continue,

and is a major basis for good health and will being fitness influences to some degree

qualities such as mental alertness and emotional stability. Fitness is individual quality.

It varies from person to person it is influenced by age, sex, heredity, personal habits,

exercise, and eating habits.

The saying sound mind in sound body supported by these following points on

scientific way.

1. Physical fitness improves brain health.



[223]

2. Improvement of learning.

3. Physical fitness and exercise are antidepressant

4. Exercise protect brain from damage and disease.

5. Physical fitness enhance Academic performance

Health and well being – Health is a word often associated with fitness it refers

to the state of optimal physical, mantel and social well being early definition of health

focused on illness. Health was nothing more than an absence of disease but as medical

and public Health experts received better training, they began to focus on the

prevention of illness or diseases well as on the treatment, this new focus led world

Health leaders to define health as more than absence from desease. It recent years the

definition of Health has been expanded to include wellness. A state of being that

enables you to reach your fullest potentials it includes your intellectual, social,

emotional, physical and spiritual Health.

Wellness has to do with feelings good about yourself and with having goals and

purposes in life. Wellness is more likely to be present in individuals. Who assume more

responsibility for their own health. So illness is the negative component of Health that

we want to treat or prevent and wellness is the positive component of health that we

want to promote. Health and Wellness Benefits- looking good, feeling good, enjoying

life, meeting emergencies, being physically fit, building self confidence, benefits of

fitness is endless, today there is a growing emphasis on looking good, feeling good and

living longer. Increasingly, scientific evidence tells up that one of the keys to achieving

these ideals is fitness and exercises. Getting moving is a challenge because today

physical activity is less a part of our daily lives. There are fever jobs that require

physical exertion. We have become a mechanically mobile society, relying on machine

rather than on muscle to get around in addition we have became a nation of observers

with more people including children spending their leisure time pursuing just that

leisure consequently, statistics show that obesity and overweight. the problems that

come with high blood pressure, diabetes, cardiac arrest, etc. one the rise. But statistics

also show that preventive medicine pays off. So one should not wait until his/her

Doctor gives an ultimatum. everyone must take the initiative to get active now. The

decision to carry out a physical fitness programme can not be taken lightly. It requires a



[224]

life long commitment of time and effort. Exercise must become one of these things that,

you do without question. Like bathing and brushing your teeth. Unless you are

convinced of the benefits of fitness and the risk of unfitness. You will not succeed it

has been realized that fitness add not only years to one’s life but life to one’s years, this

way the aim of life” Happy and Healthy life” is achieved.2

Health is the foundation of human life. It leads the man towards progress and

prosperity, Healthy people make healthy nation. In other words, health is wealth for an

individual, society and nation. The prosperity of a nation rests upon the health of its

citizens. But there is a lot of misconception about health. For a layman, health is a good

looking physique, for some it is a sound muscular body, for some it is a body without

disease or illness for some it is an efficient work ability of the body.

Health is the greatest wealth. He who has a good health, cherishes life in

enjoyment. Health is a way of life where mental, physical and social well-beings are

considered in the absence of a disease. In other words, health is the quality of life to

live most and serve best.

According to :

World Health Organisation (WHO): "Health is the state of complete physical,

mental and social well-beings and not merely an absence of disease or infirmity" (old).

WHO (New): “Attainment of life to lead a socially and economically

productive life”.

J.F. William : “It is the quality of life to live most and serve best”.

Health and Fitness

Health is a state of complete mental and physical well being whereas fitness is

the ability to meet the demands of a physical task. The following forms are the various

dimensions of health;

Physical

Mental

Social

Moral

Spiritual

PHYSICAL - Physical health is measure of physical fitness of the human organism.



[225]

MENTAL HEALTH - Mental health is a state of internal adjustment of man, achieved

by balancing expectations with realizations.

SOCIAL HEALTH - Social health denotes successful adjustment of a man in his

society.

MORAL HEALTH - Moral health is indication of the adherence of an individual to an

acceptable moral code which adds strength to his conduct and character.

SPIRITUAL HEALTH - Spiritual health is related to soul or spirit within oneself

which though separate and a distinct from physical body entity is an essential aspect of

human life and personality. All these are tuned to achieve the goals of life and personal

wellbeing such as;

To enjoy happy and peaceful living

Avoid disease

Delay death.3

Knowledge of health education assumes great importance in India, where most

of the people are ignorant about the basic principles of health and hygiene. Because of

this ignorance, they are unable to prevent the diseases, most of which are preventable.

There is an emergent need to remove this ignorance of masses. They are to be made

aware of fundamental and basic principles of health and hygiene. Health education

provides the scientific facts of community hygiene that could help in preventing and

eradicating many diseases and remove ignorance. Health education programmes are

basically of preventive and pramotive nature. As prevention is better than cure, such

programmes are very important in transmitting the knowledge, making the people

aware of various dreaded diseases, occurrence of which could be easily avoided. In this

way health education can play an important role in eliminating many problems that

adversely affect young people, adults and society in general.

It is necessary for a prosperous country to have healthy citizens. Health

education has a very significant role to play as it comprises health knowledge, health

habits and health attitudes. It can improve the individual family and community life for

a bright and prosperous future. Health education helps an individual to distinguish

between good and bad health habits and encourages him to make good habits as

enduring and lasting healthful behaviour. Health education is essential to assure that



[226]

proper health habits are established early in life, as habits and behaviour adopted in

childhood remain unchanged even in adult life. The good health habits instilled in

children during their formative years reflect in their life, making them healthy useful

and effective citizen of the country. In this way health education also contributes to

national growth.

Many physical defects and ailments like hearing and sight problems, bad

posture, malnutrition etc. Occur during early childhood. Health education plays an

important role in checking, preventing and curing these defects and ailments by

promoting intelligent health attitudes among them.

Health education is a comprehensive, qualitative and a dynamic process of

education as:

(1) It develops sound attitudes towards the importance of good health

and safety practice at home and in the community.

(2) It provides direct learning experience to encourage the practice of

wholesome healthy habits in daily living.

(3) It introduces students to the areas of health knowledge, enabling them to better

understand and cope up with individual and community health problems.

(4) It introduced students to the basic mechanism and functions of human body.

(5) It integrates the many sources of health information in the biological, social and

physical sciences so that can be applied in a meaningful way towards

establishing a total health concept.

(6) It helps students to achieve deeper insight into the nature of social relationship

and family life.

(7) It furnishes a setting for learning which enables the students to realize their

fullest potentialities.

(8) It encourages the development of responsibility and cooperation among

students in observing environmental controls.

(9) It establishes procedures for providing students with satisfactory health

counselling and guidance services.

(10) It contributes to the education of physically challenged people, enabling them to

make the most of educational opportunities available.



[227]

Now days health is considered as a worldwide social goal. Health education is

of great importance as its main aim is to achieve optimum health of an individual which

include all the dimensions of health i.e physical, mental, social, emotional and spiritual.

Health education has become one of the most important disciplines of education.

Health education is basic to learning to happiness to success to effective citizenship and

to worthwhile living.4

Tips for Health and Fitness

Four essential things for making life healthy and Happy.

1. Regular exercise (minimum 30 mints with variation)

2. Balance diet (Nutritional diet)

3. Stress (low level)

4. Sound sleep (6 to 7 hours)

Regular exercise

3 days (week) Aerobic workout

(volleyball, T.T., cycling, jogging, Aerobics)

Time consuming Activities

Improve-Respiratory+ Circulatory (Coridio-vascular efficiency)

3 days (week) Anaerobic workout

(fast Activity, (less time consuming) weight training

Improve muscular system (enlargement of muscles)

Enlargement of muscles improves immunity system-better Health

Metabolism process becomes fast

Better shape to body

Muscle gain strength

With the aging (after the age of 40) muscle mass reduces by 150 gram/year to maintain

muscle mass is must (after age of 40 )

There is only one way to maintain muscle mass

Light weight training, Rasistanee exercises.

Benefits of exercise is endless- improve total fitness,

Batter longevity (span of life increase) muscular body,

Better immunity system- better health), enjoy each work



[228]

Happy living –real aim of life, Aging process becomes Slow – exercise act as a anti Ageing pill, That’s why physical exercise or fitness is the base for personality development (Aim of physical education) fitness or physical exercise+ socializatoion Process = Personality (Dealing with others, behave with others)In nut shell-Health is wealth, wealth is not Health (you will enjoy life only with the better condition of Health - positive health. (Extreme condition of Health) Health is – primary aim, wealth is secondary aim Latest Research done in London, it shows Limited alcohol- Help in bone formation Help in making strong bone, if fracture occurs- Healing become fast, Improve decision making ability (Reflexes becomes fast) if unlimited-weaken bone, no bone formation, if fracture occurs-Healing become slow), loss of sensibility In nut-shell Avoid injury (foul or rough play)

As Inactive life style is the biggest killer of human life so make your life, Active, enjoyable (Through the means of physical exercise, (physical exercise is the only way to make like active, healthy, happy and Tension free) keep stress (cause of tension) level low through-games and sports (Recreational games) enjoy and gossiping with friends, play with son or Daughter, play with pets, watch your favorite programme on T.V. (Best way for utilizing free time/leisure time in constructive manner). Conclusion

It is very obvious from above written material that the fitness, Health and Health Education is the base for holistic development (Mental, Emotional, Social, Spiritual, Hygiene, Physical development etc.) if one is taking part in physical exercise regularly, with the balance diet and sound sleeps for 6-7 hours then he/she can go to achieve the positive health and positive approach to his profession. References : 1. Fitness for all by Charles B. Corbin Ruth Lindsay. 2. Essentials of physical Education - By Late Shri Ajmer Singh. 3. Health, Diet and Fitness by Dr. (Mrs.) Jothi Dayananthan. 4. Anatomy, Physiology, Physiology of Exercises and Health Education by Dr.

Rajendra Ramteke.



[229]

Impact of Human Resource Development Practices of employee’s Performance in Textile Industry

Annu Rani

Assistant Professor, Deptt. of Commerce, Vivekanand

Anil Kumar, P.G. College, Dahina

Abstract :- Indian textile industry is one of the oldest industries in Indian economy which provides

employment to about 45 Million people directly and 20 Million people indirectly the Indian

textiles industry currently estimated at around US $ 120 billion and is expected to reach US $

230 billion by e2020. It contributes approximately 2 percent to India’s GDP and 14 percent to

overall Index of industrial production. This paper investigates the impact of human resource

development policies and practices an the performance of employees in textile industry in India.

The results highlighted that all the tested variables have significant impact on employee’s

performance as per the finding out of five HRM practices training and development loel face

activity and compensation benefits have emerged as the best practices in impacting

organizational commitment.

Keywords:-Textile industry, HRD polices, employee, performance regression.

Objective of the study

The prime objective of the study is to examine the impact of HRD

polices and practices on the performance of employee in Indian textile industry.

1. To study the impact of Human Research Development strategies in Textile

Industries in India.

2. To study various H.R.D. strategies which are important in the development

of employees performances.

3. Literature Review

4. A study on impact of HR strategies on employee performance in Abu Dhabi

Distribution Company highlighted the employee perceptions on HR

strategies implemented but ADDC The results highlighted that must

employees are unaware of the performance appraisal system. Therefore it is

essential to revise and focus on promotion and reward policies.



[230]

Introduction :

Human resource management is an operation in companies designed to

maximize employee performance in order to meet the employer’s strategic goals

and objectives . Human resource management is the planning organizing ,

directly and controlling of the procurement development compensation,

integration, maintenance and reproduction of human resources 80 that

individual, organizational and societal objectives are accomplished . It is that

branch of Mgt which is responsible for concentrating on this aspects of

relationship of management to employees with the development of the

individual and the group. Human resource management involves all

management decisions and practices that directly affect or influence the people

or human resource who work for the organization. HRM practices include a

number of progranmes that ensure concrete transformation in to real practices.

Those practices such as the establishment of safe working environment effective

recruitment and selection policies, equal employment opportunity awareness

and training as well as making available additional training and development

opportunities that are vital for the development of employees in general as well

as for the organization in particular The important policies and practices are as

follow.

Recruitment & Selection :

Recruitment helps in creating a pool of suitable and interested job

applicants out of which few are choose for the further selection process.

Recruitment is the process of searching for prospective employees and

stimulating and encouraging them to apply for job in an organization. A

successful recruitment process results in a good number of qualified applicants

for the vacancy and the next task is to select the most suitable applicants from

this pool however, selection is a process of choosing individuals who have

relevant qualifications to fill an existing or projected job opening selection is

concerned with indentifying the best candidate or candidates for job from a pool

of qualified applicants developed during the recruiting process.



[231]

Training & Development

Training & development is one of the key HR function. Most

organisations look at training and development as an integral part of the human

resource development activity. The turn of the century has seen increased focus

on the same in organisations globally. Many organisation have mandated

training hours per year for employees keeping in consideration the fact that

technology is deskilling the employees at a very fast rate, Training an organized

procedure by which people learn knowledge and skill for a definite purpose It is

a never ending or continuous process.

Though training is closely related with education and development it

needs to be differentiated from these terms. Employee training is distinct from

management development. Training is a short term process utilizing a

systematic and organized procedure by which non-managerial personnel learn

technical knowledge and skills for a definite purpose . It refers to instructions in

technical and mechanical operation like operation of a machine. It is designed

primarily for non-managers. Training involves helping and individual learn how

to perform his present job satis factorily. Development involves preparing the

individual for a future job and gowth of the individual in all respects. It is

designed primarily for managers.

Performance Appraisal :

A performance appraisal is a regular review of an employee’s job

performance and overall contribution to a company Also known as an annual

review performance review or evaluation or employee appraisal , “ a

performance appraisa evaluates and employee’s skills achievement and growth

or lack thereof companies use performance appraisals to give employees big-

picture feedback on their work and to justify pay increases and bonuses as well

as termination decision Performance appraisal is the process of examining the

performance and progress of an employee on a given job. Performance appraisal

is the systematic, periodic and an impartial rating of an employee’s excellence

in matters pertaining to his present job and his potential for a better job . In a

prevailing competitive lord many organisations struggle to survive and develop.



[232]

As the technology also grows in an unprecedented manner these organisation

have started paying more attention to employee’s productivity and performance.

Rewards & Recognition :

Rewards and recognition are a set of benefits provided to individuals in

return for their loillingness to per for various jobs and tasks. The purpose of

giving rewards is to provide competent employees with a cast effective pay

structure. That will attract motivate and retain them. A reward may be direct

reward or indirect reward direct reward consist of wages and salaries meaning

there by the compensation people receive on a regular basis or through bonuses

and profit sharing. However indirect rewards refer to fringe benefits that form

an important part of overall reward packages in most organisation, including

pension plans accident insurance and paid vacations and sick leave performance

enhancement creates more opportunities for the employees to commit to the

ideals of the organisation employees need to understand the rationale through

which rewards and compensation are distributed in order to achieve their task

and goals more effectively rewards and recognition relates to how employees

are rewarded in accordance with their value to their organisation over recent

decades this view of how to motivate and retain employers has become

increasingly associated with the notion of recognition and other forms of non

financial rewards such appraise achievement responsibility and personal

growth.

Indian Textile Industry:

Indian textile industry is one of the oldest industries in Indian economy.

The textile industry in India traditionally after agriculture is the only industry

that has generated huge employment for both skilled and unskilled labour in

textiles. It is one of the largest contributors to India’s exports with

approximately 13 percent of total exports. It has two broad segment. Firstly the

recognized sector consists of handloom, handicrafts and sericulture which are

operated on a small scale and through traditional tools and methods. The second

is the organized sector consisting of spinning apparel and garments segment

which apply modern machinery and techniques such as economies of scale. It



[233]

employee about 45 Million people directly and 20 Million people indirectly

India’s overall textile exports during fy 2015-16 stood at US $ 40 billion. The

Indian textiles industry currently estimated at around US $ 120 billion is

expected to reach US $ 230 billion by the end of 2020. It contributes

approximately two percent to India’s gross Domestic 10 percent of

manufacturing production and 14 percent to overall index of industrial

production As far as Government initiatives are concerned the government has

come up with a number of exposit promotion policies for the textiles sector by

allowing 100 percent FDI in Indian sector. The Ministry of textiles has signed

memorandum of understanding with 20 e commerce companies to provide a

platform to artisans and weavers in different handloom and handicraft dusters

across the country for selling their products directly to the consumer. Be sides

the Government of India has announced a slew of labour friendly reforms aimed

at generation around 11.1 million jobs in apparel and made up 8 sectors and

increasing textile exports to US $ 32.8 billion and investment of Rs 80.630

crore (US & 12.9 billion) in the next three years.

Profit of Selected textile companies

Bombay Dyeing

The Bombay Dyeing mfg co ltd popularly known as Bombay Dyeing

was established in the year 1879 is the flagship company of the wadia group

which is engaged primarily in the business of Textiles the present chairman is

musli wadia .

Raymond Ltd :

Raymond ltd is the largest integrated manufacture of worsted fabric in

the world based in Mumbai, Maharashtra. It has over 60% market share in

worsted suiting in India. It is the India’s biggest wooden fabrics maker. Textile

division of the company has a distribution network of more than 4,000

multiband outlets and over 637 exclusive retell shops in the domestic market

itself. Its products export to over 55 countries inducing US.



[234]

Grasim Industries limited :

Grasim industries limited is an Indian building materials Manufacturing

company based on Mumbai Maharashtra. It was started in 1948 as a textile

Manu facture. The company is a subsidiary of aditya Birla group which operates

over 40 companies in 12 countries. Grasim is the world largest producer of

viscose rayon fibber with about 24% market share. Textile and related products

contributes to 15% of the group turnover.

Arvind Limited :

Arvind limited is a textile manufacturer and the flagship company of the

lalbhai group. Its head quarter is located in Ahmadabad Gujarat. It manufactures

cotton shirting denim knits and bottom weight fabrics. It has recently ventured

in to technical textiles when it started advanced materials division in 2011. It is

India largest denim Manu facture part from being the world fourth largest

producer and exporter of denim.

Conclusion :

Human resource development practices are those practices that directly

affect or influence the people or human resources who work for the organization

such as the establishment of safe working environment effective recruitment

and selection policies equal employment opportunity proper training and

development performance appraisal rewards and recognition etc that are vital

for the development of employees in general as well as for the organization in

particular. The present research has been conducted to examine the impact of

HRD policies and practices on the performance of employees in Indian textile

industry The study used four HR policies namely recruitment and selection

policy training and development policy rewards and recognition policy and

performance appraisal polict as independent cariables where as employee’s

performance is taken as dependent variable primary data was collected with the

help of a well designed questionnaire The sample size is 14 employees working

in four selected textile companies multiple linears regression was used to

analyze the results through statistical package for the science (SPSS) 20 version



[235]

the findings highlighted that there is a significant impact of HR policies and

practices on the performance of employees in selected textile companies.

References :

1. Macky K Johnson G. Managing Human Resources in New Zealand (2nd

ed) M Graw Hill Auckland 2004

2. Cardon M stevens c managing Human resources in small organizations

what do we know Human resources management Review 2004

3. All Kahtani NS Khan NA Human resource development practices in

telecom sector in Saudi Aravle.



[236]

A study on Digital Marketing

Annu Rani Assistant Professor,

Deptt. of Commerce, Vivekanand

Abstract:- In this world of digitization digital marketing is a vogue that is sweeping across the whole

world. The trend of Digital Marketing is growing day by day with the concept of internet marketing that

is turning in to an important platform of digital marketing along with the electronic gadgets like the

digital bill boards, Mobile, tablets and smart phones, gaming consoles and many such gadgets that help

in digital marketing. Online marketing they refers to advertising and marketing attempts which they use

emails and web as their strategy for business. And few years from now it will be eventually seen that the

conventional marketing being being replaced by digital marketing digital marketing is going to be top on

the agenda of many marketers and they might be looking for innovative ways to market online, reduce

cost per lead, increase click-through-rates and conversion rates and discover what hot in digital

marketing.

Key words:-Digital marketing, Business model, Insights, Multi media Messages, Social Marketing,

Seo strategies.

Objectives of the study:

1. To study the growth of digital marketing in India

2. To study various facets of digital marketing

Introduction

Digital marketing being a comparatively newer field, many individuals are

curious to know about it as they are not aware. In simple terms digital marketing can be

called as the process of promoting brands or products using the electronic Media digital

marketing e-guide, every single aspect of digital marketing will be discussed to help

marketers understand what digital marketing is , how it function and how it can help

them optimize their marketing campaign digital marketing is a board term that refers to

various and different promotional techniques deployed to reach customer via digital

technologies digital marketing is also known as internet marketing but their actual

processes differ as digital marketing is considered more targeted measurable and

interactive digital marketing includes a reft of internet marketing techniques such as



[237]

search engine optimization (seo) search engine marketing (SEM) and link building . It

also extends to non-internet channels that provide digital media, such as short

messaging service (SMS) multimedia messaging service (MMS) call back and on hold

mobile ring tones, e-books optical disks and games.

Marketing executive are most supportive of digital marketing because of the

ability to easily track and measure results of the marketing communication. Because of

the use digital technology the results of a digital marketing efforts can be tracked by

reach views clicks visits response rates purchases made and so on I will explore the

details and importance of these types of measurement techniques in the coming weeks

but for now understand that digital marketing requires the ability to measure the results

of a digital marketing campaign. The use of digital technologies to create and integrated

targeted and measurable communication which help to acquire and retain customers

while building deeper relationship with them is digital marketing. It must be digital

because of the technology. It is targeted because of the value in the technology allows it

to be it must establish relationships beaus marketing using digital technology generally

require input from potential consumers. It must be measurable consumers. It must be

measurable because measurability is inherent in the use of digital technology and

inherent in the use of marketing.

A key digital marketing objective is engaging customers and allaying them to

interact with the brand through servicing and delivery of digital media This is achieved

by designing digital media in such a way that it require same type of end use action to

view or receive the motive behind that media’s creation for example to receive a free e-

book a customer might be required to register or fill out a form benefiting the advertise

with a valuable customer or lead. Digital marketing communications can be distributed

at a faster rate and broader reach than traditional marketing communication.

The future of digital marketing based on the study.

1 Be very focused on consumers.

2 Build amazing experiences for the customers.

3 Continuously innovate the product.



[238]

1. Rise of Social marketing in India.

The scope of social media in India is immense and increasing rapidly. It is the

10th biggest economy and also has the 2nd largest population in the world. A survey in

2019 which includes the top business admitted that 15-20% of their marketing budget is

allocated for social media advertising form that it is understood the importance of

social media in brand adverting.

There will not be any person who does not know what social media is In not it

But many individuals may not know how it is important in digital marketing and how

social media marketing can enhance career growth based on the statuses analysis it is

been found that the number of users of the social network in India will be 258.27

million It is a drastic rise from approximately 168 million users in 2016. India is en

countering development in the number of mobile users regardless it contains just 16

percent of the nations aggregate populace with access to the web clients will end up

noticeably the world biggest web base after China and the US.

As purchase turn out to be more connected with the things around them from

shopping to news and interaction buglers are changing quick and now being presented

to data immediately to take action accordingly with the new type of digital buyers even

viands have customized their marketing promotion collaboration and engagement

methodologies to address the issues needs and desire of their clients according to a

survey by ambassador a famous saas referral marketing plat form 71% of those who

have had a better social media is inevitable today and the brand which is not active on

social media does not exist for their consumers.

2. Shift from tactical seo to seo strategy :

Last year with the launch of humming bird update from googol search behavior

changed and search engine algorithm improved for better. There fore seo noise to

evolve now from tactical approach to long term seo strategy.

SEO strategy is the basically to.

Define the target audience

Focus on key words that are relevant to the audience not search.

Enhance quality of the content.

Improve the presentation of search engine listings with mark up 8.



[239]

Reach the audience wherever they are online.

Engage audience and help boost uses generated content.

Integrate SEO with complete digital strategy.

3. Content marketing :

Content marketing is a strategic marketing approach focused on cresting and

distributing valuable relevant and consistent content to attract and retain a clearly

defined audience and ultimately to drive profitable customer action content

marketing will be throughout in limelight in India people are extensively searching

researching and consuming consent text audio image and video largely social media

networks are pushing for improved meaningful and creative content marketing.

Text is the foremost tool in SEO that will easily help you acquire higher ranks

reach targeted audience engage your audience and convert them. It is at the top of

all the game that you may be planning I Mayes are usually subordinate to text and

complement it and they are highly popular money Indians a mage are known to

trigger imagination and help in building trust.

4. Viral video marketing.

With up to 250 million internet users in India. It is easy to go viral with

something awesome zxt brands and businesses will be planning to use viral video

marketing with the help of social media network more effectively to reach large

audience in India essentially with video marketing in India it has become easier to

build brand identity improve brand story telling and engage audience and enhance

brand loyalty viral video marketing will increasingly find many takers in

increasingly find many takers in India given many advantages At present big brands

Indian cinema. Indian music government of indie political parties Indian

educational organizations and many others are successfully using video to entertain

educate and emotionalize audience in India.

5 Mobile marketing :

Mobile marketing is a multi channel clinical marketing strategy aimed at

reaching a target audience on their smart phones tablets and or other mobile devices

via website email sms and mms social media and apps.



[240]

Mobile is disrupting the way people engage with brands everything that can be

done on a desktop computer is now available on a mobile device from opening and

email to visiting your website to recalling your content it is all accessible through a

small mobile screen. 80% of internet users own a smart phone. Mobile platforms

such as mart phones and tablets host up to 60% of digital media time for usurers in

the US.

6 Localization :

In India localization has become endemic It will gain further ground with the

help of Google India search engine Google maps online classifieds local online

search engines (e.g. just dial) local listing website (e.y cirotal ) vertical search

engines (e.g 20 mata and think Vidal and others more over web sites will

increasingly localize as well in digital marketing industry localization will increase

among brands businesses many local joints bar clinics super stores shops

restaurants club pubs companies organizations etc will also invert in digital

marketing to reach their audience online and specifically on mobile abide beats

Google in china Urdu speaking gamers.

7. Personalization :

Advertising personalization uses data points insights into who a customer is to

increase an ad’s relevancy These can be simple insights such as basic demographic

information or more specific like niche interest buying internet and behavioral

patterns Either way its precise one to one marketing a brand making a consumer

feel that they are speaking directly to them and addressing their unique needs

personalization will endive overtime in to much larger However there are privacy

issues attached with it but despite that there are many takers for personal 29tion to

improve customer experience and delight goose acquired NEST labs for US& 3.2

billion NEST labs manufactures smart home thermostat Google use NEST to know

more about list customer for better customer experience The punt is personalization

will not expand world but also in India at much higher speed espy coaly in e

commerce industry As all are trying to enhance customer experience to push sales

by providing in them more personalized services.



[241]

8 Online and Social customer relationship management :

Many Indian e-commerce web sites portals and other do not have effective

online customer relationship management systems many custodies are now

comfortable on chat email mobile chat and social media Therefore companies are

expanding its outreach to improve customer delight social CRM would be strategic

of all in using social CRM on the go.

9 Multi-channel Integrated marketing

Integrated marketing is an approach to creating a unified and seamless

experience for consumers to interact with the brand enterprise . It attempts to meld

all aspect of marketing communication such as advertising sales promotion public

relations direct marketing and social media through their respective mix of tactics

methods channels media and actives so that all work together as a unified force. In

India multi channel integrated marketing will grow in popularity and effectiveness

As many brands business in India are increasingly embracing this concept to attract

and engage customers on all online and offline platforms.

All businesses brands in India will try to integrate their marketing efforts

especially their digital marketing with offline marketing In India brands are

realizing of importance integrated marketing communication in which conveying

single message across all platforms helping them to improve brand experience

brand loyalty keep brand top of the mind and increase sales.

10 Humanization of Digital marketing :

Digital marketing will humanize further where brands business will understand

the importance of conversation and engayage mints moreover Google ranks higher

only those contents that have higher likes share comments and other customer

engagement signals companies will try to connect and converse more through

digital marketing with their target audience. And we can expect this will only

increase customer retention brand loyalty and word of moth digital strategies in

future will be based on co creation and collaboration concept where humanization

of business inter activity and engagement will help in delivering value.



[242]

Conclusion:

In a recent research digital marketing shows that in India businesses are getting

serious about digital marketing and investing in it heavily In the current scenario

internet is pretty small right now and the larger share of the target market is still

available offline however going forward in the next two to three years digital

consumption and spends will go up in India and for this to happen both qualitgand

quantity of content needs to grow in India currently the digital modicum has its

constraints with the number of people accessing and spending time on this It has to

become a large enough medium inters of consumption to compete with TV. Once

that is achieved the overall industry spends on digital standing at around 15 to 20

percent in the next two to three years Though people are buying online a large

proportion of their time is still spends offline.

References:

1. Chaffey, D & Ellis-Chadwick, F-2012 Digital marketing : strategy,

Implementation and practice, 5ed, Harlow, Pearson education ltd.

2. WWW. Multimedia marketing.com

3. www.businesstoday.com

4. Katina, B (2013) The advantages of webinar.

5. SWG 2011, “The advantages of organic SEO over pay per click advertising”.

6. Lusted , M (2011) Social net working Minnesota ABDO Publishing.



[243]

Various Methods Used In Proteiomic Study of Tinospora cordifolia : A Case Study in Agra, Etah, Firozabad and Mathura Districts

Dr. Yugal Pratap Singh

Abstract

Proteomics can be defined as the systematic analysis of proteome, the protein

complement of genome. It provides information on the entire complement of proteins

including the modulation made to a particular set of proteins within an organism or

system. It also deals with the studies on protein structure, its functions, interactions,

modifications. New a day proteomics studies in medicinal plants focus on complex

mixtures and reputed medicinal effects at the cellular and molecular levels. The present

study is aimed on Tinospora cordifolia by using various methods used in Proteiomic

interpretations in four districts in west Uttar Pradesh.

Keywords : Protein analysis, Polyacrylamide Gel, Electrophoresis, Protein Staining,

Gel seanning, Seed Morphology

Introduction

The Proteomic study of four types of Tinospora cordifolia in four districts of

west U.P. was carried by using the following methods :

(i) Plant Materials

The fresh and young leafs of Tinospora cordifolia were collected from various

locations of four districts of Uttar Pradesh (Agra, Mathura, Firozabad and Etah). The

plants were harvested in the morning prior to extraction, and the leaves were cut and

weighed before subjecting to protein extraction.

(ii) Time Course Study

Plants were harvested for leaves for protein analysis and identification. The time

course study was performed twice. The protein analysis from leaves were subjected on

to two-dimensional electrophoresis 3-5 sets.

(iii) Protein purification and SDS-PAGE (Polyacrylamide Gel

Electrophoresis)



[244]

One gram of fresh leaf tissues was chopped into pieces and frozen in liquid

nitrogen. Two ml extraction buffer [0.1 M Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 0.01 M beta-

mercaptoethanol, 1 mM dithiothreitol, 0.02 mM phenylmethylsulfonyl fluoride (PMSF)

(Sigma)] with 0.5 g sea sand was added for grinding and homogenization. The

homogenated sample was centrifuged at 5380 g centrifuge (Sigma, Model 2K15) for 10

min. Supernatant was precipitated by addition of two volumes of 100% (v/v) acetone,

incubated on ice for six hr, and centrifuged at 4oC for 15 min at 16000 g. The pellet was

washed with 70% (v/v) ethanol, air-dried and re-suspended in 40 _l of loading buffer

[10 mM Tris (pH 6.8), 1% (v/v) beta-mercaptoethanol, 2.5% (v/v) glycerol, 1% (w/v)

bromophenol blue]. Ten _1 of protein samples were loaded into each well of the 12%

native-polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis (PAGE) [12% (w/v) acrylamide, 0.4% (w/v)

N, N-methylene-bis-acrylamide, 0.28 M Tris (pH 8.8), 0.5% (w/v) ammonium

persulfate and 0.5% (v/v) TEMED], and electrophored at 100V for two hr. Experiment

was conducted with three replicas. The SDS-PAGE was performed at 12mA for 3

hours.

(iv) Protein Staining

The gels were stained with 0.1% Coomassie blue R-250, 40% methanol and

10% acetic acid overnight, and then destained with 40% methanol and 5% acetic acid

for 3 hours, followed by 10% of methanol and 5% acetic acid for 2 hours.

(v) Gel Scanning and Image analyses

The gels were scanned by an Image Scanner. The images were analysed by

matching and comparing the different bands of protein. A master gel was selected from

the gel with the highest number of bands. The fragmentation profile of protein bands

was manually inspected to make sure the right identification.

The colour of immature fruit was green however; it is brown at maturation time.

The fruit is globular in shape with 1.6 cm in diameter. It opens with great force when

ripened elastically dehiscent.

Seed morphology

Table 1 shows the number of seeds per fruit and seed-set percentage in

Tinospora cordifolia. It is clear from above Table 1 that seeds are non-endospermic and

ovoid or compressed in shaped. Total number of seeds/fruit is 4 and seed set percentage



[245]

is 80%. Seeds are brone on minute, hook like outgrowth. Mature seeds are brown in

colour and 100 seeds weight is 2.4 gm.

Table 1 Morphology of seeds of Tinospora cordifolia

S.No. Parameters Observation

1 Type of seed Globular

2 Shape of seed Compressed

3 Seed / fruit 4

4 Seed set % 80

5 100 seed weight (gm) 2.4

References :

1. W.C. Cho, contribution of encopreteomics : Current Trends and Future Perspective,

2007

2. Peter Endress, Plant Morphology, American Society of Plant Taxonomists, 2006.

3. J. Heimann, R. Baner, New Medicinal Applications of Plants Secondary,

Metabolism, 1999, Wink.

4. Y. Ho, A Gruhler, G.D. Moove, Systematic Identification of Protein complexes.

2002, Nature Journal.

5. K.K. Hullatti, M.S. Sharda, comparative phytochemical Investigation of the sources

of Ayurvedic Drug Patha, 2010, Indian Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences.

RESEARCH - WordPress.com

Documents

Transcript of RESEARCH - WordPress.com